Epicor Iscala 3.2 UserGuide PDF

Epicor iScala User Guide
3.2
Disclaimer
This document is for informational purposes only and is subject to change without notice. This document and its
contents, including the viewpoints, dates and functional content expressed herein are believed to be accurate as of its
date of publication. However, Epicor Software Corporation makes no guarantee, representations or warranties with
regard to the enclosed information and specifically disclaims any applicable implied warranties, such as fitness for a
particular purpose, merchantability, satisfactory quality or reasonable skill and care. As each user of Epicor software is
likely to be unique in their requirements in the use of such software and their business processes, users of this document
are always advised to discuss the content of this document with their Epicor account manager. All information contained
herein is subject to change without notice and changes to this document since printing and other important information
about the software product are made or published in release notes, and you are urged to obtain the current release
notes for the software product. We welcome user comments and reserve the right to revise this publication and/or
make improvements or changes to the products or programs described in this publication at any time, without notice.
The usage of any Epicor software shall be pursuant to an Epicor end user license agreement and the performance of
any consulting services by Epicor personnel shall be pursuant to Epicor's standard services terms and conditions. Usage
of the solution(s) described in this document with other Epicor software or third party products may require the purchase
of licenses for such other products. Where any software is expressed to be compliant with local laws or requirements
in this document, such compliance is not a warranty and is based solely on Epicor's current understanding of such laws
and requirements. All laws and requirements are subject to varying interpretations as well as to change and accordingly
Epicor cannot guarantee that the software will be compliant and up to date with such changes. All statements of
platform and product compatibility in this document shall be considered individually in relation to the products referred
to in the relevant statement, i.e., where any Epicor software is stated to be compatible with one product and also
stated to be compatible with another product, it should not be interpreted that such Epicor software is compatible
with both of the products running at the same time on the same platform or environment. Additionally platform or
product compatibility may require the application of Epicor or third-party updates, patches and/or service packs and
Epicor has no responsibility for compatibility issues which may be caused by updates, patches and/or service packs
released by third parties after the date of publication of this document. Epicor® is a registered trademark and/or
trademark of Epicor Software Corporation in the United States, certain other countries and/or the EU. All other
trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. Copyright © Epicor Software Corporation 2018.
All rights reserved. Not for distribution or republication. Information in this document is subject to Epicor license
agreement(s).
3.2
Revision: April 11, 2018 7:01 a.m.
Total pages: 263
userguideprint.ditaval
Epicor iScala User Guide Contents
Contents
Introduction..........................................................................................................................17
Chapter 1: Getting Started..............................................................................18

Logging On....................................................................................................................................................18
Logging On............................................................................................................................................18
Advanced Logon Options........................................................................................................................19
The Home Screen...........................................................................................................................................19
Home Screen Areas................................................................................................................................19
iScala Tree Menu....................................................................................................................................20
Recent Forms..........................................................................................................................................22
Tiles........................................................................................................................................................23
To Create a Tile...............................................................................................................................23
To Create a New Custom Tile..........................................................................................................24
To Change a Tile.............................................................................................................................24
Status Bar...............................................................................................................................................25
New (Second) Session.............................................................................................................................25
Customize Toolbars................................................................................................................................26
Change The Color Schemes....................................................................................................................27
Program Navigation And Data Entry...............................................................................................................29
Enter Data In Form Fields........................................................................................................................29
Screen Navigation..........................................................................................................................................30
Customize An Entry Type........................................................................................................................31
Documentation Kit.........................................................................................................................................32
Chapter 2: Application Setup..........................................................................34

Company Setup.............................................................................................................................................34
Set Company Parameters........................................................................................................................35
Enter Accounting Dimensions.................................................................................................................37
Use the Currency File..............................................................................................................................38
Add Or Change Currency Definition................................................................................................38
Enter Currency Rates.......................................................................................................................39
Enter Tax Rates................................................................................................................................39
Define Calendars...........................................................................................................................................40
Enter or Adjust Generic Calendar............................................................................................................40
Enter or Adjust Calendar Collection........................................................................................................41
Set Up Geographical Units.............................................................................................................................41
Set up Cities...........................................................................................................................................41
Advanced Tax Engine.....................................................................................................................................41
Set Up Advanced Tax Engine..................................................................................................................42
General Ledger..............................................................................................................................................42
3.2 3
Contents Epicor iScala User Guide
Set Up General Parameters.....................................................................................................................42

Journal Codes................................................................................................................................................45
Journal Codes.........................................................................................................................................45
Sales Ledger...................................................................................................................................................46
Define Parameters..................................................................................................................................46
Set Accounting Codes............................................................................................................................50
Use The Automatic Accounting Schedule................................................................................................50
Define Payment Terms To Print...............................................................................................................51
Define Delivery Terms to Print.................................................................................................................52
Define Delivery Methods.........................................................................................................................52
Purchase Ledger.............................................................................................................................................53
Set Parameters........................................................................................................................................53
Set Accounting Codes............................................................................................................................55
Use The Automatic Accounting Schedule................................................................................................55
Define Payment Terms............................................................................................................................56
Define Delivery Terms.............................................................................................................................57
Define Delivery Methods.........................................................................................................................57
Stock Control.................................................................................................................................................58
Define Stock Control Parameters............................................................................................................58
Define Accounting Codes.......................................................................................................................61
Use the Automatic Accounting Schedule................................................................................................62
Warehouse Management...............................................................................................................................63
Enter Basic Warehouse Information........................................................................................................63
Enter Warehouse Accounting Information..............................................................................................63
Use Switches..........................................................................................................................................64
Define Warehouse Area Management....................................................................................................64
Set Up a Bin............................................................................................................................................65
Enter Warehouse Details.........................................................................................................................65
Purchase Control Parameters.........................................................................................................................66
Purchase Order Types.............................................................................................................................66
Customize Purchase Control Parameters.................................................................................................66
Sales Order Parameters..................................................................................................................................67
Sales Order Types...................................................................................................................................67
Use the Parameters Routine....................................................................................................................68
Chapter 3: Selling and Receiving Payments..................................................72

Setup.............................................................................................................................................................72
Available to Promise (ATP)......................................................................................................................72
Set Up Warehouses................................................................................................................................72
Set Up Customers...................................................................................................................................73
Set Up Stock Items..................................................................................................................................73
Define ATP Rescheduling Priority.............................................................................................................74
Sales Management Configuration..................................................................................................................74
Enter Sales Order Parameters..................................................................................................................74
4 3.2
Configure Automatic Accounting Schedule Rules....................................................................................75

Order Process.................................................................................................................................................76
Enter an Order........................................................................................................................................76
Enter A Sales Order.........................................................................................................................76
Enter Order Lines.............................................................................................................................76
Produce And Assemble Orders For Stock Control - Bill Of Material .........................................................77
Enter/Adjust Order...........................................................................................................................77
Enter Order Lines.............................................................................................................................77
Print An Order Confirmation............................................................................................................78
Operations.....................................................................................................................................................78
Quotation Process...................................................................................................................................78
Enter A Quotation..................................................................................................................................78
Enter Quotation Lines......................................................................................................................79
Print A Quotation...................................................................................................................................79
Convert A Quotation To An Order..........................................................................................................79
Delivery..........................................................................................................................................................80
Sales Order Delivery................................................................................................................................80
Deliver a Sales Order...............................................................................................................................80
Create an Automatic Drop Shipment......................................................................................................81
Allocations.....................................................................................................................................................81
Create Mass Allocations..........................................................................................................................81
Create an Allocation Manually................................................................................................................82
Invoicing........................................................................................................................................................82
Sales Order Consolidation.......................................................................................................................82
Print Invoices..........................................................................................................................................83
Close Invoice..........................................................................................................................................84
Enter Customer Invoice Payment Receipts...............................................................................................84
Print Payment Journals............................................................................................................................85
Print Payment Receipts............................................................................................................................85
Available to Promise (ATP)..............................................................................................................................86
Set Up Warehouses................................................................................................................................86
Set Up ATP options for a customer.........................................................................................................87
Set Up Stock Items..................................................................................................................................87
Define ATP Rescheduling Priority.............................................................................................................87
Available to Promise (ATP)..............................................................................................................................88
Use ATP Rescheduling.............................................................................................................................88
ATP Interaction with Lead Time Management Functionality.....................................................................89
Common Picking...........................................................................................................................................89
Set Up Common Picking in a Warehouse................................................................................................90
Set Up Picking Parameters......................................................................................................................90
Enter A Box............................................................................................................................................91
Print A Picking List..................................................................................................................................91
Enter Picking Results...............................................................................................................................92
Release a Picking List for Shipment.........................................................................................................92
Delivery Approvals.........................................................................................................................................93
3.2 5
Use the Order Approval Screen...............................................................................................................93

Approve an Order Line Manually.............................................................................................................93
Controlled Distribution...................................................................................................................................94
Advanced Credit Control........................................................................................................................94
Set Up Utilized Credit Limit Elements......................................................................................................94
Set Up Credit Check Execution Parameters..............................................................................................95
Set Up Approval Levels...........................................................................................................................95
Enter Credit Limit For A Customer..........................................................................................................95
Prepayments..................................................................................................................................................96
Link A Prepayment To A Sales Order.......................................................................................................96
Print Prepayment Invoices.......................................................................................................................96
Update Payment Information..................................................................................................................97
Export Control...............................................................................................................................................97
Activate Export Control...........................................................................................................................97
Set The Export Status On A Stock Item....................................................................................................98
Set Up Licensing for a Customer.............................................................................................................98
Define Import Settings For A Country.....................................................................................................98
Create An Export Control Rule................................................................................................................99
Reports And Enquires.....................................................................................................................................99
Enquire On The Order File.......................................................................................................................99
Print Quotation Reports........................................................................................................................100
Use Sales History Reports......................................................................................................................100
Chapter 4: Customers And Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger)................102

Setup...........................................................................................................................................................102
Customers and Customer Information.........................................................................................................102
Define Basic Customer Information.......................................................................................................102
Define The Delivery Address..................................................................................................................103
Enter Statistics and Budget Information................................................................................................103
Enter Currency And Tax Information.....................................................................................................103
Define Accounting Options...................................................................................................................104
Enter Order Information........................................................................................................................104
Enter Additional Order Information.......................................................................................................105
Credit Control..............................................................................................................................................105
Define Credit And Payment Terms........................................................................................................105
Set Automatic Credit Hold....................................................................................................................106
Print Reminders or Statements For Customers.......................................................................................106
Charge Periodic Interest........................................................................................................................107
Print A Credit Control Report................................................................................................................107
Use The Collection Proposal..................................................................................................................108
Use Advanced Credit Check..................................................................................................................108
Use The Module Dependent Credit Check.....................................................................................109
Define The Levels Of Credit Limit Excess Approval..........................................................................109
Use The Approval Screen...............................................................................................................109
6 3.2
Operations...................................................................................................................................................110
Invoicing and Payments........................................................................................................................110
Enter An Invoice And Payment Transactions..........................................................................................110
Enter Credit Notes................................................................................................................................111
Print An Invoice Journal........................................................................................................................112
Generate Automatic Payment Forecast..................................................................................................112
Use Multiple Due Dates........................................................................................................................113
Merge Invoicing....................................................................................................................................113
Sales Ledger Routines..................................................................................................................................114
Revalue The Sales Ledger......................................................................................................................114
Validate Ledger Transactions.................................................................................................................114
Recreate Statistics.................................................................................................................................115
Reports And Enquiries..................................................................................................................................115
View Customer Statements...................................................................................................................115
Create A Balance Report.......................................................................................................................116
Print A Compressed Balance List Report................................................................................................116
Create A Sales Ledger Summary Report................................................................................................117
Print Statistics Reports...........................................................................................................................118
Print Tax Reports...................................................................................................................................119
Print an EC Sales List.............................................................................................................................119
View Sales Ledger Summaries...............................................................................................................120
Chapter 5: Direct Invoicing...........................................................................121

Setup...........................................................................................................................................................121
Activate Direct Invoicing In The Company File.......................................................................................121
Enter Currencies In The Currency File....................................................................................................121
Enter Currency Rates............................................................................................................................122
Enter A Tax Code..................................................................................................................................122
Enter Parameters..................................................................................................................................123
Operations...................................................................................................................................................124
Stock....................................................................................................................................................124
Enter a Price List...................................................................................................................................124
Recalculate a Price List..........................................................................................................................124
Delete A Stock Item..............................................................................................................................125
Invoices........................................................................................................................................................125
Enter An Invoice Header.......................................................................................................................125
Enter Invoice Lines................................................................................................................................126
Enter Invoice Parameters................................................................................................................126
Print and Close Invoices and Credit Notes.............................................................................................127
Close An Invoice............................................................................................................................127
Reports and Enquiries..................................................................................................................................128
Enquire The Stock File...........................................................................................................................128
Chapter 6: Accounting...................................................................................129
3.2 7
Setup...........................................................................................................................................................129
Chart Of Accounts And Currencies..............................................................................................................129
Enter Or Change An Accounting Dimension Entry.................................................................................129
Delete Dimension Entries......................................................................................................................131
Modify Chart Of Accounts Headings.....................................................................................................131
The Currency File.........................................................................................................................................132
Enter Exchange Rates............................................................................................................................132
Enquire Currency Rates.........................................................................................................................132
Use Special Function 10 to Link a Foreign Currency Statistical Account to the Chart of Accounts..........133
Cashbooks...................................................................................................................................................134
Create Cashbook Accounts...................................................................................................................134
Reconcile Cashbooks............................................................................................................................135
Operations...................................................................................................................................................135
General Ledger Transactions.................................................................................................................135
Enter Transactions................................................................................................................................135
Enter Bank Transactions........................................................................................................................136
Enter Check Payments..........................................................................................................................137
Print Checks.........................................................................................................................................137
Modify or Update General Ledger Transactions.....................................................................................137
Consolidation..............................................................................................................................................138
Enable Consolidation............................................................................................................................138
Convert a Chart of Accounts................................................................................................................139
Convert Currency.................................................................................................................................139
Enable Periodic Consolidation...............................................................................................................139
Enable Continuous Consolidation.........................................................................................................140
Revaluation..................................................................................................................................................141
Revaluate Currency Accounts................................................................................................................141
General Ledger Enquiries......................................................................................................................142
Enquire Transaction Lines..............................................................................................................142
General Ledger Reports........................................................................................................................142
Promissory Notes.........................................................................................................................................143
Enter Payments (Receivable)..................................................................................................................143
Use Operational Proposals....................................................................................................................144
Use a Transaction Enquiry.....................................................................................................................144
Use A Partner Balance Enquiry..............................................................................................................144
Use Partner Statements.........................................................................................................................145
Balance Transfers.........................................................................................................................................145
Transfer Balances to the Next Year........................................................................................................145
Chapter 7: Managing Inventory...................................................................147

Setup...........................................................................................................................................................147
Stock Items...........................................................................................................................................147
Enter Life Cycle Phases..........................................................................................................................147
8 3.2
Enter Stock Items..................................................................................................................................148

Enter Sales and Budgeting Information.................................................................................................149
Set Up Discount and Commission Information......................................................................................149
Enter Measurements And Units.............................................................................................................150
Enter Purchasing Information................................................................................................................150
Define Costing And Accounting Information.........................................................................................151
Enter Maintenance Information............................................................................................................151
Enter User-Defined Information............................................................................................................151
Enter Miscellaneous Information...........................................................................................................152
Determine Bin Information....................................................................................................................152
Enter Item Life-cycle Information...........................................................................................................152
Enter Master Planning Information........................................................................................................153
Stock Management......................................................................................................................................153
Define Batch Templates........................................................................................................................154
Enter Batch Information........................................................................................................................154
Enter Batch Details................................................................................................................................155
Enter Batch Dates.................................................................................................................................155
Display Quantities.................................................................................................................................155
Set Up Picking......................................................................................................................................155
Pricing.........................................................................................................................................................156
Set Up Price Lists...................................................................................................................................156
Manage Advanced Discounts................................................................................................................156
Define Discounts...................................................................................................................................157
Set Up Discounts..................................................................................................................................157
Apply a Discount Schema.....................................................................................................................158
Batch Pricing.........................................................................................................................................158
Serial Numbers.............................................................................................................................................159
Create Serial Number............................................................................................................................159
Bill of Materials............................................................................................................................................159
BOM Configuration..............................................................................................................................159
Create a Bill of Material Template.........................................................................................................160
Create a Bill of Material Note.........................................................................................................160
To Use the Graphical View.............................................................................................................161
Operations...................................................................................................................................................161
Bin Management and Quality Control...................................................................................................161
Add Bins........................................................................................................................................161
Enable Quality Control...................................................................................................................162
Stock Transactions and Counting.................................................................................................................163
Make a Stock Transfer..........................................................................................................................163
Receive Stock........................................................................................................................................164
Issue Stock............................................................................................................................................164
Use Stock Transaction Lists...................................................................................................................164
General Ledger Journal.........................................................................................................................165
Create a Traditional Stocktake List........................................................................................................165
Picking, Packing, and Shipment....................................................................................................................166
3.2 9
Enter Picking Results.............................................................................................................................166

Release for Shipment............................................................................................................................166
Enter a Shipment..................................................................................................................................167
Print a Picking List.................................................................................................................................168
Print Shipment Documents...................................................................................................................168
Cancel Picking Results...........................................................................................................................169
Close Picking Lists.................................................................................................................................169
Delete Picking List.................................................................................................................................169
Forecasting and Purchase Planning...............................................................................................................170
Create a Forecast..................................................................................................................................170
Use Stock Requirement Planning...........................................................................................................170
Print a Replenishment Proposal.............................................................................................................171
Convert a Stock Requirements Planning Replenishment Proposal to a Purchase Order...........................171
Cycle Counting............................................................................................................................................172
Create a Counting Proposal..................................................................................................................172
Print a Cycle Counting List....................................................................................................................172
Enter Stock Taking Results....................................................................................................................172
Reports and Enquires...................................................................................................................................173
Stock Reports.......................................................................................................................................173
Use the Physical Stock List Report.........................................................................................................173
Print Picking List Status Report..............................................................................................................173
Chapter 8: Procurement, Purchasing, and Making Payments....................174

Setup...........................................................................................................................................................174
Set Up Discounts and Requisitions................................................................................................................174
Enter Supplier Prices and Discounts.......................................................................................................174
Operations...................................................................................................................................................175
Purchase Proposals...............................................................................................................................175
Create a Purchase Order Proposal..................................................................................................176
Adjust a Purchase Proposal............................................................................................................176
Enter/Adjust Order Lines................................................................................................................177
Convert a Purchase Proposal..........................................................................................................177
Requisitions.................................................................................................................................................178
Requisition Management Setup............................................................................................................179
Set Up Departments.............................................................................................................................180
Set Up Requisition Access Rights...........................................................................................................180
Enter Requisitions.................................................................................................................................180
Authorize and Convert Requisitions......................................................................................................181
Print Requisition Details........................................................................................................................182
Purchase Ordering, Delivery, and Invoicing...................................................................................................182
Enter/Adjust Purchase Orders................................................................................................................182
Enquire Purchase Orders.......................................................................................................................183
Enter an Order Confirmation................................................................................................................183
Enter a Delivery Note............................................................................................................................184
10 3.2
Enter Supplier Invoices..........................................................................................................................184

Invoicing and Payments................................................................................................................................185
Enter Unauthorized Invoices..................................................................................................................185
Authorize an Invoice.............................................................................................................................186
Invoice Periodically................................................................................................................................186
Additional Purchase Costs.....................................................................................................................187
Modify an Invoice.................................................................................................................................187
Change the Book Entry Date, Payable Account, and Dimensional..........................................................187
Print or Update the Invoice Journal.......................................................................................................188
Create a Purchase Order and Link It to a Contract.................................................................................188
Chapter 9: Lead Time Management.............................................................189

Set Up Business Transaction Types For LTM..................................................................................................189
Enter Lead Time Elements............................................................................................................................189
Enter A Lead Time Rule................................................................................................................................190
Select a BTT for Sales Management .............................................................................................................191
Activate The Delivery Milestone....................................................................................................................191
Chapter 10: Drop Shipment..........................................................................192

Set Up the Sales Order Drop Shipment Template..........................................................................................192
Chapter 11: Suppliers and Accounts Payable..............................................193

Setup...........................................................................................................................................................193
Suppliers and Trading Terms........................................................................................................................193
Enter Suppliers......................................................................................................................................194
Set Up Suppliers Payment Method........................................................................................................194
How to Use a Factoring Company.........................................................................................................195
Enter Codes for the Supplier.................................................................................................................195
Enter Accounting Information...............................................................................................................196
Operations...................................................................................................................................................196
Invoicing and Payments........................................................................................................................196
Enter a Supplier Invoice/Credit Note...............................................................................................196
Enter Manual Payments.................................................................................................................197
Create or Adjust an Automatic Payment Proposal..........................................................................198
Adjust an Automatic Payment Proposal..........................................................................................199
Generic Bank Interface Setup.........................................................................................................199
Enter a New Payment Method................................................................................................199
Set Up Filtering and Sorting Rules...........................................................................................200
Enter a Prepayment Document......................................................................................................201
Update a Prepayment....................................................................................................................201
Other Purchase Ledger Routines...................................................................................................................202
Revalue the Purchase Ledger.................................................................................................................202
Recreate Statistics.................................................................................................................................202
3.2 11

Balance Reports....................................................................................................................................203
Create a Detailed Printout.....................................................................................................................203
Create a Compressed Printout..............................................................................................................203
Create a Summary Printout...................................................................................................................204
Other Balance Reports..........................................................................................................................204
Other Purchase Ledger Reports....................................................................................................................204
Use Statistical Reports...........................................................................................................................204
Use Tax Reports....................................................................................................................................204
Print Supplier Statements......................................................................................................................205
Supplier Enquiries........................................................................................................................................205
Create a Supplier Summary...................................................................................................................205
Enquire Individual Invoices....................................................................................................................205
Generate a Payment Forecast................................................................................................................206
Create a Supplier Statement.................................................................................................................206
Chapter 12: Asset and Resource Management...........................................207

Asset Management......................................................................................................................................207
Setup...........................................................................................................................................................207
Set Up Asset Parameters..............................................................................................................................207
Set Up Asset Codes......................................................................................................................................209
Enable Asset Transaction Codes...................................................................................................................210
Assign Accounting Codes............................................................................................................................210
Operations...................................................................................................................................................211
Enter Master Assets..............................................................................................................................211
Asset Transactions.......................................................................................................................................212
Adjust Asset Values..............................................................................................................................212
Consume Assets...................................................................................................................................212
Dispose of an Asset..............................................................................................................................213
Write Off an Asset to Stock..................................................................................................................213
Delete an Asset.....................................................................................................................................214
Update Yearly Values............................................................................................................................214
Enquire Assets......................................................................................................................................214
Resource Management................................................................................................................................215
Setup....................................................................................................................................................215
Set Up Resource Code..........................................................................................................................215
Operations...................................................................................................................................................216
Enter New Resources............................................................................................................................216
Use the Resource Planning Board to Manage Resources........................................................................217
Resource Management Reports............................................................................................................218
Enquire Resources.................................................................................................................................218
12 3.2
Chapter 13: Statistics.....................................................................................219

Setup...........................................................................................................................................................219
Prerequisites.........................................................................................................................................219
Adjust Salesman Information................................................................................................................219
Enter Commodity Codes.......................................................................................................................220
Configure Commission Parameters.......................................................................................................221
Operations...................................................................................................................................................222
Sales and Purchase Statistics.................................................................................................................222
Create Invoice Issued Statistics..............................................................................................................222
Use Purchase Order Statistics................................................................................................................222
Statistic Definition.................................................................................................................................223
Selection Criteria..................................................................................................................................223
Sort Order............................................................................................................................................223
Report Details.......................................................................................................................................224
Save and Load......................................................................................................................................224
Service Statistics...........................................................................................................................................224
Print Service Statistics............................................................................................................................224
Salesman Statistics.......................................................................................................................................225
Print Salesman Statistics........................................................................................................................225
Commission Management...........................................................................................................................225
Enter or Adjust Commission..................................................................................................................225
Adjust Recognized Commission............................................................................................................226
Calculate Commission..........................................................................................................................226
Packaging Statistics......................................................................................................................................227
Enter Material Codes............................................................................................................................227
Enter Packaging Codes.........................................................................................................................227
Mass Update Weights and Materials for Stock Items.............................................................................227
Print Packaging Statistics.......................................................................................................................228
Reports........................................................................................................................................................228
Define Reports in Other Modules..........................................................................................................228
Use Output Channels............................................................................................................................228
Chapter 14: Miscellaneous Features.............................................................229

Snap Search.................................................................................................................................................229
Snap Search Builder.....................................................................................................................................229
Create a Snap Search and Link It to a Field............................................................................................229
Link a Snap Search to a Field.................................................................................................................230
Run the Snap Search.............................................................................................................................230
Parameter-Driven Snap Searches..................................................................................................................231
Set Snap Search Parameters..................................................................................................................231
Parameter Mappings....................................................................................................................................231
Set Up Correspondence........................................................................................................................231
Map a Parameter to a Control..............................................................................................................232
3.2 13
Validation Snap Search................................................................................................................................232

Set Up Validation Snap Search..............................................................................................................232
Validate Data Entry via Snap Search for Selected Companies.................................................................233
Validate the entry.................................................................................................................................233
Assign the Snap Search to Validate the Field.........................................................................................234
Parameter-Driven Validation Snap Search.....................................................................................................234
Use a Parameter-driven validation.........................................................................................................234
Link the Newly Created Snap Search.....................................................................................................235
Printing from Snap Searches........................................................................................................................236
Create an MSRS Report for Snap Search Results Printout.......................................................................236
Print Snap Search Results......................................................................................................................236
Administration Console................................................................................................................................236
Output Channel Configuration.............................................................................................................236
Create a New Output Channel..............................................................................................................237
Create an Output Channel Group.........................................................................................................237
Delete an Output Group.......................................................................................................................237
Security Value Pack......................................................................................................................................238
Re-authentication.................................................................................................................................238
Auto-logoff on Timeout........................................................................................................................238
Roles and Rights...................................................................................................................................238
Enterprise Organigram...................................................................................................................239
Role Assignment............................................................................................................................239
Assign a Role to an Organigram Group For Selected Companies....................................................239
Assign a role to an Organigram Group for a Particular Financial Year.............................................240
Field Level Security.......................................................................................................................................240
Configure Field Level Security Settings..................................................................................................240
Granted Permissions.............................................................................................................................241
Make Data Entry Mandatory for a Field.................................................................................................241
Assign a Permission to Bypass The Field................................................................................................241
New Field Security Permissions..............................................................................................................242
Deny Bypassing Permission...................................................................................................................242
Microsoft Server Reporting Services..............................................................................................................242
Add a Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services Report..........................................................................243
Access iScala Company Database..........................................................................................................243
iScala Reconciliation Tool.............................................................................................................................244
Epicor Service Connect.................................................................................................................................244
Workflow Designer...............................................................................................................................244
XML Mapper........................................................................................................................................245
Task Monitor........................................................................................................................................245
Print Monitor........................................................................................................................................246
Print Monitor Setup.......................................................................................................................246
Input Channels.....................................................................................................................................247
Template Tool..............................................................................................................................................247
Master Data Synchronization.......................................................................................................................248
Template Management................................................................................................................................248
14 3.2
Populate a Template.............................................................................................................................248
Compare Templates..............................................................................................................................249
Enforce Templates................................................................................................................................249
File Attachments...................................................................................................................................249
Automation Tool..................................................................................................................................250
System Utilities.....................................................................................................................................250
Dynamic Email Setup.....................................................................................................................250
iScala Backup and Restore.............................................................................................................251
Report File Name Template...................................................................................................................251
Creating Templates.......................................................................................................................253
Using Templates............................................................................................................................254
Report Format Editor............................................................................................................................254
UDDB...................................................................................................................................................256
3.2 15
16 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Introduction
Introduction
Epicor iScala is a tightly integrated and industry-specific multi-currency, multi-accounting end-to-end ERP, CRM
and SCM solution targeting the divisions and subsidiaries of Global 1000 corporations and large local and regional
companies worldwide.
Epicor iScala's seven application suites provide collaborative functionality, country-specific localizations supporting
multiple-currencies, language and accounting regimes in parallel. It was designed to support global, multi-company
deployments with significant international management reporting and/or cross-border trading requirements.
3.2 17
Getting Started Epicor iScala User Guide
Chapter 1: Getting Started
This chapter introduces the main features of the iScala ERP application user interface.
First, the structure of iScala modules and routines will be discussed. Then the chapter outlines the main data entry
conventions: some iScala fields are designed to enable you to quickly enter key information or search for and select
information you need. In addition, some information can be simply selected from drop-down lists; thus, time and effort
is saved.
The chapter concludes with an overview of the iScala Documentation Kit. The Documentation Kit is a powerful and
feature-rich online help system that gives you direct access to essential information in a flexible interface. You can also
bookmark your favorite help topics for later reference.
Once you understand how to use the system interface, you can use the system more effectively and efficiently.
Logging On
The client installation consists of several applications, among them the iScala application, the Administration
Console, and the Documentation Kit. iScala is the Microsoft® Windows® interface you use to access iScala ERP
system’s business functionality.
Logging On
To start iScala
1. Open the Windows Start Menu.
2. Click All Programs - Epicor Software - Epicor iScala - iScala . If the system is not configured to use
Windows authentication or your Windows account is not recognized, the Logon window appears.
If your system is configured to use Windows authentication, the company selection window appears (see
step 4).
3. Enter User Name and Password.

Note To store users passwords the system uses GOST block cipher encryption algorithm.
Once logged on, a company selection window appears.
4. Click the down arrow next to the Company field and select the appropriate company.
You can also press Esc in the Company field and change your credentials in the Logon window.
5. Select the Financial Year.

The Company and Financial Year fields may be empty if no company has been created, or there are no
financial years for the company. Also check if you have permission to logon to existing companies and
financial years.
6. Click OK to log on.
18 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Getting Started
Advanced Logon Options
1. To access Advanced logon options, in the Company Selection window, click Advanced.
2. To log on exclusively, select the Logon Exclusively check box.

Logging on exclusively means you can run only one instance of the iScala application during the session,
and other users cannot access the company in which you are working while exclusive logon is active. Some
iScala routines and Special Data Functions can be accessed only in the exclusive logon mode.
3. If you have the respective license, you can enter the Developer mode to access the VBA environment or
Workflow Designer (in Designer mode). Click Advanced and select the Developer mode check box.
4. To log on to iScala using a different date than the current one, click the down arrow to the right of the
System Date field and select a new system date. You can also change system date when you are already
logged on. To do this, double-click the date in the status bar and select a new date.
The Home Screen
The Home Screen is the primary window for accessing iScala ERP system business functionality.
Home Screen Areas
Upon logging on, you arrive at iScala Home Screen - - main screen options (Close, Minimize and Maximize),
and Gear menu. From Gear menu - - you can run Options, Help, Manage Global Projects and proceed
with Logoff.
3.2 19
Within iScala Home Screen you can see several panes and bars:
• iScala Tree Menu (Standard or Custom Menu), with ability to search.
• Recent Forms where you can view recently run routines.
• Tiles workspace where you can create Standard and Custom tiles and organize them in groups.
• iScala Status bar, with sub-panes showing state information like current company, financial year, etc.
All of these panes are clickable allowing you to change their state under certain conditions.
iScala routines depending on their function have a corresponding icon:
•
- default icon for programs.
•
- enter/adjust data.
•
- enquire existing data.
•
- print data.
•
- data processing program.
•
- user management.
•
- setup programs.
iScala Tree Menu
The iScala Tree Menu pane, where the iScala modules and their routines are displayed in a hierarchy.
You can use Standard or create a Custom menu. To switch between menus click Standard menu or your
custom menu caption at the bottom of the menu area and select a you want to use menu in the dialog.
The Scala menus supports Filter option. To run the option:
•
Click Filter in the Search field - - or press Ctrl+F.
• Enter a keyword and click the icon or press Enter. The menu tree will only list the result set of menu items,
with the search terms highlighted in the menu item names.
• To reset filtering, press Ctrl+D, or Escape button.
20 3.2
Tree Menu filtering is based on the following rules:

• Filtering text can be a group of filtering criteria separated by ' |' symbol which means logical OR, so if any
filtering criterion is found in a menu item text, corresponding menu item is shown in filtered results.
• Each filtering criterion can contain characters' sequences (words or parts of words) separated by whitespace
symbols. In order to be shown in filtered results a menu item text should contain all these sequences in any
order, so whitespaces in filtering criterion should mean logical AND.
Note: Whitespaces located at the start and the end of each filtering criterion are ignored.
• Filtering criterion is ignored if its length less than 3 symbols.
• All matched parts of filtered menu items are highlighted.
3.2 21
You can run the routines directly from the result set by a double click or press Enter.
Recent Forms
iScala Home Screen pane where you can view recently run routines and return to a recently used routine, without
the need of searching it again in the menu tree. This is basically a history of the menu items used. Select a routine
you need and run it again.
22 3.2
You can use the button to minimize the Recent Forms and use the button to restore the Recent
Forms. You can also change the vertical Recent Forms pane by dragging the splitter between Recent Forms and
the Tree Menu panes.
Tiles
Normally, you probably don't use dozens of various business processes every day, so you can separate your
process and unite corresponding iScala routines in groups, e.g.: by customers, suppliers, orders, invoices,
warehouses, and etc.
A tile group is created when you place any tile to a tile workspace (drag the selected item into the right pane
until you see a gray vertical placeholder). You can create several groups - during creation groups are separated
by vertical gray placeholders (they are shown between existing tiles groups: on the left side of the first group
and on the right of the last group). Tiles groups location can also be changed - just drag a selected tile group (by
its header) between another tiles group.
To rename a tiles group double-click a tiles group title to change it, e.g. from default Group to Supplier.
Important There are two types of tiles: Standard and Custom. Standard tile is linked to a certain routine
and has a menu path. Custom tile has no menu path but requires selecting its type, e.g. c-Basic, Snap
Search, User Report(Crystal), VBA Macro and etc. Standard tile can be transformed to Custom.
In group you can create a new custom tile, change tile, transform standard tile to custom, delete tile, change tile
size and delete a whole group.
To Create a Tile
1. In iScala tree menu select necessary item.
2. Hold down the mouse and slightly drag the selected item into the right pane until you see a gray placeholder.
3. Release the button to drop the item into place.
3.2 23
To Create a New Custom Tile
1. In tile group right-click inside a tile group (on a tile or on spare place).
2. Select New Custom Tile... from the menu.
3. Set up necessary parameters in the New Custom Tile window:
To Change a Tile
1. In tile group right-click selected tile.
2. Select Change Tile... from the menu.
3. Set up necessary parameters in the Edit Standard Tile window:
24 3.2
You can also transform Standard tile to Custom. To do this press Transform to Custom Tile button in
Edit Standard Tile window.
Status Bar
Status bar can be found at the bottom of iScala Home Screen. It includes information on User Name, Company/
Financial Year and System Date, Exclusive User's Role and Developer mode if you use these options.
Click User Name to change current user, you can also proceed with Logoff.
You can change Company/ Financial Year and System Date by clicking corresponding options in the status
bar.
Important The system allows running multiple sessions with different Companies and Financial Years
simultaneously. If more than one iScala application programs are started, these will be shown in the same
application screen. The top bar of the iScala application window will show the programs being run
simultaneously by the same user profile.
New (Second) Session

To run a new (second) session:
3.2 25
1. In the status bar click Company/ Financial Year.
2. In the Logon dialog select a Company and Financial Year.
3. Select Run new session check box.
4. Click OK button.
Customize Toolbars
When the system is switched to the entry type customization mode (the Customize Entry Type check box in
the Form Commands menu is selected), you can customize the toolbar and add the buttons, corresponding to
the frequently used functions to the toolbar. The list of the functions, for which the buttons can be added, is
hard-coded for each routine where toolbar customization is available. Default toolbar is available even if you do
not create any entry type. It includes the most frequently used commands.
To add, remove, or rename a toolbar or to change the toolbar appearance:
1.
Launch an iScala routine which supports toolbar customization and click the (Form Commands)
icon next to the Back button.
2. Select the Customize Entry Type command.
3. Click Customize in the upper right corner of the customization form.

The Customize Toolbar window displays.
4. To add a button to the toolbar, select the function in the left pane and click Add.
5. To remove a button from the toolbar, select the toolbar item in the right pane and click Remove.
26 3.2
6. To change the order of buttons, select the toolbar item in the right pane and use the Move Up (moves the
item one position left on the toolbar) and Move Down (moves the item one position right on the toolbar)
buttons.
7. To change the appearance of buttons, right-click the toolbar item and select the appearance of the item
from the context menu.
Available commands:
• Show icons only
• Show text only
• Show text and icons
8. To create or change the shortcut for the toolbar item, right-click the toolbar item and select the Set Shortcut
command from the context menu.
Then in the Assign Shortcut window, enter shortcut key in the Press the new shortcut key field and
click OK.
9. Save your customized entry type as explained in the Customize an Entry Type section.
Change The Color Schemes
To select an iScala color scheme:
1.
Click the (Gear) button and select Options.
The Options window appears.
2. On the General Options tab, under the Appearance title, from the Color scheme list, select Dark Blue,
Dark Green, Light Blue or Light Green window appearance.
3.2 27
3. Click OK.
Note By default, the Skin list is set to Regular.
28 3.2
Program Navigation And Data Entry
Data is entered through the screens that make up most of the routine’s interface. Each screen is a layer of the
routine that contains related functionality. As you create a record, one or more screens will be used to complete
the record.
Note Changes you make to a field are saved immediately after you leave that field and move to the next
field by pressing Enter or Tab.
Enter Data In Form Fields
This section describes different ways to enter data into fields on a screen. The User Assistance section at the
bottom of the window also explains how to complete the field.
To enter data in form fields:
1. Alphanumeric fields – Also known as edit boxes, alphanumeric fields allow text or numeric values.
Depending on system parameters, you can enter, adjust, or view data in these fields. Edit boxes can limit
the type (for example, text or numeric) and the length (for example, a maximum of 20 characters) of the
data entered.
2. Option fields - To select a value from a list of pre-defined values (called query in iScala), press F4 (or type
? and press Enter). You can also click the question mark button located to the right of the field.
When the list of available values displays, you can enter one or more starting characters to quickly scroll to
the value you need.
3. Sometimes alternative enquiry options are available. For example, items in a list can be sorted in a special
order. Click the down arrow button to the right of the field to display the list of alternative queries.
4. When you press F4 or click the question mark button to the right of the field, the query results dialog
displays. Click Copy. All the information from the query dialog is copied to the clipboard. You can paste
this information into Microsoft Excel, Word, Notepad, and so on.
5. Date/Time fields - Enter the date in the format specified for the company or press F6 to enter the system
date. You can also click the down arrow to the right of the field to select a date using the Date/Time Picker;
use Shift + F6 to call Date/Time Picker from the keyboard
6. Check boxes – Check boxes are typically used to switch options on or off. When a check box is selected,
you can press the spacebar to clear the check box. Check boxes can be used in the application in groups to
display multiple choices from which you can select one or more choices. Some of the check boxes may be
three-state, switching between On, Off and Undefined states.
3.2 29
7. Combo boxes – Combo boxes display a list of options that you can select from, sometimes in multiple
columns. The items included in the list can be selected, but not adjusted.
8. Specify intervals – When you open a form which allows specifying a range of textual values by entering
acceptable minimum and maximum (for example, a range of Stock Codes), a row of black circles is shown
in the field where the maximum value should be entered. The black circle is used in the iScala Client (WinDS)
fields to visually represent the maximum textual value.
Screen Navigation
Use the following keyboard actions to navigate within a screen:

• Enter – Save the current field or cell value and move to the next field or cell.
• Esc(ape) – Move one field or cell back without saving the value. If you are in the first field of the routine, Esc
exits the routine.
• Page Down or Next button – Move forward to the next screen or to the next required entry area. The value
of the current field is left unchanged.
• Page Up or Back button – Move back to the previous screen.
Page Down and Page Up are also used to scroll one visible page down or up when you are in the scrollable control
(grid, list, and so on). In this case, use Ctrl + Page Down or Ctrl + Page Up to move respectively one form forward
or back using the keyboard.
Sometimes, if you select or enter an existing code in a routine, you are immediately prompted with a Menu
window. This window provides you with a list of options, typically the screen tab names, in the routine. After
you select an option and update the information in specific fields, you can press Page Down or click the Next
button to access the Menu window again.
30 3.2
Customize An Entry Type
Many iScala routines support Entry Type customization, which can be used to define the set of data entry fields
to display and the customized toolbars for iScala screens. Entry type customization functionality is mainly intended
to speed up work with most iScala routines. Using customized entry types for iScala routines allows skipping
those data entry fields that are never used when working with particular routine, which essentially speeds up
the screen navigation.
To customize an entry type:
1.
Launch an iScala routine which supports toolbar customization and click the (Form Commands)
icon next to the Back button.
2. Select the Customize Entry Type command.
3. Configure the customization area by dragging the required fields from the source form.
You can organize the fields in the customization area in any order. When you drag a field from the source
form to the customization area, it displays its order label, the same as in the source form. Even though you
can place fields in the customization area in any order, thus adjusting the appearance to your own needs,
keep in mind that the cursor moves and data is entered in the fields on the screen in logical order - the order
defined on the source screen.
4. Right-click the field to display the context menu and use its commands to configure the customization area.
These commands allow you to make the cell larger or smaller, add or remove new columns and rows.
Note The customization area grid and cell borders are visible and marked with dotted lines. By default,
the customization mode is initiated for the first time without loading the layout. All shadow controls
and custom labels are drawn in the inactive mode. All label shadows and custom label controls are
shown with borders for easier identification of the places they occupy.
5. Some iScala routines have toolbars on their forms. For such forms, the default toolbar is available even if
you do not create an entry type. It includes the most frequently used commands. Refer to the Customize
Toolbars section for details.
6. To save the customized entry type, click the Form Commands icon, select the Save Entry Type As command,
specify the type name, and click OK.
3.2 31
7. To bind your customized entry type to the specific user, click the Form Commands icon, select the Entry
Type Bindings command, select the user name and the entry type, click Bind and then click OK.
Documentation Kit
Field help is shown in the User Assistance section at the bottom of the screen. Help for a routine can be accessed
by pressing F1 in any field in the routine. If you need to access the Documentation Kit Contents or Index, you
can also press F1 to call the Documentation Kit when you are not running a routine.
The Documentation Kit is an online help system that gives you direct access to information in a flexible interface.
It allows you to quickly and easily find topics that describe routines.
The Documentation Kit interface layout consists of the following:
1. Tabs Area - This includes four tabs:
Tab Description
Contents Displays the topics tree.
Index Alphabetical list of keywords associated with all help topics; the list scrolls as you
type.
Search Full-text search of the Documentation Kit. You can search for several words, a
part of the sentence, and so on; the list of search results can be sorted by topic
Title, Location, and Rank.
Favorites Links to your favorite topics.
32 3.2
2. Working Area- This displays the help content for the topic selected in Contents, Index, Search, or Favorites.
3. Menu Buttons - This assists in navigating through help topics. It also includes the iScala map where help
topics are organized according to the application’s directory tree.
3.2 33
Application Setup Epicor iScala User Guide
Chapter 2: Application Setup
This chapter describes a number of setup routines that define various aspects of the iScala application. With these
routines, you can adjust the application to match all your production needs, define accounting dimensions, codes and
various currencies, and set up different financial books. Use these routines to configure the application in accordance
with your companies and your business requirements.
This chapter describes a number of setup routines that define various aspects of the iScala application. With these
routines, you can adjust the application to match all your production needs, define accounting dimensions, codes and
various currencies, and set up different financial books. Use these routines to configure the application in accordance
with your companies and your business requirements.
Some module setup routines are described in other chapters within this guide. These chapters explore a module’s
features and functionality in greater detail. For example, some configuration routines for Sales and Purchase Ledger
are found in the chapters describing the corresponding processes, and the entire setup processes, for the Service, are
found in the chapters which explore these modules functionalities.
Once the application is adjusted to match your business needs, you can use your iScala application more effectively.
Company Setup
In iScala products, all user/company security and the majority of configuration parameters are transferred to the
Administration Console for higher security. Only parameters that affect business procedures and setup are
implemented in the iScala application in Company Setup.
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Business Data Management > Company Setup
Use this routine to enter business-related company data. Any changes you make to a company configuration,
with regard to items such as available modules and statistical periods and accounting dimensions, take effect
the next time you work with the company.
To enter company data:
1. Define a contact person for the company in the Reference field. This information is used in reference lists
and displays as the default Our Ref. value on documents such as invoices.
2. The company information section contains the ISO Country Code, City, County / State / Region, ZIP
Code, District Code, Public Area (Street Name), and Street Number Street Number information.
Note The City code value, which is defined in the Cities routine, can be used for financial documents
and reports printing.
3. Fill in the Address lines with your company address. Seven rows of 35 characters each are available.
4. The VAT Address lines include information on the VAT address of the company. It can be used in reference
lists, official reports, invoices, reminders, and so on.
5. In the Telephone, Fax Number, and Telex fields, enter the company’s contact details.
6. Specify the name of the company’s bank in the Bank field.
34 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Application Setup
7. The Bank Giro No. and Postal Giro No. require the corresponding numbers. Enter these numbers for
supplier payments in the parameter file for the payment routine.
8. Define TAX Reg. No, Municipal Reg. No., and State Reg. No.
9. Use the Remarks field for making notes on items such as report details required by the company.
10. Enter the Contact Person for reports responsibility and his/her Contact Telephone.
11. Select the Currency to be used in the company.
12. Select Yes in the Consolidation switch if you want your company to act as receiver for the consolidation
process.
13. In the Stat. Period field, enter calendar dates for period statistics. Transactions occurring before these dates
are not saved. Transactions after these dates are saved for the next period.
14. In the Stat. YTD field, enter calendar dates for annual statistics. Transactions occurring before these dates
are not saved. Transactions after these dates are saved for the next year.
15. Enter the Domestic Currency Code that will be used for Auto Payments only.
16. Use the Calendar Collection field to define calendars of the company’s working time. If other calendar
collections are not specified or not created, this Calendar Collection can be used by default in other iScala
routines.
17. If integrating with CRM, define the CRM Currency. The system uses this to correctly calculate amounts
when synchronizing information between iScala and the CRM system.
18. In the Hyperion Company Code field, enter the company code in Hyperion reports. This code is used in
layout type B of Balance List & Summarized Hyperion Export and Transaction List & Detailed Hyperion Export
routines and export files. External system (Hyperion) uses this code to identify a company.
19. On the MODULE SELECTION screen, use the arrow keys and spacebar to select or deselect the required
modules and functionalities.
20. When finished, press Enter or click the Next button to move to the following screen.
Set Company Parameters
A system attribute is a type of parameter that affects the way iScala functions. System attributes are normally
used to customize iScala for different countries, but they are also used for switching certain functions within
iScala on and off.
To set company parameters:
1. In the Tax Engine field, enter 0 to activate Standard Tax Engine, or 1 to activate Advanced Tax Engine.
Standard tax engine is used by default and means that standard tax codes are used. Advanced tax engine
is a functionality that covers Latin America law requirements in tax policy. It automatically calculates taxes
that should be paid by a particular customer for a particular stock item.
2. Select Yes in the TAX Calculation Rule field if you want to calculate taxes based on the Tax code defined
on the customer record. Select No to calculate taxes based on the Tax code defined on the stock item record.
3.2 35
3. Use the TAX Calculation Method parameter to define how the tax percentage is calculated. Enter Yes if
you want the tax to be calculated as a percentage of the cost that is added to the price. If the tax should
be calculated as a percentage of the sum which makes up the value added tax, enter No.
4. In the Withholding TAX Mode field, select the type of withholding tax handling following the User
Assistance prompts.
5. The Date Format field controls how the date is formatted in the system and how it prints for this company.
6. In the Decimals in Own Currency field, define the number of decimal places for the accounting currency.
7. Click ? or press F4 to select a Minimum Coin value from the list.
8. If set to Yes, the FASB-52 parameter indicates that the transaction entries recalculated on historical rates,
during continuous consolidation, will be identified with the currency date in the text field. If the parameter
is set to No, these transactions will not be identified.
9. The Rounding Off Facility field defines the rounding rule for invoice grand total (amount to pay). This
setting will only apply for invoice totals in the Sales Order and Direct Invoicing modules.
10. In the Company Code for Currency field, enter the code for the company in which the currency file will
be used.
11. Enter details of the format for numeric values in the Numerical Format field.
12. Set the Cash Discount on Gross switch to Yes if you want to calculate cash discounts on the gross sum.
When using a cash discount, a reversal is also made of the TAX part of the cash discount. Enter No to
calculate the cash discount on the net sum exclusive of TAX.
13. Specify the numeric code for the country where the iScala application is to be used in the Country Code
field. This value is used to activate special national functions within the system.
14. Indicate the character to be used as Separator for Date Format (between day, month and year on display);
for example, / or -.
15. The System Log, Audit Trail, and Document Log fields indicate if these functions are activated in the
application. Within the iScala application they are display-only; however, you can adjust these functions
within the Administration Console.
16. Select the Currency for reporting. This does not affect calculations; it is only used in screen output and in
listings.
17. Use the Basis for TAX calculation parameter to define the starting point for the tax amount calculation.
Yes indicates the tax calculation is based on the line amount. No indicates the item price is used as the tax
calculation basis.
18. In the Common Sales Ledger field, enter Yes if you want the Customer and Invoice Receivable file from
Company 01 to be used everywhere, or No if you want to use your own Customer and Invoice Files.
19. The Common Purchase Ledger switch defines if the Supplier and Invoice Payable file from Company 01
will be used everywhere (enter Yes), or your own Supplier and Invoice Files will be used (enter No).
20. The Use ANSI field indicates the code for Export files. If you want all Export files created using ANSI code,
select Yes. To create all Export files in Unicode, select No.
36 3.2
21. Select the default first day of the week within the First day in a week field. If you change the first day of
the week, a warning message displays prompting you to check documents, reports, and schedules where
the first day of the week displays as a week day word, not a week day number.
22. Define which week will be considered as the First week in a year.
23. In the Allow Red Storno field, select to allow or to forbid the red storno usage in your company.
24. The Default Business Data Language parameter allows you to set a Default Business Data Language code
for a specific Company. By default, this field is blank which indicates the default installation language is
used. When specified, the Business Data Language is used in all modules in iScala as the default language
for business data instead of the installation one.
25. When all the parameters are set, press Page Down or click the Next button to move to the following
screen.
26. On the System Attributes (2) screen facilities to use a central number counter for invoices and credit notes
are provided as well as different calendar and format configurations.
In this case, every invoice and credit note printed in a company obtains numbers from these number counters,
regardless of the module in which the invoices/credit notes are printed. Number counters for different
sub-systems are not used. The central number counters are never used for interest invoices or for other
invoices and credit notes entered in the sales ledger module.
When all the settings are made, proceed to the next screen.
Enter Accounting Dimensions
In this window, enter all accounting dimensions (such as account, cost centre, product, project, and so on) used
within the company. Up to 10 different accounting dimensions can be used in the accounts. Accounting dimension
0 is the controlling element and is always used for accounts. The other dimensions are user definable. If you want
the entries within an accounting dimension to be used for reporting, use 1, 2 or 3 as the accounting dimension.
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Business Data Management > Company Setup, Accounting Dimensions
To enter accounting dimensions:
1. The LEN GTH fields indicate the number of characters allowed for codes within the accounting dimension.
You cannot change the number of characters once you have made entries within the accounting dimension.
However, new accounting dimensions can be added if the Fix Coding String parameter, discussed later in
this section, is set to No.
2. In the NAME fields, enter the names for the accounting dimension using up to 25 characters. This is used
in items such as field names when you are working in iScala. (Even if accounting dimension 0 is used for
accounts, you can enter a name of your choice.)
3. The HEADER fields define the names of the accounting dimensions and are used in reports and other
documents. The length of the name is controlled by the number of characters as defined in the Length field
as described above.
4. In the OB.P&L (Opening Balance, Profit and Loss) field, select whether the items within the accounting
dimension will have an opening balance. You cannot change this information once entries have been made
in the accounting dimension. Balance accounts will always have an opening balance; the option is to allow
accounting dimension totals to be reported over the years. This opening balance is visible only when a
selection is based on the respective accounting dimension.
3.2 37
5. Specify the accounting dimension numbers that you want to use for projects in the Segment Number
Project fields. This is for the project history file.
6. Select Yes in the Fix Coding String field if you want to use this accounting string. After confirmation, you
cannot change the length of the accounting dimensions or the opening balance information.
Use the Currency File
The currency system is common for all iScala modules. You can work with up to 30 different currencies within
each iScala company and choose whether to use the Company 01’s currency or the own company’s currency
(Own Currency File field in the company file).
iScala as a multi-currency transaction-based system supports the requirements of the European Council regarding
euro introduction within the European Monetary Union (EMU) countries.
The iScala currency system comprises four currency types:
• Currency Type 0 is for currencies whose exchange rates have the floating rates quoted against the accounting
currency and do not require any triangulation.
• Currency type 1 is for currencies whose exchange rates have the floating rates quoted against the euro (not
against the accounting currency as for currency type 0).
• Currency type 2 is for currencies whose exchange rates are fixed against the euro, that is, the currencies of
the 11 EMU-participating states. Currency of type 2 supports triangulation of the EMU-currencies using fixed
exchange rates, for example, conversion to the accounting currency will be by triangulation via the euro.
Where the accounting currency is the euro itself, currency type 2 amounts will be converted directly to the
accounting currency.
• Currency type 3 represents euro. This acts as a marker for the system to recognize the currency through which
triangulation is done.
Add Or Change Currency Definition
Navigate to Add/Change Currency Definition

To enter or adjust currency codes to use for each iScala company:
1. In the Rates From field, set the date from which the rate will apply.
2. The currencies defined for the company display.
3. In the currency NO. field column, enter the Central Currency Register’s currency code (central currency code)
for the currency system you want to apply.
4. Enter the three-character currency abbreviation for the currency in the NAME column.
5. Specify the currency type (0-3) in the TYPE column. Euro (currency of type 3) should be defined before any
currency of type 1 or 2 can be entered.
6. If the Central Currency Register is active, the Currency Type Descriptions, EMU Currency Codes and EMU
Names automatically display in the TYPE_DESCR, EMU, and EMU_NAM E columns. Otherwise, for currency
2, enter the EMU-currency link in the EMU field; for euro (currency type 3), the link 00 displays automatically.
7. Enter the CURRENCY_DESCRIPTION. If the Central Currency Register is active, the currency description
specified in the Central Currency Register displays by default and can be changed.
38 3.2
8. Press Enter to save the changes and exit the routine.
Enter Currency Rates
Navigate to Enter Currency Rates

To enter or adjust currency exchange rates:
1. In the Rates From field, set the date from which the rate will apply.
2. Currency NAME and TYPE display in the Name and Type columns respectively as defined in the company
currency definitions and cannot be adjusted.
3. In the DEC column, enter the number of decimals to round off the currency calculation results. If the
currency system does not use small change at all, then this currency should be defined with 0 decimals.
4. In the DEC.P, DEC.C, and DEC.S columns, enter the number of decimals for the purchase unit price, unit
cost, and sell unit price for the currency correspondingly. You can set these three fields for every currency.
The general purpose of these fields is to improve price and cost accuracy.
5. Specify the value to which the minor currency unit amounts in the MIN.COIN column.
6. In the UNIT column, define the coefficient to be used as a multiplier or divider (depending on the next field
setting) for exchange rate calculations.
7. Specify whether the rate is multiplied or divided by the coefficient, entered in the corresponding Unit field
in the O column.
8. In the RATE SELL and RATE BUY columns, enter the selling and buying rates based on the Units and
Operator (Unit and O) columns settings.
9. After you enter all required rates, press Enter or PgDn to finish.
Enter Tax Rates
Use this routine to enter different rates of TAX and associated information. You can enter up to 100 different
TAX codes for different types of value added tax. TAX code 00 is specifically used for zero rated TAX.
Navigate to Enter Tax Codes
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Tax Setup > Standard Tax Engine Setup > Enter Tax
Codes
To enter tax rates:
1. In the Select Option window, select the Language.
2. In the TAX Code field, set the code for the TAX from 00 to 99.
3. In the Description field, enter a descriptive text for this code.
4. The Rate Rule field is optional. You can enter a rate rule code reflecting Origin/Destination combinations
used in this tax code. Leave the field empty if you wish to specify the tax rate.
5. In the TAX Rate [%] field, specify the percentage rate for this code.
3.2 39
6. The Deductible [%] field value is used only for input TAX and defines the percentage of TAX that is
deductible, for example, 100% if all, 50% and so on.
7. Optionally, in the TAX Rule [0/1] field, enter 0 if you want the TAX applied when the transaction was
entered to be used in calculating the TAX. Enter 1 if you want the TAX to be calculated on the basis of the
current TAX rate by means of the TAX macro. This option is only available for TAX calculation in certain
countries.
8. In the TAX Macro field, indicate the column on the TAX reports in which this TAX rate should be printed.
Follow the User Assistance instructions in this field.
9. Set the rule for Tax override [Y/N].
10. In the Account No. TAX Output and Account No. TAX Input fields, specify the account numbers to be
used for the sales and purchases taxes respectively.
11. In the Tax Accrual Output and Tax Accrual Input fields, enter the account numbers to be used for
outgoing and incoming accrual taxes during tax note registration.
12. In the Tax Surcharge Code field, press F4 or click ? to select the tax code to be used as tax surcharge for
the current tax.
13. Enter the necessary report accumulators in the OUTPUT and INPUT groups and press Enter to save the
changes.
Define Calendars
The main purpose of the Calendars functionality is to enable global business time management. With this
functionality, you can now work not only with individual calendars, but also view and set entire business time
for all entities and finally block a specific business time as allocated (booked). A special mechanism helps you
identify who owns a particular working time. Every task (a specific period of working time) specified in the calendar
contains information of its owner (entire working time of the Client, Supplier, Company).The calendars designed
for the same business entity are normally grouped into a Calendar Collection.
Generic Calendar is a term applied to all calendars created for a specific business entity. You can create Generic
Calendars once you have defined the Day and Time types and groups.
Enter or Adjust Generic Calendar
Navigate to Enter/Adjust Generic Calendar.

Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Calendars > Enter/Adjust Generic Calendar
To create a Generic Calendar using the first method:
1. Enter the Code for a Generic Calendar.
2. Enter the Description of the Generic Calendar; for example, Company calendar.
3. Click OK.
40 3.2
Enter or Adjust Calendar Collection
The Calendar Collection functionality allows you to associate Calendars with a company.
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Calendars > Enter/Adjust Calendar Collection
To create a Generic Calendars Collection:
1. Enter the Code of the Calendar Collection.
2. Enter Descriptions in all available languages to maximize comprehension for a great number of users.
3. In the Associated calendars field, select the calendars to be included in the collection.
4. Specify the business Entity.
5. Click OK.
Set Up Geographical Units
The group of geographical units includes regions, states or provinces, counties, and cities. These parameters are
used in the company settings and customers/suppliers addresses. Geographical unit types are also used to define
the rate rules when the Advanced Tax Engine functionality is activated.
Set up Cities
Navigate to Cities
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Geographical Units > Cities
To set up cities:
1. In the City Code field, enter the city code.
2. In the City Name field, enter the name of the city for which you want to use this code.
After specifying the city, you can also specify a geographical unit on the nearest upper level activated in
geographical hierarchy. To activate different levels of geographical units, use the System Utilities >
Miscellaneous > Geographical Units > Geographical Units > Hierarchy routine. It allows you to define whether
the address settings in different modules include region, state/province, and county units.
Advanced Tax Engine
Advanced tax engine is a functionality that covers Latin America legal requirements regarding taxes and taxation
policy. It automatically calculates taxes that should be paid by a particular customer for a particular stock item.
To make the system correctly calculate taxes, enter tax types (particular taxes) and allocate them to either tax
liabilities (list of taxes that should be paid by a customer)or to tax codes (list of taxes that should be paid for a
particular stock item). When you enter an order (or project), it contains information about tax types for the
customer of this order or project and about tax types for the stock item of this order or activity of this project.
3.2 41
Whether a particular tax type is applied for this order(project) or not depends on the Rate Option of this tax type.
If this field of liability tax type is set to Liability Code, such a tax type is always applied. If this option of liability
tax type is set to Tax Code, such a tax type is applied only if the stock item of this order (or activity of this
project)has the same tax type. Tax types that are not defined for the tax liability of the order (or project)are not
used at all.
Calculated tax values are inherited from the order (project) to an invoice.
Set Up Advanced Tax Engine
To set up Advanced Tax Engine:
1. Activate the functionality. To do this, set the Tax Engine parameter (System Utilities > Business Data
Management > Company Setup) to 1.
2. Define tax parameters (System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Tax Setup > Advanced Tax Engine Setup > Tax
Parameters routine).
3. Define tax types (System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Tax Setup > Advanced Tax Engine Setup > Tax Types
routine).
4. Define tax codes. For more information, review the Sales/Budget section. You can define tax codes for
particular customers in the Tax Code field.
5. Define tax liabilities. For more information, review the Currency/TAX section. You can define tax liabilities
for particular customers in the TAX Liability field.
6. Define tax engine parameters in Sales Ledger (Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters routine).
7. Define tax engine parameters in Purchase Ledger (Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
routine).
Now the advanced tax engine is set up and can be used.
General Ledger
This section explores the routines you must complete before you can begin working with the General Ledger.
Most of these routines require an in-depth knowledge of iScala and should only be performed by someone who
is very familiar with the system. This section describes how to set up the General Ledger parameters and journal
codes. You can find more information on how the accounting string works and what limitations exist in Chapter
3: Accounting where the General Ledger main routines are discussed.
Set Up General Parameters
This section discusses the general parameters that regulate the functioning of the General Ledger within the
company. The parameters can affect other routines integrated with the General Ledger. Every parameter has
default settings for company 01.
It is important to carefully consider how you want the system to work before you set the parameters because
some of the parameters should not be changed once transaction entry is initiated.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters/Book-Entry Periods
To set up general parameters:
42 3.2
1. In the No. of Book-Entry Periods field, set the number between 1 and 24.
The parameters belonging to the Open from Period group display the first period of the financial year in
which transactions can be entered. The acceptable values for the fields of this group are from 0 to the value
of the Number of Book-Entry Periods parameter.
If you enter 1, you can enter transactions in every period of the financial year. If you specify a different
period, you cannot enter transactions in periods that fall before the specified period.
If you enter 0, the transactions from the corresponding module cannot be posted to the General Ledger.
This functionality is used to prevent unintentional entries to a period after the books for this period are
closed. However, you can enter transactions in the module for which 0 is specified in the Open from Period
field. You can also enter transactions that are posted to Daybook Journal, and print the Daybook Journal,
but it is not possible to post these transactions to the General Ledger.
2. In the Open from Period[GL], Open from Period [PL],Open from Period[SL], Open from Period [PA],
Open from Period[PR], Open from Period [SC],Open from Period[SM], Open from Period [MP], and
Open from Period[CM] fields specify the first period of the financial year in which transactions can be
entered for the corresponding modules.
3. Press Enter to move to the GENERAL PARAMETERS screen.
4. The Transaction File Emptied on field displays the date on which the transaction file was last cleared. You
cannot enter a transaction for an earlier date than the date the transaction file was last cleared.
5. The Transaction Number Counter field defines the first number for the sequential transaction numbers.
The number increases automatically as new transactions are entered. It is only used if the Automatic
Transaction Numbering parameter is set to Yes. There is, however ,one exception; cheque transaction
numbers are always taken from this counter.
Carefully plan the numbering sequences. To avoid confusion, make sure that the same numbers are not
used in more than one place. It is important that transactions are numbered so that they can be identified
later.
6. The Next Period Auto Allocation field displays the period during which the next batch of periodic automatic
allocations will occur. Do not enter anything in this field. The system changes periods when a periodic
automatic allocation occurs.
7. In the Periodised Transaction No. field, enter the number used for periodical transactions. The number
increases automatically as new periodical transactions are entered.
8. Use the Daybook Journal Number field to set the first number in the daybook journal number series. The
number increases as journals are printed and updated.
9. Define the account to which incomplete transactions are posted in the Account No. for Automatic Error
booking field. This field is only used if the routine for automatic error booking, described below, is activated.
10. In the Cash Book Transaction No. field, set the first number in the sequential number series to be used
for Cash Book transactions. The number increases automatically as you create Cash Book transactions.
11. Specify the required number of account groups in The Number of Account Groups field. Up to three
groups are allowed (1 to 3). Then specify the length for each account group.
The length of the first group should be greater than 1, the length of the second group should be no less
than the length of the first group plus 1 but less than 6, the length of the third group should be no less
than the length of the second group plus 1 and one unit less than the length of the accounting string.
12. Press Enter to move to the Length of Account group screen. The Length of Account Group is used when
setting 13 account headings. It is also used in different reports for grouping, together with account classes.
3.2 43
13. In the Length of Account group 1 field, enter the account group length. This length should be greater
than 1.
14. The value in the Length of Account group 2 field should range between the account segment length (-1)
and the previous length specified in the Length of Account group 1 field.
15. Press Enter. The SWITCHES screen displays.
16. Use the ENTER = Display Total field to define whether to use the Enter button to display the balance
amount when entering transactions.
17. Specify whether you want transaction numbers to be allocated from the preset number series or to be
entered manually in the Automatic Transaction Number field.
18. In the Reports from Company 01 field, define report specifications for your company.
19. Use the Headings from Company 01 field to set the chart of accounts headings for your company.
20. In the Journal Control field, enter Y if you want the switch to advise you if there are any journals that have
not been updated before the enquiry and to report routines which are used. Enter N if you do not want a
check to be performed.
21. In the Obligatory Batch Control field, specify whether you want to require entry of the batch total before
a transaction is entered.
22. The Print Journal A/c Summary field defines if the accounting journals in the General Ledger are closed
with an account summary displaying totals for each account. The Sales and Purchase Ledgers will be affected
if they are integrated with the General Ledger.
23. The Automatic Error Booking field specifies the type of action to take when the system finds an incomplete
transaction.
24. Set the rule for the Journal Code in the Entry of Journal Code field.
25. Enter Y in the Entry of Document Number field if you want the system to prompt you for a document
number when transactions are entered. The document number will be printed in journals and transaction
lists. It is a good idea to use document numbers (such as cheque numbers) if you use the cash book routine,
as this facilitates reconciliation.
26. In the Reporting level Transactions field, select Y if you want transactions to be created for reporting
levels so that you can print a transaction list and the General Ledger journal for them. Select N if you do
not want transactions to be created for reporting levels. If you want to change the value of this parameter
later, use the routine restore balance file under special data file functions in System Utilities. When you run
this routine, the reporting level transactions are deleted or created depending on whether this parameter
is set to yes or no.
27. Select the type of characters you want to use for accounts in the Alphanumeric Accounts field.
28. In the Auto. reversing transaction field, enter the necessary settings for transaction numbers beginning
with R.
29. Use the Mark reversed transaction field to set marking for the manually reversed transactions.
30. In the Create Project in PR field, set the condition for the project automatic creation.
44 3.2
31. Press Enter to move to the Extra Transaction Numbers screen. In this window, you can define up to 26
different extra transaction number counters (A to Z). These counters can only be used with manual transaction
numbering when the automatic transaction numbering parameter is set to No . The transaction number
begins with the letter of the relevant counter. You do not need to select a different number series.
32. Once the extra transaction counters are defined, press Enter to move to the Entry Periods screen.
33. Set the ENTRY PERIODS for each month and press Enter to save the changes.
34. In the Closing Accounting Period fields, enter the first and last dates of the book entry period for the
closing accounting period. The closing accounting period is usually used to record year-end transactions for
bookkeeping and closing.
35. Press Enter to move to the Rounding Tolerance Setup screen.
36. Enter a Rounding Tolerance Limit (positive amount in the accounting currency). If the 38 difference amount
is within the RTL, an additional transaction line is generated.
37. Define the profit account to which the rounding error amount should be posted in the Rounding Profit
Account field.
38. In the Rounding Loss Account field, specify the loss account to which the rounding error amount should
be posted.
39. Press Enter to move to the Revenue Recognition Setup screen.
40. In the Revenue Recognition Number field, enter the first number of a revenue recognition number series.
41. In the Use GL Transaction Number field, specify whether you want to take the number from the transaction
number counter in General Ledger.
42. If you selected No in the previous field, enter the first number of a GL transaction number series in the GL
Transaction Number field.
43. In the Daybook Journal Number field, define the first number of a series to be used for revenue recognition
day book journals. This number is incremented when the day book journal is updated.
Journal Codes
Journal Codes
Navigate to Journal Codes.

Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Journal Codes
To enter journal codes:
1. In the Select Option window, select Change Journal Codes.
2. In the Journal Code field, enter a new or existing journal code.
3.2 45
3. Enter a Description for the journal code.
4. In the Link Account No. field, enter an account number to link to the journal code. The transaction balance
is posted automatically to this account. Leave the field blank if you do not want to link to an account.
5. Press Enter to save the changes.
Sales Ledger
This section discusses the routines you must complete before you can begin using the Sales Ledger - setting up
parameters, accounting codes, automatic accounting schedule (AAS), Payment Terms and Delivery Methods. To
start working with the iScala Sales Ledger, follow the procedures in this section. You can skip any procedures
that you know have already been completed. Repeat each procedure for every company within iScala that will
use the Sales Ledger module.
Define Parameters
Before you can use the Sales Ledger, you must set up parameters that will tailor the Sales Ledger for each company.
When planning all number series in iScala, make sure the same numbers are not used in more than one place to
avoid confusion. It is also recommended to number the transactions so they can be easily identified later.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
To set parameters
1. In the Transaction No. Invoice Entry, Transaction No. Invoice Journal, Transaction No. Payment
Entry, and Transaction No. Payment Journal fields, enter the first numbers of the sequential number
series to be used for the corresponding items. These numbers will increase by one whenever a new item is
entered.
2. Use the Allowed Difference for Question field to set the acceptable boundary for an underpayment
amount that must be confirmed by the user.
3. In the Allowed Difference Automatic field, define the boundary accepted for an underpayment amount
that will be automatically accepted.
4. In the Sales Ledger in the Average Gross Profit in % field, specify the percentage to be used to calculate
the average gross profit with the invoices registered directly.
5. Use the Next Customer Code, Next Customer Code (Temp), and Next Customer Code (Draft) to
define the first number of the sequential number series to be used as the corresponding customer codes.
The number will increase by one when a new customer is entered.
6. In the Financial Year Common Sales Ledger field, enter the accounting year to be applied to the Common
Ledger. A zero value denotes the company’s current financial year.
7. Enter the first number of the sequential number series to be used for consolidated invoices in the Number
Series Consolidated Invoices field.
8. Specify the tax code to be used for payments on the account when the tax is calculated by the cash method
in the TAX Code on Account Payments field.
46 3.2
9. In the Advance Invoice amount apportion rule field, set the rule for the advance invoice amount when
closing a sales order.
10. Select the type of adjustments allowed when automatic allocation is used in the Prepayment tax allocations
rule field.
11. In the Deduction Rule field, set the rule for the partial invoice deduction.
12. The Information on Customer Query field defines the details to be displayed in addition to the customer
code and customer name in enquiry options.
13. The Use Invoice Number for Tax Note switch specifies what number is used for the tax note.
14. The Use Daily based counter for Tax Notes switch defines what counter is used for the tax note. The
field is available if Use Invoice Number for Tax Note switch is set to No and the First Event Taxation feature
is activated.
15. In the Number of Tax Note field, enter a tax note number for the next printed tax note. The field is available
if Use Daily Based Counter for Tax Notes switch is set to No.
16. Define the value of the license flag for a new customer in the Default value of the Customer license
flag field.
17. In the Default Customer license period field, specify the value of the license start and end dates for a
new customer.
18. In the Billing statement number series and No. Series TAX Correctional Invoices field, enter the first
numbers of the sequential number series to be used for billing statements. The number increases by one
when a new billing statement is entered.
19. The system creates the VAT self-sales invoices during EU VAT reverse charge taxing. Set the next number
of the VAT self-sales invoice in the No. Series Self-Invoices field.
20. Press Enter to save the changes and move to the Reminders / Statements / Interest screen.
21. In the Number Series Interest Invoices field, enter the first number of the sequential number series to be
used for interest invoices. This number increases by one when a new interest invoice is entered. This number
will also be used as the General Ledger transaction number unless you set the Update from Invoice
Journal Totals parameter in the Switches option to Yes.
22. The Minimum Amount for Interest Invoices field defines the minimum interest charged to a customer.
The settings will be applied to the interest charged at a particular time; for example, to consolidated interest
every month, not to individual invoices.
23. Specify the number of copies of the interest invoice to be printed in addition to the original interest invoice
in the Number of Interest Invoice Copies field.
24. Use the Payment Terms Interest Invoices field to enter a payment value from 0 to 99, corresponding to
the terms entered in the Sales Ledger Parameter file.
25. In the Invoicing Fee Interest Invoice field, enter the fee to be charged for the issue of an interest invoice.
For interest invoices in a foreign currency, the invoice fee will be converted and rounded up.
26. Define the penalty interest period in the Interest per Started Period field. For example, enter 0 or 1 to
calculate the interest daily, enter 30 to calculate the interest for a 30-day period, and so on.
3.2 47
27. In the Days per year (Interest calculation) field, specify the number of days per year for interest calculation.
The zero value represents 365 days.
28. In the Reminder Fee field, enter the fee to be charged for the issue of a reminder. The reminder fee is
calculated for accounting currency invoices only.
29. In the Delay in Days for Reminders field, set the number of days after the invoice due date before sending
a first reminder.
30. The Days between Reminders field defines the period, in days, before the next reminder is printed.
31. Use the Number of Reminder copies field to specify the number of copies of reminders or statements to
be printed in addition to the original documents.
32. In the Number of reminders field, set the maximum number of reminders (0-3) to be sent to customers.
This parameter can also be specified in the customer file (Credit/Payment option, No. of Reminders field). If
the number of reminders in the customer file is not specified (zero value), the number of reminders set up
in the parameters is used.
33. In the Period for Statements field, enter the period, in days, to be used for payment forecasts and ageing
analysis. Standard periods are 15- and 30-day periods. For statements of 15-day periods, the periods for
the payment forecast and ageing analysis will be divided up into 15, 30, 45, and 60 days respectively.
34. Set the next payment proposal number for consolidated invoices in the Payment Proposal Counter field.
35. Use the Interest Invoice Grace Period (Days) field to define a grace period, in days, allowing the customer
additional time before interest invoices.
36. Select the mode of tax calculation in interest invoices in the Tax On Interest field.
37. In the Default Tax Code field, define the default tax code for interest invoices.
38. Press Enter to move to the Switches screen.
39. Set the date when you want the invoice to be posted to the tax account in the Cash Method of Tax
Accounting field.
40. In the Update Statistics on Direct entry field, select Y if you want turnover and gross profit for customers
to be updated when invoices are entered. Gross profit will be calculated using the percentage specified in
the Average Gross Profit % parameter in the Parameters option. Enter N if you want turnover and gross
profit not to be updated with the invoices entered in the Sales Ledger.
41. The Statements based on Invoice date switch defines the date to base the ageing analysis of statements.
42. Use the Credit Interest on Early Payment field to select whether the customer will receive an interest
credit for payment before the due date.
43. If you want to print the accrued penalty interest on payment reminders, enter Y in the Show Interest Due
Reminders field.
44. The Update with Payment Journal totals and Update with Invoice Journal totals parameters control
the Payment Journal and Invoice Journal layout, as well as the General Ledger update.
45. Use the Integrated with General Ledger field to specify whether you want the General Ledger to be
updated after the Invoice and Payment Journals have been printed. Check the General Ledger transactions
before and after adjusting the parameter.
48 3.2
46. In the Automatic Transaction Number field, select the method the transaction numbers for the Sales
Ledger invoices are set.
47. If you want to use the General Ledger or the Sales Ledger transaction numbers for the Sales Ledger
transactions, enter Y in the Use General Ledger Transaction Number field.
48. The Credits Included in Amount Due switch defines whether the reminders will include both the invoices
and credit notes amounts.
49. In the Paid Invoices on Statement field, enter Y if you want the statements to include paid invoices.
50. The Customer Code Plus Invoice Number as Text field defines the type of text used as a reference in
the transaction text.
51. Select the customer file to be used for your company in the Common Sales Ledger field.
52. In the Credit Check Including Orders field, set the rule for the amounts of the delivered orders invoicing.
53. Use the Save TAX Transactions switch to define if the tax transactions from invoice and payment files will
be saved.
54. Specify what kind of Extended Payment Information should be specified when entering payment
transaction. Three options are available:
• 0 - no information
• - check number, payment code, remark and payment transaction date information
• 2 - check number, payment code, remark, payment transaction date and payment tracking information
55. When Cash Method Accounting is used, tax is posted to the tax account when the Tax Point occurs, not on
the invoice issue date. The Point for Cash Method of Tax Accounting parameter allows you to define
the Tax Point occurrence time.
56. Enter 0, 1, 2,3, or 4 to set the rule for Accounting of exchange gains/losses.
57. In the Tax code and Base amount as a text field, define the way the text for tax code and base amount
is formed.
58. The Type of Sales Transaction parameter allows you to create an alternative type of sales transaction
based on the legislation requirements of some countries (for instance, Brazil).
59. Press Enter to move to the Penalty Interest screen.
60. In the Penalty Interest Rate field, enter the interest rate as a percentage of the penalty charged per year
to calculate interest on overdue payments. The interest rate can also be specified in the customer file
(Credit/Payment option, Interest/Yr % field). If the interest rate in the customer file is not specified (zero
value), the rate set in the parameters is used.
62. In the Rounding Tolerance Limit field, enter the maximum rounding difference, arising when an invoice
in one currency is settled in another currency, which will be written off automatically.
63. Use the Rounding Profit Account field to define the account to which rounding gains are to be booked.
The account from the General Ledger is used as the default.
3.2 49
64. Set the account to which rounding losses are to be booked in the Rounding Loss Account field. The
account from the General Ledger is used as the default.
Set Accounting Codes
Navigate to Code Files

You use the Code Files routine to set the accounting codes that are used for Sales Ledger Transactions.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Code Files
To set accounting codes:
1. In the Select Option window, select Accounting Codes.
2. Click OK.
3. Select the code type in the Select Entry Type field.
4. Enter a new Accounting Code.
5. Enter a code description in the Text field.
Use The Automatic Accounting Schedule
Use the Automatic Accounting Schedule to define the accounts for the Sales Ledger transactions to be transferred
automatically to the General Ledger, or to the Invoice and Payment Journals if the Sales Ledger is not integrated
with the General Ledger. The Sales Ledger transactions are posted to the accounts according to the Automatic
Accounting Schedule table where the accounts for the required accounting schedule positions must be specified.
If such accounts have not been specified in the Automatic Accounting Schedule or in other iScala routines, this
will be required when printing ledger journals. If the Sales Ledger is integrated with the General Ledger, the
specified accounts must be in the General Ledger Chart of Accounts.
The Automatic Accounting Schedule accounts can be specified in the customer file (Accounting option) and will
be used for:
• Invoice entries
• Payment entries
• Transfers to/from the Common Sales Ledger
• Transfers from the Sales Ledger to the General Ledger
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Automatic Accounting Schedule
To use the Automatic Accounting Schedule:
1. In the Stock Item Accounting Code field, enter the accounting code of the stock item. The system allows
entering unregistered accounting codes; however, a warning message displays. Leave the field blank to set
up common items that do not depend on accounting codes.
2. In the Customer Accounting Code field, define the accounting code of the customer. This field is not
updatable if the Stock Item Accounting Code field is empty.
3. Set an Accounting Item. Press F4 or click ? to display the earlier entered items.
4. In the Tax field, enter a tax/tax accounting (00-99) or currency code (01-30). The field changes its name
depending on the Accounting item field value.
50 3.2
5. In the Account field, define an account number for this position in the Automatic Accounting Schedule.
Define Payment Terms To Print
Use this routine to define payment terms that print on Invoices and Payment Reminders. You can enter up to
100 different payment terms. The payment terms for a particular customer are specified in the customer file
(Credits/Payments option, Payment Terms field). The payment terms for interest invoices are specified in the Sales
Ledger Payment Terms Interest Invoices parameter in the Reminders/Statements/Interest option.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Payment Terms
To define payment terms to print:
1. Select the Language from the list to enter the payment terms.
2. In the Payment Term field, enter either new payment terms (00-99) or existing ones whose information
you want to adjust. To delete the payments terms, enter a minus sign (-), followed by the code of the
payment terms to be deleted. Confirm the deletion and press Esc to return to the entering/adjusting payment
terms routine.
3. In the Description field, enter a description of the payment terms (up to 30 characters).
4. Specify required data in the Due Date based on, Free Delivery Month, Mentioned date, Number of
Days, and End of Month fields.
5. In the Way of Payment field, indicate the way of payment used for paying invoices. If this field is not
empty, the way of payment specified on the customer file is ignored during invoice entry.
6. Set the Fixed Payment Days switch. In the Payment Day field, enter a day of the month for the default
payment day. If a month includes fewer days than the specified value, the date is shifted to the last day of
the month.
7. Select the rule for the Multiple Payment Periods and set the Payment Day.
8. The Store Cash Invoice field is enabled only if the Free Delivery Months and Number of Days parameters
are not specified. This field determines if the Sales Ledger transactions will be created for the cash invoices.
9. If the Store Cash Invoice parameter is set to No, in the Account field, enter the account in which to post
customer cash invoices.
10. Define up to three cash discounts in the Cash Discount Days fields.
11. The Discount at Inv. Issue Moment parameter activates the calculation of cash discounts at the invoice
issue moment.
12. Use the Amount for Basis field to define the amount basis in the local currency. It can be any non-negative
numeric value. The number of decimals depends on the value of the Decimals in Own Currency company
parameter.
13. In the Alternative Payment Term field, set the alternative payment term to be used if the invoice amount
in local currency is greater than or equal to the Amount for Basis value.
14. In the Payment Terms for Credit Notes field, enter the alternative payment term used for credit notes
(when the total amount in local currency validated during sales order entry or adjustment has a negative
value). You can leave this field blank in order to use the same payment term for invoices and credit notes.
3.2 51
15. Select if you want to Use Rounding to minimum coin function, and press Enter to save the changes and
exit.
Define Delivery Terms to Print
Use this routine to define up to 100 different delivery terms to print in Sales Order documents. The delivery terms
to be used for a particular customer are specified in the customer file.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Delivery Terms
To define delivery terms to print:
1. Select the Language to use to enter the delivery terms.
2. In the Delivery Terms field, enter a code for a new delivery term (00-99) or an existing one for which you
want to change information. To delete a delivery term, enter a minus sign (-), followed by the code of the
delivery terms to be deleted. Confirm the deletion and press Esc to return to the entering/adjusting delivery
terms routine.
3. Enter a description of the delivery terms, in the Description field. You can use up to 30 characters.
4. Set the title pass date for the selected delivery term in the Title Pass Date field.
5. Press Enter to save the changes and exit.
Define Delivery Methods
Use this routine to define the delivery methods. You can enter up to 100 delivery methods and specify the tax
code and the transport documents for each delivery method. The information about delivery methods can be
printed in the Sales Order documents. The delivery method to be used for a particular customer is specified in
the customer file.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Delivery Methods
To define delivery methods:
1. Select the Language to use to enter delivery methods.
2. In the Delivery Method field, enter either a new delivery method (00-99) or an existing one whose
information you want to update. To delete delivery terms, enter a minus sign (-), followed by the code of
the delivery terms to be deleted. Confirm the deletion and press Esc to return to the entering/adjusting
delivery methods routine.
3. Enter a description of the delivery method in the Description field. You can enter up to 30 characters.
4. In the TAX Code field, set the tax code for the freight supplied by this delivery method.
5. Define the transport documents to be printed for this delivery method in the Transport Document field.
Enter a zero (0) if you do not want documents to be printed.
52 3.2
Purchase Ledger
This section discusses routines you must complete before you can begin using the Purchase Ledger - setting up
parameters, accounting codes, automatic accounting schedule (AAS), Payment Terms and Delivery Methods. To
begin working with the iScala Purchase Ledger, follow the procedures described in this section. You can skip any
procedure that you know has already been completed. Repeat each procedure for every company within iScala
that will use the Purchase Ledger module.
Set Parameters
Before you can use the Purchase Ledger, you must set parameters that will tailor the Purchase Ledger for each
company.
When planning all number series in iScala, make sure the same numbers are not used in more than one place to
avoid confusion. It is also recommended to number the transactions so they can be easily identified later.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
To set parameters:
1. In the Transaction Number Invoice Entry field, enter the first of the sequential number series to be used
for the subsequent Purchase Ledger invoice transactions. If a new invoice is entered, the number is increased
by one.
2. In the Transaction Number Credit Notes field, enter the first of the sequential number series to be used
for the subsequent Purchase Ledger credit notes transactions if the Separate Transaction Number For Credit
Notes parameter is set to Yes.
3. Set the first of the sequential number series to be used for the subsequent Invoice Journals in the Purchase
Ledger in the Transaction Number Invoice Journal field.
4. In the Transaction Number Payment Entry field, define the first of the sequential number series to be
used for the subsequent supplier payments.
5. Use the Transaction Number Payment Journal field to set the first of the sequential number series to
be used for the subsequent Payment Journals.
6. Enter the first of the sequential number series to be used as the reference number for invoices in the
Reference Number Invoices field.
7. Set the first of the sequential number series to be used as the reference number for credit notes in the
Reference Number Credit Notes field.
8. Use the Internal Interest (% per Year) field to define the internal interest used by the company to assess
the profitability of the invoice cash discount in the automatic payments routine (usually the same interest
rate as for cheque accounts).
9. In the Next Supplier Code field, enter the first of the sequential number series to be used as the next
supplier code. This number is increased by one when a new supplier is entered.
10. Set the first of the sequential number series to be used as a new temporary supplier code in the Next SUPP.
Code (Temporary) field. This number increases by one when a new temporary supplier is entered.
3.2 53
11. In the Next SUPP. Code (Draft) field, enter the first of the sequential number series to be used as the new
Draft Supplier code. The number increases by one once a new temporary supplier is entered.
12. Select the accounting year for the Common Ledger to be applied in the Financial Year Common Purchase
Ledger field. For the current financial year, the field value is set to 0.
13. Use the Period for Ageing Analysis field to define the day period to be used for the payment forecasts
and ageing analysis. Standard periods are 15- and 30-day periods. If the 15-day period is used for statements,
the periods for the payment forecast and ageing analysis will be divided up into 15, 30, 45, and 60 days,
respectively.
14. In addition to the supplier code and supplier name, decide what other details to display in enquiry options
in the Information on Supplier Query field.
15. In the Withholding Tax field, enter the percentage of the withholding tax deductions for suppliers who
have no company tax certificate (for example, if the supplier is not liable to account tax). You can adjust the
withholding tax when entering supplier invoices.
16. Press F4 or click ? to select the Default Invoice Tax Code.
17. Set the first of a sequence number series to be used in a register of received invoices in the R eceived
Invoices counter field.
18. Press Enter to move to the Switches screen.
19. Select when the tax for an active invoice will be posted to the tax account in the Cash Method of Tax
Accounting field.
20. Set the Accounting on Automatic Payment rule.
21. The Update with Payment Journal totals and Update with Invoice Journal totals parameters control
the Payment Journal and Invoice Journal layouts, as well as the General Ledger update.
22. In the Automatic Transaction Number field, define the way transaction numbers are created.
23. Use the Integrated with General Ledger switch to define if the General Ledger can be updated with the
Invoice and Payment Journals entries.
24. In the Use General Ledger Transaction Number field, select which transaction numbers (set in General
Ledger or Purchase Ledger) should be used for the Purchase Ledger transactions.
25. Set the rule for unauthorized invoices in the Book Preliminary Entry to General Ledger field.
26. In the Supplier + Invoice Number as Text field, select the information you want to use as a reference in
the transaction text.
27. Set the company file you want to use in the Common Purchase Ledger field.
28. In the Save TAX Transactions field, define if you want to save all tax transactions and payments files in
the tax file.
29. Set the rule for Detailed Payment Transactions.
30. In the Separate Transaction Numbers for Credit Notes and Separate Reference Numbers for Credit
Notes fields, select if you want to use the credit note numbers retrieved from the supplier file from
54 3.2
Transaction Number Credit Notes and Reference Number Credit Notes parameters in the credit notes
entering routine.
31. In the Overwrite Reference Number field, set if you want the reference number to be adjusted in the
invoices and unauthorized invoices entering routines.
32. Use the TAX Special Exchange Rate field to define whether gains and losses from using a special rate for
TAX may be booked to special accounts automatically or you want to book such differences manually.
33. When Cash Method of Tax Accounting is used, tax is posted to the tax account when Tax Point occurs.
The Point for Cash Method of Tax Accounting parameter allows you to define the Tax Point occurrence
time.
34. Set the rule for Accounting of exchange gains/losses.
35. In the Tax code and Base amount as a text field, set the way the text field for a Tax line is formed.
36. Use the Renumber Unauthorized Invoices field to define the option for unauthorized invoices renumbering.
38. When invoices in a certain currency are settled in another currency, minor differences in rounding may arise.
In the Rounding Tolerance Limit field, enter the maximum difference to be written off automatically in
this field.
39. Use the Rounding Profit Account field to enter the account to which rounding gains should be booked.
The account from General Ledger is used by default.
40. In the Rounding Loss Account field, enter the account to which rounding losses should be booked. The
account from General Ledger is used by default.
Set Accounting Codes
You use the Code Files routine to set the accounting codes that are used for Purchase Ledger transactions.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Code Files
To set accounting codes:
1. In the Select Option window, select Accounting Codes.
2. Click OK.
3. Enter either a new Accounting Code or use F4 or ? to select one of the existing codes you want to adjust.
4. Enter the code description in the Text field.
Use The Automatic Accounting Schedule
Use the Automatic Accounting Schedule routine to define the accounts for the Purchase Ledger transactions to
be transferred automatically to the General Ledger, or Invoice and Payment Journals if the Purchase Ledger is
not integrated with the General Ledger. Purchase Ledger transactions are posted to accounts according to the
3.2 55
Automatic Accounting Schedule table where the accounts for the required accounting schedule positions must
be specified. If these accounts are specified in the Automatic Accounting Schedule or in other iScala routines,
they are required when printing ledger journals. If the Purchase Ledger is integrated with the General Ledger,
the specified accounts must be included in the General Ledger Chart of Accounts.
The Automatic Accounting Schedule accounts are specified in the supplier file (Accounting option) and can be
used for the following:
• Invoice entries
• Payment entries
• Transfers to/from the Payment Ledger
• Transfers to/from the Common Purchase Ledger
• Transfers from the Purchase Ledger to the General Ledger
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Automatic Accounting Schedule
1. In the Stock Item Accounting Code field, enter a stock item accounting code. Leave the field blank to
set up common items that do not depend on accounting codes. The system allows entering unregistered
accounting codes and displays the corresponding warning.
2. Define the Supplier Accounting Code. This field is not updatable if the Stock item accounting code field
is empty.
3. Enter an Accounting Item. Click ? or press F4 to display the list of accounting items.
4. The Tax field changes its name depending on the value identified in the Accounting item field. Enter a tax,
tax accounting (00-99) or currency code (01-30).
5. In the Account field, enter an account number for this position in the Automatic Accounting Schedule.
Define Payment Terms
Use this routine to define the payment terms used for invoices. You can enter a maximum of 100 payment terms.
The payment terms used for a particular supplier are specified in the supplier file (Codes option, Payment Terms
field).
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Payment Terms
To define payment terms:
1. In the Select Option window, select a Language.
2. In the Payment Term field, enter either new payment terms (00-99) or the existing terms for which you
want to change the information. To delete payment terms, enter a minus (-) in the field. Confirm the deletion,
and press Esc to return to entering/adjusting payment terms routine.
3. Enter a description of the payment terms in the Description field. You can use a maximum of 30 characters.
4. In the Free Delivery Months field, define the number of months from the delivery date when a free credit
is granted (generally 0 or 1). The credit period will be calculated from the first day of the next month.
56 3.2
5. Use the Number of Days field to set the number of credit days when credit is allowed, for example, 30 for
30 days.
6. Optionally, define the payment method applied for paying installments in the Payment Method field. In
this case, the Payment Method value in the supplier file will be ignored when entering the invoice.
7. Select Yes if you want the payment due date to be shifted to the nearest fixed payment day specified in
the supplier file in the Fixed Payment Days switch. If no such days are specified in the supplier file, the
Payment Day field value is used instead. Select No if you do not want to consider the fixed payment days
from the supplier file when calculating the payment due date calculation.
8. In the Payment Day field, enter a day of the month for the default payment day. When a month includes
fewer days than the specified value, the date is shifted to the last day of the month. If the Fixed Payment
Date field value is No, this field is not updatable.
9. Define a maximum of 3 cash discounts in the Cash Discount Days field. For each cash discount, you should
specify the number of days when the credit is allowed, and the percentage of the cash discount given on
the invoice amount.
10. Select Yes in the Use Rounding to minimum coin field, if you want to run the function.
Define Delivery Terms
Use this routine to define the delivery terms. You can enter a maximum of 100 delivery terms to print in the
Purchase Control documents. The delivery terms used for a particular supplier are specified in the supplier file
(Codes option, Delivery Terms field).
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Delivery Terms
To define delivery terms:
1. Select a Language in which to enter the delivery terms.
2. In the Delivery Term field, enter new delivery terms (00-99) or existing terms for which you want to adjust
information. To delete delivery terms, enter a minus sign (-) in the field. Confirm the deletion, and press Esc
to return to entering/adjusting delivery terms routine.
3. Enter a description of the delivery term in the Description field. You can use up to 30 characters.
Define Delivery Methods
Use this routine to define the delivery methods. You can enter a maximum of 100 delivery methods. The
information about delivery methods can be printed in the Purchase Control documents. The delivery method
used for a particular supplier is specified in the supplier file (Codes option, the Delivery Method field).
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Delivery Methods
To define delivery methods:
1. In the Delivery Method field, enter a new delivery method (00-99) or an existing method for which you
want to adjust the information. To delete a delivery method, enter a minus sign (-) in the field. Confirm the
deletion, and press Esc to return.
3.2 57
2. Enter a description for the delivery method in the Description field. You can use up to 30 characters.
3. Identify which documents will be printed for this delivery method in the Transport Document field.
Stock Control
This section discusses routines you must complete before you can begin working in the Stock Control module:
accounting codes and automatic accounting schedule. For information on how to set up stock items, read Chapter
14: Managing Inventory.
Define Stock Control Parameters
The parameters routine allows you to define how Stock Control is going to work for companies. Company 01 is
supplied as standard with the default parameter settings.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
To define stock control parameters:
1. Select the warehouse you want to use as default in the Main Warehouse field. This is the warehouse used
for entering stock items.
2. In the Number of Decimals, Prices field, specify the number of decimals used in the local selling price (in
the original currency). You would normally use 2 decimals. However, when dealing with stock items with
very low prices, you may want to use 3-5 decimals.
3. Set the Number of Decimals, Quantity to zero (0) if stock control and stock transaction entries are entered
as whole stock units. Otherwise, use 1 to 5.
4. Stock codes can be up to 35 characters in length. In the Length of Stock Code field, you can specify a
shorter length that will enable you, for example, to print more compact documents such as invoices.
5. If additional taxes apply, for example, advertising tax or luxury tax, enter the amounts as a percentage of
the selling price in the Other Tax 1-3 fields.
6. Use the Price to Include TAX parameter to define the selling price type.
7. Enter the number of decimals used when entering length, width and height (0 to 4) in the Decimal
Measurements field.
8. Set the number of decimals for the required parameters in the Number of Decimals Unit Package, Number
of Decimals Weight, Number of Decimals Volumes, and Number of Decimals Price Multiples fields.
9. Enter the maximum number of levels for a bill of materials (6 to 50) in the Number of BoM Levels field.
10. Define the frequency of closing periods for Balance History in the Stock Closing Period Type field. Balance
for these periods is stored in the system and the balance for a particular date is calculated from them.
11. Define the earliest accounting period open for new entries in the Stock Control module in the Open From
Period field.
58 3.2
12. Use the Bin Placement via LF parameter to define the method of creating a placement proposal during
stock receiving.
13. Specify the required data in the UOM Description 1-3 fields.
14. In the Nomenclature No. Intangibles field, enter the default nomenclature number for non-inventory
stock items or press F4 or click ? to select the value from the list of existing nomenclature numbers.
15. Specify whether it shall be possible to continue if Item/Batch Placement rule is broken in the Enforce
item/batch rule? field.
16. Define the Default value of export status.
17. Press Enter to move to the Parameters - Stock Accounting screen.
18. In the Journal for GL Transactions field, enter the journal code that stock transactions are to be marked
with. You can then use this code for selection in the General Ledger.
19. Set the Verification period for 8-days rule and the Verification period of 10-days rule.
20. Enter the first of sequential numbers series in the Next GL Transaction Number, Next SC Transaction
Number, and Next Batch ID fields.
21. In the Purchase On-charge [%] std field, set the default estimated on cost used by the program when
you enter new stock if no oncost is indicated on the individual stock item record. This default can be adjusted
on transaction entry. The stock value is then increased by the amount you specify, which corresponds to
purchase costs upon arrival.
22. Define the Stock Valuation Model and Stock Valuation Model for CC (consolidated currency).
23. In the Integrated to General Ledger field, select whether you want the General Ledger to be updated
with the stock transactions.
24. In the Use GL Transaction No. field, define whether you want to take stock transaction numbers from the
transaction number counter in the General Ledger module.
25. Set the Number of Internal Delivery Note Copies.
26. Define the number from which internal delivery notes begin in the Internal Delivery Note Number Series
field.
27. Press F4 or click ? to enter the Consolidation Currency Code.
28. In the CC for consolidation field, specify which currency you want to use for consolidation.
29. Use the Accounting Mapping from Stock Item parameter to define the accounting code to be used in
the Stock Receipt and Stock Issue lines of GL transactions generated from Sales Order and Purchase Order
modules.
30. To activate multilingual support for the stock item Long Description field, set the Protected long description
field to No.
31. In query windows, you can view information on every batch that includes Batch Number, Batch ID, Balance,
Available, Received Date, and Expiry Date. With the Batch info to display parameter, you can select to
view Batch Number or both Batch Number and Batch ID information in the default query window.
3.2 59
32. Define the cost type to be used for depreciation transactions in the Cost Type for Depreciation field.
33. Set the Keep Hard-Allocation History? parameter to Yes if you want to keep hard-allocation history.
34. Select the DS Supplier selection rule type.
35. In the Picking list log No. field, enter the next picking list allocation log number. It is used when an allocation
log is created in the common picking routine.
36. Specify the next internal picking list group number in the Picking list group field.
37. Enter the next internal merged picking list number in the Merged picking list number field.
38. Select how a Delivery Note is created in the One Delivery Note per Picking List? field.
39. Set the rule for the scrapped serial numbers in the Use of Scrapped Serial Numbers field.
40. Enter the Number of Classification Levels. It will be used when specifying the commodity codes.
41. Specify the next box number counter in the Box Counter field. This counter can be used as the default for
newly created boxes.
42. Press Enter to move to the Consignment/Vendor managed warehouse parameters screen .
43. Set the Cost Accounting for Supplier Stock parameter to No if you do not want the stock transactions
related to the consignment warehouse to be sent to General Ledger.
44. Use the Cost accounting for Vendor Managed warehouse parameter to define whether Sales Ledger
costs shall be updated for order lines with Vendor Managed Warehouses.
45. Enter No in the SL Invoice Journal Accounting for Supplier stock field if you do not want invoices to
be created for the sales orders on stock from the consignment warehouse.
46. Select whether to use sales ledger invoice journal accounting for Vendor Managed warehouses in the SL
Invoice Journal accounting for Vendor managed stock field.
47. A consumption note is a purchase order of type 5 designed to notify the supplier about the goods shipped
by you from the consignment warehouse, because the stock stored in this warehouse belongs to them. Set
the Create Consumption Note to Yes to automatically create a consumption note.
48. Set the rule for manual stock movements in the Disable manual stock transactions for Vendor managed
warehouse field.
49. Press Enter to move to the Cycle Counting Parameters screen.
50. Set the rule for the cycle items counting in the Lock for Counting field.
51. Define the time when a cycle item should be locked in the Delay Lock until Printing filed. This parameter
is used only for items to be locked for counting.
52. Specify the Counting Tolerance Percentage.
53. Use the Minimal number of counts for cycle counting field to define number of counts sufficient to
enter stock taking results and Reason Code for stock taking difference.
60 3.2
54. In the Number of consecutive counts with the same result field, enter the number of successive counts
with the same results for each item required to validate stock taking result entry.
55. Use the Cycle Counting List Sorting parameter to control sort order of Cycle Counting List. It is applied
when printing, adjusting and viewing CC List, and when entering stock taking results.
56. Use the Exclude Bins/Batches not used for period parameter to define bins and batches that should not
be included in the counting list. If the balance quantity is zero during this period, a bin or batch is excluded.
57. Press Enter to move to the User Defined Fields screen.
58. There are 10 User Defined fields you can use as you want. You can enter codes defined in the code file in
these fields.
59. Press Enter to switch to the BATCH USER DEFINED FIELDS screen. Enter the required information in the
user-defined fields and select the codes.
60. Press Enter to move to the Stock Transfer Order Parameters screen to define additional parameters for
stock transfer orders.
61. Specify the next order number to be generated by the system in the Next Order Number field.
62. Define the order lines numeric interval in the Numeric Interval Order Lines field.
63. Enter the delivery lines numeric interval in the Numeric Interval Delivery Lines field.
64. Specify the leadtime for picking in the Picking Leadtime field.
65. Enter the Shipping Leadtime.
66. Press Enter to move to the User Defined Barcode Identities Setup screen to define different barcode
identities per item, for different types of barcodes.
67. Enter the Name of the identity. It displays as a field description on screens and reports.
68. Specify the input and output field length. Total Length of all five fields cannot exceed 150 characters. Enter
0 to disable the field.
69. Define the input Type.
70. Define the Item/Supplier Id, default from Item parameter. It controls what happens if a barcode for an
item/supplier combination should be used and is not available.
71. Define the Item/Customer Id, default from Item parameter. It controls what happens if a barcode for an
item/customer combination should be used and is not available.
Define Accounting Codes
Use this routine to define the accounting codes used within the Stock Control module with the exception of
stock codes. These codes are used for informational purposes and as selection and sort criteria for printing reports.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Code Files
To define accounting codes:
3.2 61
1. In the CODE FILES - STOCK CONTROL Select Option window, select Accounting Codes.
2. Click OK.
3. Enter either a new Accounting Code, or click ? or press F4 to select one of the existing codes you want to
adjust.
4. Enter the code Description text .
5. . Press Enter to save the changes.
Use the Automatic Accounting Schedule
Automatic accounting in the Stock Control module is used to automatically post transactions to General Ledger
(if Stock Control is integrated with General Ledger) or to the Stock Control journal (for stand-alone modules).
Automatic accounting codes are entered into a matrix, which is used by the program to look up information; for
example, the account for goods received.
In each stock item record, an automatic accounting code is entered, 00-99, which determines which group of
General Ledger account codes is affected by transactions for the stock item.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Automatic Accounting Schedule
1. In the Schedule Type field, select a schedule type for a warehouse type.
2. Enter the Stock Item Accounting Code. Leave the field blank to set up common items that do not depend
on accounting codes. The system allows entering unregistered accounting codes and displays the
corresponding warning.
3. In the Accounting Code 2 field, enter a customer, supplier, or MPC accounting code. This field is not
updatable if the Stock Item Accounting Code field is empty.
4. Enter a new Accounting Item, or press F4 or click ? to select an existing one.
5. The Tax field changes its name depending on the Accounting Item field value. Enter a tax, tax accounting
code (00-99), or currency code (01-30).
6. In the Account field, enter an account number for this position in the Automatic Accounting Schedule.
62 3.2
Warehouse Management
A warehouse can be anything from a main store to the back of a delivery van. Use Warehouse Management to
adjust the warehouses to correspond to your stock needs.
Enter Basic Warehouse Information
Use this routine to enter or delete warehouse information. Stock items may have a different physical location,
or it may be necessary to separate inventory because it is controlled differently.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Warehouses
To enter basic warehouse information:
1. Enter a unique code in the Warehouse field.
2. Enter the Internal Name and Address for the warehouse.
3. Enter the appropriate Calendar Collection for the warehouse. Calendar Collection helps users handle and
calculate the working time of many business entities that employ this warehouse. Calendar Collection also
helps set and organize the working time of this warehouse.
4. Select the Warehouse Type - Regular, Consignment, or Vendor Managed. This will control ownership of
the items in the warehouse and when to account for items going into and out of the warehouse. Several
warehouse types are available:
• 00 - Regular warehouse, that is, your warehouse where the goods belonging to you are stored.
• 01 - A consignment warehouse, that is, your warehouse where goods belonging to your supplier are
stored. In this case, you can manage the goods but do not own the goods, and the supplier owns the
goods but cannot manage the goods. Deliveries to this warehouse are not invoiced, because the owner
of the goods is not charged.
• 02 - Vendor managed warehouse is a customer warehouse which contains company owned inventory.
In this case, the invoice customer is always the same as the warehouse customer.
5. Determine whether this warehouse should be handled as a Depot. This field is activated only if the value
of the Warehouse Type parameter is 00.
6. In the Internal Customer field, specify the customer code used for lease contract transactions.
7. Select whether Zeroing is allowed at this warehouse. This is useful for temporary warehouses used onsite
or for external events where, after the event is complete, reusable items can be transferred to permanent
warehouses. The balance on the temporary warehouse is zeroed in a single transaction.
8. Press Enter or Page Down to skip the fields you do not need to adjust and move to the Accounting screen.
Enter Warehouse Accounting Information
Warehouses can be set up to manage each of them separately, from an accounting and reporting standpoint.
To enter warehouse accounting information:
1. Enter the Stock Valuation Model and the Stock Valuation Model for Consolidated Currency.
3.2 63
2. Enter the inventory Account
3. Press Enter or Page Down to skip the fields you do not need to adjust and move to the Switches screen.
Use Switches
To use switches:
1. Define if the common Picking routine is used for this warehouse in the Use Common picking field.
Note The Common picking routine in iScala provides printing or sending one picking list instead of
creating different picking lists in each module, and entering picking results (issues against picking list)
in a common function. Several picking requests can be merged to one printed/sent picking list according
to various merging rules. You are able to handle picking for warehouse transfers and manually entered
stock issues, create picking list and report the result. See more information on how to work with the
Common Picking routine in Chapter 14: Managing Inventory.
2. Fill in other fields, if available, and press Enter. The Setup Available To Promise (ATP) window displays.
3. Select the check boxes where ATP checks should be performed.

Available to Promise Inventory (ATP) is a method to find out how much of a certain product is available on
a certain date based on the actual stock balance, expected receipts and issues, and the stock item delivery
time.
ATP is available for orders of type 1 (Normal order), order of type 4 (Back-order), order of type 5 (Repeat
order) for stock items with the status less than 8, order of type 6 (Production order), and during the conversion
of the quotation into the order of type 1 or 6.
When the ATP functionality is activated and set up, every new sales order line is checked to ensure that the
ordered quantity is available at the requested delivery date. If the available quantity is less than the ordered
one, an ATP proposal to split the order line or move forward the delivery date is created.
Define Warehouse Area Management
Warehouses can be set up with many different areas such as receiving area, dry goods area, bulk area and so
on. Special functionality is linked to the receiving area to move the goods into permanent bins using the Bin
Location Proposal report.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Bin Management > Enter/Adjust Warehouse Areas
To define warehouse area information:
1. Select the Parent Warehouse to use.
2. Enter a Warehouse Area Code and a Description for the warehouse area.
3. Select whether the area will be used for the Receiving Area.
4. Enter up to five different Bin Types to use in the warehouse area. Before setting up warehouse areas, set
up the Bin Type and Bin Location Rule Types. This is done in the Code Files routine for Stock Control.
64 3.2
Set Up a Bin
A bin is an elementary storage unit as opposed to a more complex storage unit such as a warehouse or warehouse
area. Bin management provides the key to efficient warehouse usage. Bins can be any separately identifiable
location in a warehouse to store goods. Bins are linked to Warehouse Areas.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Bin Management > Enter/Adjust Bins
To set up a bin:
1. Select the parent Warehouse to use.
2. Enter a Bin no.
3. In the Description field, enter a description for the bin.
4. Select whether Capacity checking should take place, and if so, define the capacity and the margins for
use.
5. Select whether Capacity checking should take place, and if so, define the capacity and the margins for
use.
6. Select the Warehouse Area within which the bin is located.
7. Select the Bin Type, for example, shelf, pallet, and so on. Set up the Storage Type and the Bin Type before
setting up bins.
Bin Location Rules match the item. Use the Bin Type, and Bin Storage Type to find the best bin for storage
at the time goods are moved from receiving areas to permanent locations via the Bin Location Proposal
report. If available, you can set up default bins.
Enter Warehouse Details
Warehouses are necessary for a variety of purposes. It is possible to specify unique Stock Requirement Planning
guidelines, Delivery Times, and other supply constraints by Warehouse.
The Warehouse location may supply its own customers. Therefore, the sales Forecast for the location will reflect
customer demand, directly affecting purchase planning.
It may also be necessary to process Drop Shipments and manage Lead Times differently, depending on the
location.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Other Stock Files > Warehouse Information
To enter warehouse details:
1. Select the Stock Code.
2. Enter the Warehouse code where the stock item is located.
3. Set the Re-order Level for the Warehouse.
4. Input the economic order quantity used with Purchase Planning in the Econ. Order QTY field.
3.2 65
Purchase Control Parameters
This section discusses how to customize the purchase control parameters. You can find more information on the
Purchase Order module setup in Chapter 15: Procurement, Purchasing, and Making Payments which explores
Purchase Order main routines.
Purchase Order Types
The iScala system supports six purchase order types:

• Type 0 - Purchase order proposals/request for quotation
• Type 1 - Normal order (delivery to own warehouse)
• Type 2 - Back order (delivery to own warehouse)
• Type 3 - Order for direct delivery to customer
• Type 4 - Replenishment order
• Type 5 - Consumption note
Customize Purchase Control Parameters
The Parameters routine contains alternatives to help customize the module.

The Parameters routine contains alternatives to help customize the module.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters, Purchase Control-Parameters
To customize purchase control parameters:
1. In the Number of Purchase Order Copies and Number of Reminder Copies fields, set the number of
copies to be printed. Enter 0 if your documents have carbon copies. Only the original is printed if the purchase
order is telexed.
2. In the Accounting Code Intangibles field, enter the default automatic accounting code for the purchase
of temporary stock items. For regular stock items, enter this code in the stock file. The automatic accounting
code determines which accounts are used for posting transactions for each stock item, and are maintained
in the automatic accounting schedule in the Purchase Ledger module.
3. In the Tax Code Intangibles field, enter the default tax code for non inventory stock items. Press F4 or
click ? to list all existing tax codes.
4. Set the rules for Normal Status Remind Confirm and Normal Status Remind Delivery.
5. Select the Normal Order Type (the order type that is entered by default).
6. Define the number of days in the Days until Reminder Confirmation and Days until Reminder Delivery
fields.
7. Set the interval between line numbers at order entry for Numeric Interval Order Lines, Numeric Interval
Text Lines, and Numeric Interval Batch Lines. Permitted values are 1-10; the default is usually 10 to allow
insertion of further order lines in between entered order lines at a later date.
8. In the Planning Weeks Purchases field, enter the number of weeks (1-53) for purchase planning (time for
the planning file). The need for calculation of purchase order proposals is checked during this period.
66 3.2
9. The Move Delivery Forward (w) field defines the number of weeks to receive goods before delivery to
the customer. Use this parameter to change the entered delivery date for direct orders (order type 3).
10. Use the Supplier Priority Selection field to set the rules for choosing a supplier for the Purchase Order
Proposal.
11. In the Budget Profile, Commitment field, enter the budget profile you want to use for booking commitment.
The budget alternatives are set in the General Ledger module. Refer to the Order Commitments and
Commitment Accounting sections in application help for more information about Order Commitments.
12. Enter the Goods Received Note Number.
13. Define a number for the next Consolidated Goods Received Note in the Consolidated GRN Number field.
14. When entering a purchase order, you can allocate the received goods for the Sales, Service, and Work Order
line depending on the Earliest Delivery Date, Weighted Order Priority and Escalation Level. The Default
Assignment Priority field defines which allocations will be created first.
15. Use the Update DS Purchase order till parameter to define the restricted status of drop shipment purchase
orders. Once a purchase order reaches a restricted status, it can no longer be updated. If a linked service or
sales order is changed, and the corresponding purchase order or order line is in restricted status, changes
are made only to the service or sales order, and are not propagated to the purchase order.
Sales Order Parameters
This section provides you with information on the sales order types used within iScala processes and explores the
sales order Parameters routine. Additional setup considerations are described in Chapter 7: Selling and Receiving
Payments which is devoted to the Sales Order routines.
Sales Order Types
The iScala system supports nine sales order types:
Sales Order Types Description

0 - Quotations No stock check is made when you enter a quotation.
The quotation is saved until it is either converted to an
order or cancelled. Conversion can be made from order
types 1, 2, 3, or 6. You can print a quotation report of
all the quotations in the system.
1 - Normal Orders When you enter order lines for a normal order, the
program checks the stock balance and updates the
balance when you withdraw the stock. The quantity of
the reserved stock is updated in the stock file. For
normal orders, you can choose to allocate or deliver
stock from a batch.
2 - Invoice Orders These are orders for immediate delivery and invoicing.
You can use this type if the items are already with the
customer. The stock balance is updated on order entry,
and it is not necessary to use a separate routine for
stock withdrawal. Invoicing can be done immediately.
3.2 67
Sales Order Types Description

If the stock item record specifies that the stock is a part
of a batch, the batch deliveries must be entered. If the
Delivery Note Invoice Order parameter is set to Yes, you
can print a delivery note for the invoice order.
3 - Direct Orders This order indicates that the stock will be delivered
directly to the customer from your supplier. The
program will not check the stock balance; however, the
stock statistics are still updated when the order is closed.
4 - Back Orders Back orders are only created for order type 1 and 2 if
invoices are closed for orders not completely delivered.
Normal orders become back orders and a back ordered
quantity is updated in the stock file, not a reserved
quantity.
5 - Repeat Orders These orders are mainly used as contract orders. Order
entry has extra fields enabling you to enter the interval
of the order, the dates for the order, and a price type.
The Advance Invoice Repeat Order parameter setting
affects the invoicing time. Normally, stock items with
a status of 8 or 9, or non-stock items, are used in this
order. You can use items with a different status, but
they only stay on the order until the next invoice. Batch
deliveries must be entered if repeat orders relate to a
batch item.
7 - Direct Credit Orders A credit order for which the stock balance is not
affected. If this type of sales order is specified, the
screen for entering sales return data is displayed. It
includes only Sales Return Reason Code and Return
Comment fields.
8 - Credit Orders This sales order type is a credit order in which the stock
balance is updated when you enter the order. Choose
batch delivery if the credit order relates to a batch stock
item. If this sales order type is specified, the screen for
entering sales return data displays. The screen includes
only Sales Return Reason Code and Return Comment
fields.
9 - Re-Invoicing Orders These orders are used to adjust sales orders of the other
types.
Use the Parameters Routine
The parameters routine contains alternatives and enquiries to help customize the module. Examples of the kind
of data you enter here are counters for order numbers, invoice numbers, and credit notes. You also draw up
rules for handling Sales Order and other integrated modules. Company 01 is supplied as standard with the default
parameter settings.
Ensure the invoice number counter you choose does not duplicate any other number series in your iScala system.
It is important that you give each transaction a unique number.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
To use the parameters routine:
68 3.2
1. In the Order Number Counter A - Z fields, define the first of a sequence number series to be used for
orders. Counter A is set by default when entering sales orders, but you can use other counters for different
order types. The order number consists of 10 numerical characters.
2. Press Enter to move to the Other Counters/Parameters screen.
3. In the Invoice Number Series, Credit Note Series, Internal Invoice Number Series, Delivery Notes
Number Series, Picking List Number Series, Delivery Proposal Series, Billing Slip Series, and Discount
Group Series fields, set the first of a sequence number series to be used for the corresponding documents.
These numbers are automatically used when invoices are printed.
4. Select the Number of Invoice Copies, Number of Delivery Note Copies, and Number of Order
Confirmation Copies. If you do not want to print some of these copies, enter 0.
5. The Discount Method parameter tells the system which method should be applied to calculate discounts.
6. In the Invoicing Fee field, enter the fee that should be applied for invoicing. The invoicing fee is only used
when the customer’s Invoicing Fee field in the Sales Ledger is set to Yes. Foreign currencies are converted
in accordance with the current rates.
7. In the Limit for Invoicing Fee field, enter the maximum order value above which the invoicing fee will not
apply.
8. Use the Limit for Currency Clause % field to set the percentage exchange rate deviation allowed between
the order date and delivery date before the currency clause is activated. The activation means that all selling
prices are recalculated with currency fluctuation.
9. Set the Compensation %, which denotes the percentage of the currency exchange fluctuation to be
included in the calculation of the prices. For example, 100 indicates that the entire exchange rate fluctuation
will be included in the price (100%). If you enter 35 in this field, 35% of the currency fluctuation is included
in the price.
10. In the Clause in Currency field, enter the default currency to be used in the currency clause.
11. Enter the EDI Process Lead Time. This time is the difference between the workday end time in the company
calendar and the minimal start time of LTM/ATP calculation.
12. The Check cost value modification at credit order input parameter prevents you from accidentally
modifying the cost value when you enter a credit order (order type 8). If this value has been adjusted
accidentally and/or coincides with an existing stock code, the system requires your confirmation in case the
parameter value is set to Yes. 13
13. Press Enter to move to the Default Values screen.
14. Use the Normal Delivery Time in Days field to set the default delivery time as a number of days. When
a new order is entered, the delivery time is added to the order date as a proposed delivery date. You can
change the delivery date for the whole order or its individual order lines.
15. In the Accounting Code Intangibles field, enter the default accounting code for the sales of non stocked
items. Items held in stock have an accounting code entered on the stock item record and on the customer
record, which determines the account where the revenue is posted. You can change the accounting code
when the order is entered.
16. Select the rules for Normal Status Order Confirmation and Normal Status Picking List.
3.2 69
17. The Normal Order Type field defines the default order type for all new orders. You can change this during
order entry.
18. Order transactions are saved in sequential order in the statistics transaction file. In the Weeks for Booking
Statistics field, enter the number of weeks to be included in the weekly period for statistics.
19. Use the Accounting/Statistics Dimension field to specify the method of distributing revenue and costs
for items in a bill of materials.
20. In the Calculated Freight Charges field, enter the freight costs to be calculated for each order and entered
in the order statistics as a percentage of the order value. This cost will not be invoiced.
21. Set the amounts to be added to the corresponding counters in the Order Item Increment, Order Subitem
Increment, Batch Line Increment, and Order Text Line increment fields.
22. In the Repeat Order Currency Clause field, enter the default value with which repeat orders should be
increased to account for currency fluctuations. An index value can be entered in the Index Calculation option
for separate orders. Invoicing the order index value is compared with the value in the parameters, and an
increase is made, if necessary.
23. Set the Save Order History parameter.
24. Use the Save Version History field to define whether you want to save sales order version history.
25. Use the Weighted Customer Priority for Sales Order % parameter for calculating the weighted sales
order priority. Enter the weighted customer priority for a sales order (from 0 to 100%), by which the
customer's priority should be weighted when calculating the default value for the weighted sales order
priority. The sum of customer and order priority weights must be 100%.
26. Use the Weighted Customer Priority for Sales Order % parameter for calculating the weighted sales
order priority. Enter the weighted customer priority for a sales order (from 0 to 100%), by which the
customer's priority should be weighted when calculating the default value for the weighted sales order
priority. The sum of customer and order priority weights must be 100%.
27. In the Default Sales Order Priority field, enter the default sales order priority to be allocated to the new
sales order.
28. In the Default split of invoices field, select the default value of the invoice printing parameter.
29. Press Enter to save the changes and move to the Accounting and General Switches screen. You can set
various rules for general and accounting operations on this screen. Check the prompts from the User
Assistance to enter the necessary rules.
30. Perform the same operations in the Pricing/Discount Switches and Document/Invoicing Switches
screens.
31. Press Enter to move to the Manufacturing/Drop shipment screen.
32. Use the Drop Shipment Split per Sales Order parameter to select how to find an existing purchase order
to which the line can be added.
33. In the Default Consolidated DS Delivery field, define the default processing of drop shipment order lines.
This value is used as the default when new order lines are created.
34. Set the rules for the Update linked work order, Update linked work order till, and Cost of drop
shipment items before delivery fields.
70 3.2
35. Press Enter to move to the Order Header Dimensions screen.
36. Once you have set up accounting dimensions for the company (System Utilities > Business Data Management
> Company Setup, Accounting Dimensions), define the values for the dimensions when entering the sales
order header (Sales Order > Order Entry/Enquiries > Enter/Adjust Order).
37. Set the Order Line Dimensions in the next screen and press Enter to save the changes.
3.2 71
Selling and Receiving Payments Epicor iScala User Guide
Chapter 3: Selling and Receiving Payments
A comprehensive set of customizable documentation supports sales activities so quotations, orders, order confirmations,
picking lists, shipping documents, and invoices can easily be designed and generated. Where needed, these documents
are available as Web services or XML to simplify integration up and down the supply network.
A comprehensive set of customizable documentation supports sales activities so quotations, orders, order confirmations,
picking lists, shipping documents, and invoices can easily be designed and generated. Where needed, these documents
are available as Web services or XML to simplify integration up and down the supply network.
Management can monitor and control sales activity through a comprehensive set of system enquiries and reports.
History can be analyzed aggregately or at the order line level through user-definable reports and statistics.
Upon invoicing and closure of an order, Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger) and Stock Control are updated in detail,
thus also updating the General Ledger.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the Sales Ledger and Sales order modules.
Only the main setup records are described here. Some parts of the Operations sections may also contain setup
records if they are required for a specific scenario.
You may also need to adjust some parameters within Company Setup. Some modules have global settings you
define through this administration program. See the application help for more information.
Available to Promise (ATP)
The Available to Promise Inventory (ATP) method is applied in the application for analyzing the quantity of stock
items available on a certain date. This analysis is based on the actual stock balance, expected receipts and issues,
Lead Time Model (LTM), and stock item delivery time.
quantity, depending if the customer accepts order splitting, line splitting, or neither, an ATP proposal to split the
order or line or move the delivery date forward is created. Before using this ATP functionality, set up Warehouses,
Customers, and Stock Items.
ATP only plans for orders within the purchase time frame; if the requested delivery date is after the date when
a purchase order created today would enable the goods to be received and shipped, an infinite quantity is
assumed. Make sure you later create the required purchase orders, normally by using Stock Replenishment
Planning (SRP) running against actual orders or greater than forecast and actual orders.
Set Up Warehouses
Use the Warehouses routine to activate the ATP functionality for a warehouse.
To set up ATP for a warehouse:
1. Select a Warehouse.
72 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Selling and Receiving Payments
2. Click Next until the Setup ATP dialog box displays.
3. Select the ATP related options:
a. Perform ATP Check for Sales orders
b. Possible to break ATP Rules
c. Confirmed Purchase Order
d. Sales order
e. Customer Reservation
f. Contract Reservation
4. Click OK and then exit the routine.
Set Up Customers
Set up ATP options for a customer.

Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Customer File > Enter/Adjust Customer
To set up a customer for ATP:
1. Select a Customer.
2. In the Menu dialog box, select Order/Invoicing 1 and click OK.
3. In the ATP Resc. Priority field, enter the priority for this customer in the ATP Rescheduling routine. Enter
1 for the highest priority.
4. In the Accept Line Split field, define whether you allow line split for this customer in ATP calculation.
5. Click Next.
6. Click Cancel in the Menu dialog box and exit the routine.
Set Up Stock Items
Allow ATP checks for a stock item.

Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Inquiries > Enter/Adjust Stock Items
To set up a stock item for ATP:
1. Select a Stock Code.
2. Select Miscellaneous in the Menu dialog box and click OK.
3. In the ATP Check field, select Yes.
4. Click Next.
3.2 73
Define ATP Rescheduling Priority
Use the Enter/Adjust Order routine to define ATP rescheduling priority for sales orders.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Order Entry/Enquiries > Enter/Adjust Order
To set up ATP rescheduling priority.
1. Select an Order Number.
2. Navigate to the OTHER screen.
3. Enter an ATP Priority. Enter 1 for the highest priority.
4. Enter Yes in the Accept Line split field if the application can propose to split particular order lines into
several lines with different delivery dates. Enter No if the application should search for a delivery date when
the entire requested quantity can be delivered.
After order lines are entered, the application checks if the ordered quantity is available at the requested
delivery date. If the available quantity is less than the ordered quantity, an ATP proposal to split the order
line or move forward the delivery date is created. The ATP Horizon date is calculated and displayed. ATP
Horizon shows the earliest possible date the stock item could be available in stock if it is ordered on the
current date.
5. Enter Yes in the Accept Order split field if different delivery dates are allowed in the sales order lines. Enter
No if delivery dates in the sales order lines are automatically set to the latest date.
6. Click Next and then exit the routine.
Sales Management Configuration
This section describes how to set up sales order parameters, such as accounting and pricing. It also explains credit
check and automatic accounting rules setup.
Enter Sales Order Parameters
Enter parameters that define how sales orders are processed in your company.
Main Menu Path: Sales Orders > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
To enter sales order parameters:
1. Use the ORDER NUMBER COUNTER screen to define the next order number for each order counter.
2. Click Next. The OTHER COUNTERS/PARAMETERS screen displays.
3. Define the document series numbers in the available fields.
4. Define the number of document copies in the available fields.
5. Enter the Discount Method.
6. Enter the Invoicing Fee and Limit for Invoicing Fee.
74 3.2
7. Define the EDI Process Lead Time. This time is the difference between the workday end time in the company
calendar and the start time of Lead Time Management/Available to Promise calculation.
8. Click Next. The DEFAULT VALUES screen displays.
9. Use this screen to define default values for sales orders.
10. Click Next.
11. Use the ACCOUNTING/GENERAL SWITCHES screen to define accounting parameters.
12. Click Next.
13. Use the PRICING/DISCOUNT SWITCHES screen to set pricing and discount parameters.
14. Click Next.
15. Use the DOCUMENT/INVOICING SWITCHES screen to define invoicing settings for sales orders.
16. Click Next.
17. On the Manufacturing/Drop shipment screen, define drop shipment settings.
18. Click Next.
19. On the Order Header Dimensions screen, define which dimensions are mandatory for each sales order.
20. Click Next.
21. Use the Order Line Dimensions screen to mark mandatory dimensions for each order line in the same way
as for orders.
22. Click Next. The information updates, and the routine closes automatically.
Configure Automatic Accounting Schedule Rules
Use the Automatic Accounting Schedule (AAS) to define the accounts for the Sales Ledger transactions to be
transferred automatically to the General Ledger, or to the Invoice and Payment Journals if the Sales Ledger is not
integrated with the General Ledger. The Sales Ledger transactions will be posted to the accounts according to
the table of the Automatic Accounting Schedule where the accounts for the required accounting schedule
positions must be specified. If such accounts have not been specified in the Automatic Accounting Schedule or
in other iScala routines, this will be required when printing ledger journals. If the Sales Ledger is integrated with
the General Ledger, the specified accounts must be in the General Ledger Chart of Accounts.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Automatic Accounting Schedule
To configure AAS rules:
1. Enter a Stock Item Accounting Code.
2. Enter a Customer Accounting Code. This field is not available if you leave the Stock Item Accounting Code
field blank.
3. Select an Accounting Item.
4. Define the Tax.
3.2 75
5. Select an Account number for the automatic accounting schedule.
6. Click Next to update the file and then exit the routine.
Order Process
When a sales order is entered, users reserve specific stock items for an order. Orders can be preceded by a
quotation or entered directly.
Enter an Order
Use the Enter/Adjust Order routine to enter a sales order directly.

Enter A Sales Order
1. Enter the Order Number. The application assigns a number automatically, but you can change it if necessary.
2. Enter the order Type. Numbers 1 to 9 correspond to the various order types.
3. Select the order Status.
4. Enter the Order Date.
5. Select a Salesman.
6. Complete the following fields: Order Customer, Invoice Customer, and Delivery Customer. These
customers can be the same or different.
7. Define the customer location to where the delivery will be sent in the Site Code field.
Enter Order Lines
1. Click the Enter/Adjust Order Lines button on the toolbar.
2. Enter the Stock code.
3. Enter the Ordered Quantity (Sales Unit).
4. Press Enter.
5. The Lead Time Rescheduling screen displays. This screen shows a Lead Time schedule for the order line
based on the BTT you entered for sales orders. The dates are calculated according to the duration rules you
entered for each milestone on the BTT.
6. Verify the correct Calendar Collection is selected. You must set up a calendar before you can use the LTM
functionality since all lead time calculations are made according to the calendar selected. It is essential that
the calendar and milestone durations have the same time unit, for example, days. Otherwise, the application
will not be able to calculate the schedules. For more information on calendar setup, refer to the Application
Help.
76 3.2
7. If necessary, update the data in the available fields and click Update.
Note You can use the LTM functionality in a similar way for service and purchase orders, as well as
for contracts. For more information, refer to the Application Help.
8. Enter * in the Stock code field, and press Enter to update the order.
Stock item life cycle phases can influence the sales order entry process. For example, if an item is on hold
or obsolete, you will not be able to create sales order lines for this item and the application will show a
warning message. You set up life cycle phases in the Enter/Adjust/Delete Life Cycle Phases routine and then
use the Enter/Adjust Stock Items routine to assign them to a stock item. For more information, refer to the
Application Help.
Produce And Assemble Orders For Stock Control - Bill Of Material
Enter values in most fields in the same way as a normal order; however, there are two differences: the Order
Type value should be set to 6 - Works Order, and the Order Customer should be an internal customer. Internal
customers have customer codes starting with INTR.
You can use a BOM configuration to define an existing configuration to use in the sales order. In this case,
configuration is linked to the sales order and its code is saved in the order.
Enter/Adjust Order
To enter the order header:
1. Enter the Order Number. The application assigns a number automatically, but you can change it if necessary.
2. Enter the order Type. Enter 6 to create a Work Order.
3. Select the order Status. This parameter affects what users can do with the order.
Enter Order Lines
2. Click the BOM button on the toolbar and select one of the options. You can use a BOM configuration or
a BOM template.
Note A BOM template is a predefined product structure that contains information on what items or
components are needed to produce another item. A BOM configuration is a more complex object
that can have a serial number and be linked to a warehouse, customer site, or supplier site. You can
trace the number of BOM configurations in each warehouse, but this is not possible for BOM templates.
3. Select a BOM configuration from the dialog box and click OK.
3.2 77
Note Each BOM Configuration is unique and is identified in the application by a Serial Number.
4. Enter the Order Quantity (Sales Unit) and press Enter.
Print An Order Confirmation
When an order is ready, print the order confirmation.

Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Print Documents > Order Confirmation
To print an order confirmation:
1. Enter the sales Order Number or a range of numbers.
2. In the Reprint field, enter No if it is an original printout or Yes if it is a reprint.
3. Click Next.
4. In the Report format dialog box, select a Report Format.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Save As window, enter the File name.
7. Click Save. The Report Preview window displays.
8. Click the Print button to print the order confirmation.
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the Sales Order and Sales Ledger modules. Each
operation is represented as a scenario to help you go through the process from start to finish. If a setup record
is required for the operation, it is also described in the section.
Quotation Process
A quotation is a legally binding offer to deliver specific products or selection of a certain amount of products in
a specified time frame at a pre-defined price. A quotation has a validity period. Within the validity period, the
customer has the option to place an order within the agreed upon conditions with reference to the quotation
or to cancel the contract.
Enter A Quotation
Use the Enter Quotation routine to create quotations for your customers.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Quotations > Enter Quotations
To enter a quotation header:
1. Notice the application automatically assigns the Order Number value. You can change it if necessary.
78 3.2
2. Enter the order Type.To create a quotation, enter 0.
3. Select the order Status. This parameter affects what users can do with the order.
7. Enter the date until which the quotation is valid in the Valid up to field.
8. Define the customer location to where the delivery will be sent in the Site Code field.
Enter Quotation Lines
2. Enter the Stock code.
3. Enter the Ordered Quantity (Sales Unit).
4. When the quotation is complete, enter * in the Stock code field and press Enter to update it.
Print A Quotation
Print a quotation to send to the customer.

Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Quotations > Print Quotations
To print a quotation:
1. Select a range of quotations to print. Enter a number or a range of numbers in the Order Number fields.
2. In the Reprint field, enter No if it is an original printout or Yes if it is a reprint.
3. Click Next.
5. Click OK.
Convert A Quotation To An Order
After a quotation is approved by your customer, you can convert it to a sales order.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Quotations > Convert Quotations to Orders
To convert a quotation to a sales order:
1. In the Order Number field, search for and select the quotation number to convert to an order.
3.2 79
2. Select the Type to convert the quotation to. The available options include Normal Order, Invoice Order,
Direct Order, and Bill of Material.
3. Update the order Status, if necessary.
4. Enter the Order Date. By default, this value is set to the current date.
5. In the Purchase Ord. field, enter the customer's purchase order number for later reference.
6. Update the expected Delivery Date for the order, if necessary, and click Next.
7. Click Yes to the Check ATP for order lines? message.
8. From the Menu dialog box, select Convert Quote and click OK.
9. In the LTM-ATP Rescheduling screen, enter the Delivery Date required. The application displays a message
telling you whether the requested quantity will be available at the delivery date you entered.
10. Click OK.
11. Click Yes to the confirmation message.
Delivery
When an order is entered and confirmed, it is ready for further processing. With the functionality discussed in
this section, you can allocate goods to orders, approve blocked order lines for delivery, print picking lists, and
deliver sales orders.
Sales Order Delivery
After you release picking lists for delivery, you can finally deliver the goods.
Deliver a Sales Order
After you release picking lists for delivery, you can finally deliver the goods.
Use the Enter Stock Withdrawals routine to reduce inventory and make the necessary accounting transactions.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Deliveries/Invoicing > Enter Stock Withdrawals
To deliver a sales order:
1. Enter the Order No. for the delivery being made.
2. Enter the Delivery Date. The current date displays by default.
3. Press Enter. The STOCK WITHDRAWAL screen displays.
4. In the field at the bottom of the screen, enter A for full delivery of all items or P for delivery as per proposal.
5. Press Enter and exit the routine.
80 3.2
Create an Automatic Drop Shipment
Create an automatic drop shipment to ship an order directly from a supplier to a customer.
To create an automatic drop shipment:
1. Enter a Normal Order (type 1) as described in the Order Process section above.
2. When you enter order lines, select a Stock code that has been set up for drop shipment. This should be
pre-defined in the Stock Item and Warehouse master files. With automatic drop shipments, the application
creates a purchase order for the stock item as soon as the sales order line is updated.
The purchase order is placed with the assigned supplier, using delivery and lead time information set up in
the Stock Item and Warehouse master files.
The delivery is received according to the standard delivery process. Depending on your configuration, the
application can account for the transaction by recording the stock items into inventory, automatically
generating a stock withdrawal, and recording an issue against the original sales order.
Allocations
An allocation is a process that links goods in stock to sales orders. When you allocate goods to a sales order,
they cannot be issued to another order.
Create Mass Allocations
Use the Create Allocations routine to automatically create allocations for a range of sales orders.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Deliveries/Invoicing > Mass Allocations > Create Allocations
To create an allocation:
3. Enter the Internal Planning Date.
4. Use the Include Locked Batch field to define whether to include locked batches into allocation.
5. Use the Include expired batch field to define whether to include expired batches into allocation.
6. In the Include invoiced orders field, enter 0 to include only orders that are not ready for invoicing, enter
1 to only include uninvoiced orders, or enter 2 to include all orders.
7. Define whether to Keep allocations for partially allocated orders.
8. Use the Allocate when credit limit exceeded field to define whether to allocate goods to orders for
customers who have exceeded their credit limit.
9. Enter an Order Number or a range of order numbers.
3.2 81
10. In the Customer Code Order fields, select a range of customers who made the orders.
11. In the Customer Code Delivery fields, enter customers to whom the goods will be delivered.
12. In the Customer Code Invoice fields, enter a range of customers to whom the orders will be invoiced.
13. Press Enter. The application automatically creates allocations for the selected sales orders.
Create an Allocation Manually
You can allocate goods manually when you enter or adjust order lines.
To create an allocation for an order line:
2. Go to order lines.
3. In the Stock code field, enter !! to view the list of available commands and press Enter.
4. Select the Enter allocations line NNN command and click OK.
5. Enter an order line number and click OK.
6. Enter the BATCH ID.
7. Enter the ALLOCATED quantity and press Enter to update the file.
Invoicing
When goods are ordered and shipped, invoice the customer. Print and send a detailed list of goods with an
account of all costs.
Sales Order Consolidation
Order consolidation converts multiple orders from the same customer into one order. After conversion, the old
order is removed. Each order is accounted for separately on the consolidated invoice.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order> Delivery/Invoicing > Mass Allocations > Order Consolidation
To run order consolidation:
1. Enter the Order Number range.
2. In the Only Backorders field, select Yes to run invoice consolidation for partial orders only, or No to run
invoice consolidation for all orders.
3. In the TestDeliv. Note, TestTransp. Docs., and Test Export Docs. fields, enter Yes if you want the
application to verify these documents have been printed before consolidation.
82 3.2
4. In the Add Invoice Fees field, enter Yes to summarize invoice fees from all orders, or No to only use the
invoice fee from the first order.
5. Use the Merge header text lines and Merge footer text lines fields to define whether you want to
merge the text lines for the whole order or print them for several orders.
6. In the Min Amount field, specify the minimum amount for invoice consolidation. Customer orders below
this amount are saved until the next invoicing run.
7. Enter the Max Holding Time for the orders with a minimum consolidation amount. Orders that have waited
longer than the time specified are consolidated irrespective of the invoicing amount.
8. In the Type of Consolid. field, enter W to include weekly orders in the consolidation run, M to include
monthly orders, or * to include all orders.
9. Use the Keep Original Prices field to define whether the consolidated order should retain the original
prices.
10. Select the payment terms for the consolidated order in the Paym. term for consolid. order field.
11. In the Only deliveries field, enter Yes to move only delivered lines to the consolidated order, or No to
move all lines.
12. Select a Counter for the consolidated order.
13. Select Yes in the OK to Consolidate field to run the consolidation. Enter No to return to the selection.
14. Press Enter.
Print Invoices
When a sales order has been delivered, send an invoice to the customer.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Deliveries/Invoicing > Print Invoices & Credit Notes
To print an invoice:
1. Select an Order number or order number range.
2. In the Confirm field, enter Yes to confirm the printout.
3. Click Next.
5. Click OK.
8. Click the Print button to print the invoice.
3.2 83
Close Invoice
After an invoice has been fully paid by the customer, you can close it.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Deliveries/Invoicing > Close Invoices & Credit Notes
To close an invoice:
1. Select an Order Number or order number range.
2. Enter an Invoice Number or invoice number range.
3. Use the Up to Invoice Date field to enter the date up to which invoices are to be closed.
4. In the Ok to close? field, select Yes and press Enter.

The orders are closed and moved from Open Orders to Order History.
Enter Customer Invoice Payment Receipts
The Invoices Payment routine allows you to post customer payment receipts to the Sales Ledger, match to open
invoices, or pay on account, while generating General Ledger journal transactions.
If the Sales Ledger is integrated with the General Ledger, enter the Journal Code. The journal code set in the
Sales Ledger parameters displays by default and can be adjusted. If a journal code linked with an account is
selected, you do not need to enter any account lines in the payment entering procedure because this occurs
automatically.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Enter Payments > Invoices Payment
To enter an invoice payment:
1. Enter a date for the period the transaction is posted in the BEDATE field.
2. In the ACC field, enter an account number.
3. Enter the payment transaction line AMOUNT.
4. Enter any required TEXT (customer payment reference may be used here).
5. Press Enter to move down to the next line. The screen field headings switch back from those of the General
Ledger to those of the Sales Ledger. It is possible to switch between the two screens by entering [*] in the
Account Code/Customer Code field.
6. Enter the customer account number in the CUST.CODE field.
7. Enter the customer invoice number to match against in the INVOICE NO. field.
8. Enter the CUR RENCY code for this transaction.
9. If necessary, adjust the invoice/credit note AMOUNT that displays in the respective currency by default.
10. Press Enter. The Dialog window displays.
11. In the Answer with code of account to use field, enter A to use an Accounts Receivable account defined
for the customer, P to use a prepayment account defined for the customer, or O to manually select an
account and accounting dimensions.
84 3.2
12. In the Link Prepayment to Order field, enter Yes to distribute the prepaid amount to one or several sales
orders, or No if you want the prepayment to be updated as standard and later be linked to sales orders.
13. Press Enter.
14. Click Next and exit the routine.

Note If a balance difference remains, the application returns to the General Ledger interface and an
additional line displays to post the balance to an appropriate account for rounding, currency differences,
bank charges, and so on. If payments are received from a customer against a statement total (not an
invoice total), a separate sub-routine can be used to match the statement totals generated by the
application and those previously posted to the customer.
Print Payment Journals
You can print the Payment Journal as a summary of the payments entered. The General Ledger can be updated
after printing if the Sales Ledger is integrated with the General Ledger.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Print Payment Journal
To print a payment journal:
1. Click No to the Do you want to change Payment/Transactions? message.
2. Click Yes to the OK to Check, Sort and Print? message.
3. Enter a User Code or press Enter to include all transactions.
5. Click OK.
8. Click the Print button to print the journal.
9. Click No to the Is Re-printing of Journal required? message.
10. Click Yes to the OK to Update File? message.
11. Click Yes to the Sales Ledger Payment file will be emptied when General Ledger is updated. OK to
Update file? message.
Print Payment Receipts
Use the Print Receipts of Payments routine to print payment receipts.

Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Print Receipts of Payments
To print a payment receipt:
1. In the Select Option window, select Printout Receipts.
3.2 85
2. Select the Date Interval, Customer Code, Invoice Number, Category, and Salesman print criteria.
3. Click Next. The SELECTION CRITERIA screen displays.
4. Enter the selection criteria you need, including the Account, Cost Center, Product, Project, SM, and
Expense type.
5. Click Next.
7. Click OK.
10. Click the Print button to print the receipts.
The Available to Promise Inventory (ATP) method is applied in the application for analyzing the quantity of stock
items available on a certain date. This analysis is based on the actual stock balance, expected receipts and issues,
Lead Time Model (LTM), and stock item delivery time.
quantity, depending if the customer accepts order splitting, line splitting, or neither, an ATP proposal to split the
order or line or move the delivery date forward is created. Before using this ATP functionality, set up Warehouses,
Customers, and Stock Items.
ATP only plans for orders within the purchase time frame; if the requested delivery date is after the date when
a purchase order created today would enable the goods to be received and shipped, an infinite quantity is
assumed. Make sure you later create the required purchase orders, normally by using Stock Replenishment
Planning (SRP) running against actual orders or greater than forecast and actual orders.
Set Up Warehouses
Use the Warehouses routine to activate the ATP functionality for a warehouse.
To set up ATP for a warehouse:
2. Click Next until the Setup ATP dialog box displays.
3. . Select the ATP related options:

• Perform ATP Check for Salesorders
• Possible to break ATP Rules
• Scheduled Purchase Order
• Confirmed Purchase Order
86 3.2
• Salesorder
• Customer Reservation
• Contract Reservation
4. Click OK and then exit the routine.
Set Up ATP options for a customer.
To set up a customer for ATP:
1. Select a Customer.
2. In the Menu dialog box, select Order/Invoicing 1 and click OK.
3. In the ATP Resc. Priority field, enter the priority for this customer in the ATP Rescheduling routine. Enter
1 for the highest priority.
4. In the Accept Line Split field, define whether you allow line split for this customer in ATP calculation.
5. Click Next.
Set Up Stock Items
Allow ATP checks for a stock item.

Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Inquiries > Enter/Adjust Stock Items
To set up a stock item for ATP:
2. Select Miscellaneous in the Menu dialog box and click OK.
3. In the ATP Check field, select Yes.
4. Click Next.
Define ATP Rescheduling Priority
Use the Enter/Adjust Order routine to define ATP rescheduling priority for sales orders.
To set up ATP rescheduling priority:
3.2 87
2. Navigate to the OTHER screen.
3. Enter an ATP Priority. Enter 1 for the highest priority.
4. Enter Yes in the Accept Line split field if the application can propose to split particular order lines into
several lines with different delivery dates. Enter No if the application should search for a delivery date when
the entire requested quantity can be delivered.
After order lines are entered, the application checks if the ordered quantity is available at the requested
delivery date. If the available quantity is less than the ordered quantity, an ATP proposal to split the order
line or move forward the delivery date is created. The ATP Horizon date is calculated and displayed. ATP
Horizon shows the earliest possible date the stock item could be available in stock if it is ordered on
the current date.
5. Enter Yes in the Accept Order split field if different delivery dates are allowed in the sales order lines. Enter
No if delivery dates in the sales order lines are automatically set to the latest date.
This section describes how to use the Available to Promise (ATP) functionality in the sales process.
Use ATP Rescheduling
The ATP Rescheduling routine is used to find sales orders where the promised or confirmed date and quantity
cannot be honored due to insufficient available goods. The most common usage occurs when all sales orders
are entered during the day, and ATP Rescheduling is run in a non-update mode each night to identify potential
problems ready for manual correction the following morning. This is typically used in environments that take a
large number of sales orders per day for standard items that require no configuration or manufacturing to support
the option to check all items; even those for which ATP is not selected should be used. The other usage of this
routine is to periodically check if any lines for which ATP was used during sales order entry now have problems.
In this mode, only ATP items should be checked.
In both all items and ATP check items, ATP Rescheduling only considers complete sales orders for customers who
do not accept partial delivery and suggest revised shipment dates so all items are available prior to shipment.
Thus, for businesses where it is common for customers to not accept partial delivery, running ATP Rescheduling
nightly can make sense even if ATP is checked on the sales order line.
Only one instance of ATP Rescheduling can run at a time, though it is possible to have the program only look at
a range of stock items or warehouses. ATP Rescheduling can include all stock items, even those for which ATP
checking is not normally done and can consider all warehouses, even those normally outside of ATP checking.
If ATP Rescheduling finds items for which there is insufficient stock available on the promised delivery date, it
will suggest which sales orders to adjust. Using the sorting option, it is possible to select how to allocate the
scarce items.
If the Central Warehouse is implemented, automatic update of the sales orders fulfilled from the source warehouse
is not possible because different companies may use customer priority differently. The user must manually make
any changes needed based on the warning report.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Miscellaneous > ATP Rescheduling
To use ATP rescheduling:
88 3.2
1. Select the Stock Item and Warehouse ranges to include in ATP rescheduling.
2. In the Check stock item ATP field, enter Yes to check and report only order lines for stock items with the
ATP Check parameter set to Yes, or select No to check and report all stock items.
3. Enter Yes in the Check warehouse ATP field to check and report only order lines for stock items with the
Perform ATP Check for Sales Orders parameter set to Yes for the corresponding warehouse. Select No
to check and report stock items of all warehouses.
4. Enter No in the Total Recalculation field. The ATP is checked during order entry, and the confirmed delivery
date is already determined. In this case, there is no need to check the requested delivery date. Only availability
on the internal planning date should be checked in case of changes in the planning.
5. Enter Yes in the Update field to update sales order lines according to the results of the ATP check.
6. If you want to adjust sorting, enter Yes in the Adjust Sorting field. The Adjust Sorting screen displays.
7. Change the sort order in which order lines are processed by entering numbers in the respective fields. Enter
– to exclude a field from sorting. The available fields are: ATP Rescheduling Priority, Order Date, Internal
Planning Date (available only for LTM based order planning), Confirmed Delivery Date, Requested Delivery
Date, Order Number, Order Line, Structure Line, and Company Code.
8. Click Next.
9. Select Yes in the Start program? field.
11. Click OK.
13. . Click Save. The Report Preview window displays.
14. Click the Print button to print the report.
ATP Interaction with Lead Time Management Functionality
ATP/LTM interaction allows you to use ATP data for building an LTM schedule, which enables you to make more
accurate delivery schedules. A schedule is based on the ATP information about how much of a certain product
is available on a certain date. On the other hand, some LTM data, such as the date when the customer expects
to receive goods, is available in ATP functionality.
When a new order line is entered, after the stock item and quantity have been specified, the LTM schedule is
built. If the selected stock item is ATP-controlled (the ATP Check parameter is enabled), the schedule is built with
respect to ATP.
Common Picking
iScala Common Picking is designed to optimize all picking activities, whether driven by sales orders, manufacturing,
requisitions or other demands. The Picking module ensures that changes are not made to orders while the goods
3.2 89
are being picked. Common Picking allows warehouse staff to work as efficiently as possible; picking lists are only
created when goods are available for picking. Merged lists can be created for goods going to the same location.
Set Up Common Picking in a Warehouse
Use the Warehouses routine to define picking settings for a warehouse.

To set up picking in a warehouse:
2. Navigate to the Switches screen.
3. In the Use Common picking field, enter Yes to use common picking or No to print picking lists and enter
stock withdrawals in each module separately.
4. In the Allocate at creation of picking list field, enter Yes to allocate all unallocated order lines when a
picking list is created. Otherwise, enter No.
5. Use the Use Release for shipping field to define whether to release stock items for shipping during picking.
6. In the Use merged picking list field, enter Yes to merge several picking lists into one or No to print separate
picking lists for each request.
7. Define whether to Merge requests with different destinations.
8. Define whether to Merge requests with different planned picking dates. If you enter Yes, picking lists
are merged regardless of the planned picking dates. If you enter No, the merged picking list is sorted by
planned picking date.
9. In the Sort option field, define how to sort the picking list: by picking list identifier, request number, stock
code, default bin, destination, or module controlled field.
10. In the Create picking request direct field, enter the number of delivery days for which picking requests
are directly created. Enter 0 to create picking requests manually.
11. In the Print picking list direct field, enter Yes to print the picking list directly after creation or No to
manually print the picking list later.
12. In the No. of copies, Picking list field, enter the number of copies to print.
13. In the No. of copies, Delivery note field, enter the number of copies to print and press Enter to update
the file.
Set Up Picking Parameters
Use the Parameters routine to set up common picking parameters.

Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
To define picking parameters:
1. Navigate to the Parameters - Stock Accounting screen.
90 3.2
2. In the Picking list log No. field, enter the next picking list allocation log number.
3. In the Picking list group field, enter the next number to use as the internal picking list group number when
you set up orders to release grouped picking lists.
4. Enter the next Merged picking list number.
5. In the One Delivery Note per Picking List? field, enter Yes to print one delivery note for the whole picking
list or No to create a delivery note each time you enter picking results. Press Enter to skip the remaining
fields.
Enter A Box
You can ship goods in boxes. A box has a number you can use as a selection parameter during picking.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Picking > Boxes > Enter/Adjust Boxes
To enter a box:
1. Enter the Box Number.
2. Select a Box Type.
3. Select a Delivery Method.
4. In the Box Labels field, enter the print status for box labels. The available options are 0 - Labels will not be
printed, 1 - Labels will be printed, and 2 - Labels have been printed.
5. Select the Closed? check box if necessary. If a box is closed, you cannot change its contents.
6. Click OK.
Print A Picking List
The picking list shows what needs to be prepared for shipping and where it is located.
The picking list shows what needs to be prepared for shipping and where it is located.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control> Picking > Print PickingLists
To print a picking list:
2. In the Credit Check field, enter 0 to print only the lines that pass credit check, or enter 1 to print all lines.
3. In the Reprint field, enter 0 to reprint only those picking lists that were not printed, enter 1 to reprint only
the picking lists that have been printed, or enter 2 to reprint all picking lists.
4. Enter the Picking List to print.
5. Enter the Merged Picking List to print. This field is only active if you select the warehouse where merged
picking lists are used.
6. Select the Request type for which the picking list is printed. For example, select Sales Order.
3.2 91
7. Enter a Sales order range.
8. In the Print closed lines field, enter Yes to print closed picking list lines or No to only print open picking
list lines.
9. Press Enter to print the picking list.
Enter Picking Results
Use the Enter Picking Results routine to enter actual picking results and to create appropriate changes and
transactions depending on the results you enter.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Picking > Enter Picking Results
To enter picking results:
2. Enter a Picking List number.
3. Enter the Current Box and press Enter. The picking list information displays in the grid.
4. Select the Closed check box to close a line.
5. Select a line and click the Set This Issue button. This issues all the goods left to pick on all lines.
7. Click Update.
Release a Picking List for Shipment
When a picking list is ready, release it for shipment.

Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Picking > Release for Shipment
To release a picking list for shipment:
1. Enter a Warehouse.
2. Select a Request type. For example, select Sales order.
3. Select a Request Id.
4. In the Pickinglist field, enter a picking list to release for delivery.
5. Click OK.
92 3.2
Delivery Approvals
You can approve the order lines blocked or rejected by Export Control, Credit Control, or Business Transaction
Control either via the Order Approval Screen or directly on a sales order line.
Use the Order Approval Screen
Use the Order Approval Screen to approve sales order lines blocked for delivery.
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Export Control > Order Approval Screen
To approve a line:
1. Enter the selection ID and Description.
2. Click Adjust.
3. Use the Selection > Sales order screen to narrow the search by Order number, Line number, Stock
code, Country code, or Customer code.
4. Click OK to return to the previous screen.
5. Click OK. The Blocked lines screen displays all the lines the application blocked.
6. In the Object type field, select Sales Orders.
7. In the Blocking type field, select Export only, Delivery only, or All, depending on what type of blocked
lines you want to see.
8. Click Process.
Approve an Order Line Manually
You can approve a blocked line directly from the Enter/Adjust Order routine.
You can approve a blocked line directly from the Enter/Adjust Order routine.
To approve a blocked line:
2. Go to order lines.
3. In the Stock Code field, enter !! to view the list of available commands.
4. Select Adjust order line NNN and click OK.
5. In the Enter line for adjustment field, enter the line you want to edit and click OK.
6. In the Export approved field, enter Yes. This unblocks the lines blocked by Export Control.
3.2 93
7. In the Blocked for delivery field, enter No. This unblocks the lines blocked by BTCE and Credit Control.
8. Press Enter to update the file.
Controlled Distribution
This section contains information on the Advanced Credit Control, Export Control, and Business Transaction
Control Engine (BTCE) functionality. With this functionality, you can control distribution of certain items and
approve distribution as necessary.
Advanced Credit Control
Advanced Credit Control allows you to execute credit check based on a flexible setup. You can include various
elements in the calculation of the utilized credit limit. You can define program behavior rules in case of credit
limit excess. Note you need special permissions to configure the credit check setup. You can also manually approve
blocked order lines in the Order Approval Screen. For information on how to approve blocked and rejected lines,
refer to the Delivery section of this chapter.
Set Up Utilized Credit Limit Elements
Select the elements to include in credit limit calculation. The elements are interdependent. For example, you
cannot include taxes if you do not include the corresponding taxed amount.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Credit check setup > Utilized credit limit
elements
To set up credit limit elements:
1. Define whether to include the Customer Balance amount.
2. Define whether to include the Ordered not shipped amount in the calculation. If you select Yes, the
allocated amount is included as part of the ordered amount. Otherwise, you can include the allocated
amount separately.
3. Select Yes to include the Taxes on ordered not shipped amount. Otherwise, select No.
4. Define whether to include the Additional costs on order (not shipped). The additional costs remain
unshipped until the order is fully delivered.
5. Define whether to include the Taxes on additional costs on order (not shipped).
6. Define whether to include the Allocated not shipped amount and Taxes on allocated not shipped
amount.
7. Define whether to include the Shipped not invoiced amount and the Taxes on Shipped not invoiced
amount.
8. Define whether to include the Additional costs on order (shipped) and Taxes on additional costs on
order (shipped). The additional costs remain unshipped until the order is fully delivered.
9. Press Enter to update the file and exit the routine.
94 3.2
Set Up Credit Check Execution Parameters
You can configure credit check to match your needs. For example, you can perform credit check at sales order
line entry, at work order entry, and so on. You can also set up the program behavior in case of credit limit excess;
for example, block further action or show a warning.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Credit Check Setup > Module dependent credit
check execution parameters
To set up credit check execution parameters:
1. Use the Credit check in sales order module field to define whether to use credit check in the Sales Order
module. If you select No, all other fields in this routine are inactive. If you select Yes, all the fields become
active and you can change the settings as needed.
2. Enter Yes or No in each of the available fields to define how credit check is performed in the Sales Order
module.
3. Press Enter in the last field to update the file and exit the routine.
Set Up Approval Levels
You can define up to 10 levels of credit limit excess approval for different user roles. For example, a sales manager
can approve an order line amount up to 10,000, while a salesperson can only approve order line amounts up to
5,000.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Credit Check Setup > Levels of credit limit
excess approval
To set up approval levels:
1. In the Permission level 01 field, enter an amount up to which users who belong to this level can make
approvals. The next level value must be greater than or equal to the previous one. If you enter
9999999999999, this means unlimited permission.
2. Enter as many levels as needed.
3. In the Save? field, enter Yes to save the changes.
Enter Credit Limit For A Customer
You can enter a credit limit for a customer. When this credit limit is exceeded, the application prevents you from
delivering orders.
To define credit limit:
1. Enter a customer in the Cust Code field.
2. In the Menu dialog box, select Credit/Payments.
3. Click OK.
3.2 95
4. Enter a value in the Credit Limit field. The application compares this value to the customer's current amount
to determine whether any further credit is given. If you enter 999999999999, the customer has unlimited
credit.
5. Press Enter to skip all other fields.
Prepayments
A prepayment is a payment on a sales order invoice prior to its due date. In iScala, you can link prepayments to
sales orders and update the application with this data to later deduct the prepayment amount from the final
invoice.
Link A Prepayment To A Sales Order
You can use the Link Prepayment To Orders routine to link prepayments to sales orders.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Payments/Journal/Cash Flow > Link Prepayment To Orders
To link a prepayment to an order:
1. Select a Customer Code.
2. Select an Invoice Number.
3. Enter the Prepayment Amount.
4. In the Type field, select Sales Order.
5. In the Object field, select a sales order number to which you want to link this prepayment. The Object
Value field displays the total value of the order.
6. Press Enter to skip the rest of the fields.
7. In the Type field, enter * and press Enter to update the file.
Print Prepayment Invoices
You must print prepayment invoices before you can update the database with this new data.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Deliveries/Invoicing > Prepayments/Advances > Print Prepayment Invoices
To print prepayment invoices:
1. Enter an Order number.
3. Specify the Prepayment Date.
4. Select the Print mode. The available options are First print, Reprint (used for lines that have been printed),
and Draft print (preview).
5. In the Confirm field, enter Yes and press Enter.
96 3.2
6. Print and view the invoices.
Update Payment Information
After printing prepayment invoices, update the database with prepayment information.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Deliveries/Invoicing > Prepayments/Advances > Update
Prepayment/Advance Invoices
To update payment data:
1. In the Advances/Prepayments field, select the invoice type to update. In this case, select Prepayment
invoices.
2. Enter an Order Number.
3. Enter the Prepayment/Advance Invoice number.
4. In the Up to Invoice Date field, enter the date until which invoices will be updated.
5. In the OK to update? field, enter Yes and press Enter.
Export Control
Export Control allows you to control or restrict the export of certain items to certain customers in certain countries.
According to the settings you make in Export Control, sales order lines can be processed, blocked, or rejected.
If a line is blocked, you can still create the line but cannot deliver the goods. If a line is rejected, you cannot create
this line. Each of these export statuses is a combination of stock item, customer, and country restrictions. Based
on these restrictions and the business rules that exist in iScala, the application decides whether to allow delivery
of the goods. You can manually approve blocked and rejected lines in the Order Approval Screen. For information
on how to approve blocked and rejected lines, refer to the Delivery section of this chapter.
Activate Export Control
You have to activate the Export Control functionality before you can use it.
Main Menu Path:System Utilities > Business Data Management > Company features setup > Edit company
features setup
To activate Export Control:
1. In the Select Feature groups dialog box, select System Utilities.
2. Click OK.
3. In the Feature Group: SYSTEM UTILITIES dialog box, select Export control.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Cancel to exit the menu.
3.2 97
Set The Export Status On A Stock Item
Set the export status on a stock item to allow or restrict export of the item.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Enter/Adjust Stock Items
To set the export status:
2. In the Menu dialog box, select Miscellaneous.
3. Click OK.
4. Select an Export status. Available options are 0 – Not controlled, 1 – Partially controlled, and 2 – Controlled.
6. Click Cancel to exit the routine.
Set Up Licensing for a Customer
Define licensing settings for a customer to determine whether you can export restricted goods to that customer.
To set licensing for a customer:
1. Select a customer in the Cust Code field.
2. In the Menu dialog box, select Order/Invoicing 2.
3. Click OK.
4. In the Licensed field, define whether the customer is licensed to receive restricted goods.
5. Enter the Licensed from and Licensed to dates. You can enter 00000000 as the from date and 99999999
as the to date to give the customer an unlimited license.
Define Import Settings For A Country
Set up the import parameter for a country to define whether import for this country is restricted.
define import settings for a country
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Geographical Units > Country ISO Codes > Country
Codes Setup
To set up import:
1. Select an Alphabetic ISO Country Code.
98 3.2
2. Enter an Import status. Available options are 0 - Unrestricted import, 1 - Partially restricted country, and
2 - Country is restricted for import.
Create An Export Control Rule
Create a business rule to define how Export Control should work in your company.
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Export Control > Define export control rules
To define an Export Control rule:
1. Select a Stock Item status and a Country status in the table. For example, use Not Controlled for a stock
item status and Unrestricted for a country status.
2. Find the table section for these two statuses.
3. Use the Customer is not licensed list to select an action the application must perform if the customer is
not licensed. The available options are PROCESS, BLOCK, and REJECT. For example, if the stock item is not
controlled, the country is unrestricted, and you select BLOCK in the Customer is not licensed field, if all
these conditions are true, the order line is blocked for delivery.
4. Use an action in the Customer is licensed list.
5. Click OK.
Reports And Enquires
This section describes some routines you can use to print information about transactions, accounts, budgets, and
balances available in the Sales Order and Sales Ledger modules. You can run these reports whenever you need.
Enquire On The Order File
Use the Enquire Order File enquiry to view information about sales orders.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Order Entry/Enquiries > Enquire Order File
To view sales order information:
2. Press Enter.
3. Select an option from the Menu dialog box and click OK.
4. Review information on the respective screen that displays.
3.2 99
Print Quotation Reports
The Print Quotation Reports folder in the Sales Order > Quotations module contains four reports that report on
quotations sorted by quotation number, validity date, customer code, and salesman. All these reports use the
same form. The example below describes how to use the Sorted by Quotation Number report. You can use the
same directions to print other reports in this folder.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Quotations > Print Quotation Reports > Sorted by Quotation Number
To print a quotation report:
1. Enter a Quotation Number or range of quotation numbers.
2. Select a Customer Code or a range of codes.
3. Select a Stock Code or a range of codes.
4. Enter the quotation Validity Date.
5. Select an Order Status.
6. In the Only Totals field, enter Yes to include only totals and sub-totals in the report, or No to also include
order lines.
7. In the Only Order Total field, enter Yes to only print quotation total amounts, or No to also print item
and text lines.
8. In the With Text Lines field, enter Yes to print text lines, or No to exclude them.
9. Click Next.
11. Click OK.
Use Sales History Reports
The Sales Order History provides complete historical information about sales orders that have already been invoiced
and closed.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order> Order HistoryDetailed > Reports> Sorted by Order Code
To print a sales order report:
1. In the Order Number, Invoice No, Customer Code, and Stock Code fields, enter record ranges from
the order history files to view in the report.
2. Enter the required dates for the printout in the Internal Plan. Date and Deliv.Date REQUE fields.
4. Select an Order Status. Orders with the status you select are included in the report.
5. In the Only Back orders field, enter Yes to print only partial orders, or No to print all orders.
100 3.2
6. In the Internal Order field, enter Yes to print all customer orders, or No to exclude internal orders.
7. In the Order Total Only field, enter Yes to print only totals and subtotals for each order, or No to print all
order lines, totals and subtotals.
8. In the Totals Only field, enter Yes to print only subtotals, or No to print the whole order.
9. In the With Text Lines field, define whether you want to print order text lines.
10. In the With Del. Lines field, enter Yes to print detailed delivery information, or No to exclude these details.
11. Click Next.
13. Click OK.
3.2 101
Customers And Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger) Epicor iScala User Guide
Chapter 4: Customers And Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger)
The Sales Ledger is a central point to access comprehensive customer information that supports detailed Accounts
Receivable and automated credit control applications. As part of an integrated solution, the Sales Ledger contributes
customer information to routines in other parts of the application, including sales order processing, customer incentive
price discounting, service management, and the interface to CRM.
The Sales Ledger supports Accounts Receivable management for customer invoicing, in multiple currencies that require
multiple tax rates, that trades from multiple or subsidiary sites. Credit control routines support analysis of aged balances
and overdue transactions, generate reminders and statements, charge overdue interest penalties, deliver credit warnings
during customer order creation in other modules, and, if necessary, set an automatic credit hold across selected ranges
of customer accounts based on total outstanding receivables or order pipeline totals against predefined credit limits.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the Sales Ledger module. Only the main setup
records are described here. Parts of the Operations section may also contain setup records if they are required
for a specific scenario.
You may also need to adjust parameters within Application Setup. Some modules have global settings you define
through this administration program. See Application Help for more information.
Customers and Customer Information
These initial routines allow you to enter customer information before you use the Sales Ledger.
Define Basic Customer Information
Use the Enter/Adjust Customer routine to create a customer record.

To define basic customer information:
1. Enter a customer code in the Cust Code field.
2. Enter the Global ID. This ID is a unique identifier of the customer.
3. Enter customer names in the Name, Srch Name, and Long Name fields.
4. Enter address details in the Address and City fields.
5. Enter the Post Code and the Country Code or search for and select codes from the list of available codes.
6. Enter the Telephone number and Email Address.
7. Complete other fields according to your business needs and press Enter to move to the next screen.
102 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Customers And Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger)
Define The Delivery Address
Enter the customer's primary delivery address.

Note Use the Enter Delivery Addresses option in the Other Customer Files > Enter Delivery Addresses
routine to enter additional delivery addresses.
To define the delivery address:
1. Enter the customer's Delivery address, City, Post Code, Telephone, and Email Address.
2. Select the Warehouse No. normally used for shipping for this customer.
3. If required, use the DelAddr No. and Container No. fields to enter delivery codes for this customer. These
fields are mainly used for shipping documents.
4. Complete other fields according to your business needs and press Enter to move to the next screen. The
Credit/Payments screen displays.
Note The Credit/Payments screen is described in the Credit Control section of this chapter.
5. Click Next to move to the Statistics/Budget screen.
Enter Statistics and Budget Information
Enter statistics and budget information to help you sort information in reports.
To enter statistics and budget information:
1. Enter the customer’s Category.
2. Select a Frequency Code. The default value is F. This code monitors the frequency of the customer's
purchases. The value range is A to P and is updated as customers place orders.
3. Select the customer's ABC Code for the ABC analysis to identify the most important customers by turnover
or gross profit. Code B is the default value for new customers.
4. Enter additional customer codes in the District field. Use codes previously set up in the application to
differentiate between multi-site customers.
5. Use the Advertising Ar., Area Code, and Trade Code fields to refine the report.
6. Enter sales man bonus payment calculations in the Bonus % and the Allocated Bonus fields.
Enter Currency And Tax Information
Use the Currency/Tax screen to enter information about currencies and taxes for the customer.
To enter currency and tax information:
3.2 103
1. Enter a Currency Code. The application supports multi-currency Accounts Receivable.
2. Enter a Language Code.
3. Select the customer organization code in the Type of Organization field.
4. Enter a TAX Code.
5. Enter Yes in the Other TAX Liability field if the company is liable for local taxes (VAT, Sales tax).
Define Accounting Options
Define accounting options to use for this customer.

To define accounting options:
1. Enter the account where the customer's advance payments will post in the Prepayment Account field.
2. Select the appropriate Automatic Acc. Code for the customer. This code ensures system-generated
transactions that involve this customer post to the correct revenue and cost accounts.
3. Enter the account for the customer's accounts receivable to use as the default in the invoice entry procedure
in the Account field.
Enter Order Information
Use the Order/Invoicing 1 screen to enter invoicing and delivery terms for the customer.
To enter order information:
1. Enter a Document Code from 0 to 9. This facilitates the selection of customer specific documentation
layouts within the same language code.
2. Select Yes in the Electronic Partner field to set this customer as an electronic partner. This allows you to
create electronic sales orders for the customer.
3. Define customer accrual bonuses and commissions for salespeople in the Accrual Bonus Code and
Commission Code fields.
4. Select the delivery mode in the Delivery Method field and the Delivery Terms for the customer.
5. Define whether to charge an Invoicing Fee.
6. Select No in the Avoid Partial Deliveries field to allow partial deliveries. A backorder is created if a partially
delivered order is closed.
104 3.2
Enter Additional Order Information
Use the Order/Invoicing 2 screen to enter additional parameters for customer orders.
To enter additional order information:
1. Select a price list code in the Price List field.
2. Enter a Discount Code from 0 to 99. This works in conjunction with the Stock Item Discount Code via a
matrix to determine the precise discount the customer receives.
3. Specify a standard Salesman for the customer. The salesman selected can influence accounting.
4. Set the Consolid. Invoice field to N for no consolidation, or W or M for weekly or monthly consolidation,
to define consolidation settings for a customer's orders, projects, and contracts.
5. Select the billing terms for the customer in the Billing Code field.
6. Select a Warehouse Code.
7. Complete other fields according to your business needs and press Enter. The Menu dialog box displays.
8. Click Cancel and exit the routine.

Note
Use a Standard Customer to enter several customers that share the same basic information to speed
up your work. Create a standard customer as previously discussed and define a unique customer code,
for example, #+ Stand Cust. It is important the standard customer information is correct. To use the
standard customer to enter a new customer, recall the standard customer code in the Enter/Adjust
Customer routine, define a new customer code, and enter details specific to the new customer.
Credit Control
The iScala application has a number of credit control features. These features are described in this section.
Define Credit And Payment Terms
Use the Enter/Adjust Customer routine to define credit and payment terms for a customer.
To define credit and payment terms:
1. Select the customer for whom you want to update credit and payment terms in the Cust Code field.
2. Select 3 Credit/Payments in the Menu dialog box.
3. Set the Credit Limit for the customer.
4. Define the Credit Code, if necessary. The credit code can be used as selection criteria for statistics and
reports to analyze the Sales Ledger.
3.2 105
5. Set the Delivery Block field to 0 for no block, 1 to block further deliveries to the customer, or 2 to block
the customer from deliveries and stop any new orders from being entered into the application.
Note Users can enter sales orders if they are registered in the application with the Allow to Enter
Order for Blocked Customer permission granted in the Sales Order module.
6. Set the Auto field to Yes if documents cannot be printed and delivery is blocked. It is set by the Automatic
Credit Hold routine.
7. Select the Payment Terms.
8. Complete other fields according to your business needs and press Enter.
Set Automatic Credit Hold
You can specify selection criteria for customers and print the list of customers to put on credit hold, for example,
deliveries cannot be entered and pre-delivery documents cannot print for such customers. The automatic calculation
of the credit hold routine generates a printout based on specified selection criteria with all customers whose
balances or amounts due can be a reason for detailed inspection or credit hold. The customer credit limit set in
the customer file is also taken into consideration.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Set Automatic Credit Hold
To set automatic credit hold:
1. Enter the Customer Code, Category, Credit Code, Account, and other selection criteria as necessary.
2. Click Next. The 2 CALCULATE AUTOMATIC CREDIT HOLD screen displays.
3. Set the credit hold calculation parameters based on customer balances via the fields grouped under the
CALCULATE FROM BALANCES heading to define what to include in the total credit exposure.
4. Fields grouped under the CALCULATE FROM DUE AMOUNTS heading determine the credit hold calculation
parameters based on customer amounts due. Enter Yes in the Due Ledger Balance field for the application
to perform a separate calculation for due ledger amounts.
5. Set the Accepted Amount Due to 0.
6. Enter Yes in the Update field.
Print Reminders or Statements For Customers
Print reminders or statements for a customer based on their credit check status.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reminders/Interest Invoices > Print Reminders/Statements
To print reminders or statements:
1. Select 1. Reminders or 2. Statements in the Select Option window, depending on what you need to
print.
106 3.2
2. Click OK.
3. Select search criteria by Per Date,Customer Code, Invoice Number, Category, Salesman, or any other
criteria.
4. Click Next.
5. Use the Account, Cost Center, Product, and other available fields to define criteria for the reminders or
statements to print.
6. Click Next.
7. Define the printing parameters in the Report format window and click OK.
8. Enter the File name in the Save As window.
10. Click the Print button to print the reminders or statements.
Charge Periodic Interest
You can calculate interest on overdue amounts and charge customers this interest.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reminders/Interest Invoices > Print Interest Invoices > Periodic Interest
Charging
To charge periodic interest:
1. Select search criteria by Per Date criteria.
2. Make a selection by Account, Cost Center and other dimensions, as necessary, on the SELECTION CRITERIA
screen.
3. Click Next.
4. Click Yes to the Update interest file? confirmation message.
Print A Credit Control Report
Use this routine to view credit control options for selected customers.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reports/Statistics > Customer Reports > Credit Control Report
To print a Credit Control Report:
1. Use the fields on the CREDIT CONTROL REPORT – SELECTION CRITERIA screen to define the selection
criteria for the report. For example, select a record in the Customer Code, Category, Main Cust. Code
or other fields as necessary.
2. Click Next. Other options display on the same sheet.
3. Use the available fields to sort the report by ABC Code, Credit Code, Accounting Code, or other criteria.
4. Click Next. Other options display on the same sheet.
3.2 107
5. Select options in the available fields as necessary.
6. Place the cursor in the Enter Selection number field and press Enter. The CREDIT CONTROL REPORT –
ORDER screen displays.
7. Use this sheet to define the order of the selection criteria.
8. Click Next to display more options on the same sheet.
9. Place the cursor in the Select Sort field and press Enter.
Use The Collection Proposal
The Collection Proposal lists invoices where reminders have been sent, but the invoice has not been identified
and flagged for collection or legal action.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reports/Statistics > Collection Reports > Collection Proposal
To use the Collection Proposal:
1. Use search criteria such as Customer Code, Category, Salesman, Include Suspended Slips, and others
as necessary to select customer accounts on which to report.
2. Click Next. The PRINT COLLECTION REPORTS screen displays.
3. Select an Account, Cost Center, or other criteria as necessary to sort the report.
4. Click Next. The SORT ORDER dialog box displays.
5. Select the parameter by which to sort the report and click OK.
9. Click the Print button to print the report. The report includes both the original invoice amounts and the
subsequent interest charges levied for late payment.
Use Advanced Credit Check
Advanced credit limit setup includes utilized credit limit elements, module selection, and levels of credit limit
excess approval.
Use the Utilized credit limit elements routine to define which elements to include in the credit check.
108 3.2
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Credit check setup > Utilized credit limit
elements
To use advanced credit check:
1. Enter Yes or No in the available fields to include or exclude elements in the credit check.
2. Click Next to update the file and exit the routine.
Use The Module Dependent Credit Check
Now, use the Module dependent credit check execution parameters routine to define the credit check parameters
in the Sales Order module.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Credit check setup > Module dependent credit
check execution parameters
1. Enter Yes or No in the available fields to define during which operations to perform a credit check. For
example, enter Yes in the Credit check at sales order line entry field to perform a credit check when
you enter a sales order line.
2. Define actions when the credit limit is exceeded. For example, enter Yes in the Block delivery if credit
limit is exceeded field to prevent delivery of any goods if the customer exceeds the credit limit.
Define The Levels Of Credit Limit Excess Approval
Next, define the levels of credit limit excess approval.

You need special permissions to access this routine.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Credit check setup > Levels of credit limit
excess control
1. Use the available fields to enter the maximum amount of credit limit excess that can be approved for users
with particular permissions. Enter 999999999999999999 for unlimited permission.
2. Enter Yes in the Save? field to save the limits entered.

After you complete the above setup, you can use the Approval Screen to release for delivery the order lines
blocked because of credit excess.
You must have special permissions to use this routine.
Use The Approval Screen
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Special Utilities > Credit Control > Approval
1. Select the Common selection check box to make this selection available to all users. The selection is only
available to you if this check box is clear.
2. Enter an ID and Description for the selection.
3.2 109
3. Click Adjust.
4. Enter an Order number range.
5. Enter a Line number range.
6. If necessary, select a Stock code and Customer code.
7. Select the Include approved lines to include the approved order lines.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Next.
10. A list of blocked lines displays. In the Cr. Approve column, select the check box for lines with excess credit
limit you want to approve.
11. Click Process to update the file.
12. Click Exit.
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the Sales Ledger module. Each operation is represented
as a scenario to help you go through the process from start to finish. If a setup record is required for the operation,
it is also described in the section.
Invoicing and Payments
This section describes the routines that relate to entering invoices, printing invoice journals, and building payment
forecasts.
Enter An Invoice And Payment Transactions
Create and post invoice transactions associated with the Accounts Receivable or Sales Cycle into the application.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Invoices/Journal > Enter Invoices/Credit Notes
To enter an invoice and payment transactions:
1. Enter a Customer Code.
2. Enter the Invoice Number.
3. Enter the Invoice Date. This determines the invoice tax point.
4. Enter the Due Date.
5. Enter the Book Entry Date This value determines within which accounting period the transaction falls.
110 3.2
6. Enter the Currency Code and the Invoice Amount. This normally includes taxes which are subject to
application configuration. The application calculates the TAX amount based on the Tax Code for that
customer.
7. Accept the TAX Code.
8. Accept the TAX Amount.
9. Click Next.
10. Select 1. Enter Transactions in the Menu dialog box
11. Click OK.
12. Select the General Ledger account to which to post the transaction in the ACC field.
13. Enter the net amount in the AMOUNT field.
Enter Credit Notes
There are two methods for entering credit notes into the application, either through the Enter Invoices/Credit
Notes routine as above or through the Enter Credit Notes routine within the same Invoices/Journals subfolder.
Entry of a negative value in the Invoice Amount field denotes a credit. Similarly, use of a positive, or debit, value
in the accounting entry fields, rather than a credit, correctly balances the transaction. Credit notes are normally
entered with the next unique Invoice/Credit note number. If the entry is made through the Enter Credit Notes
routine, a separate, automated Credit Note counter sequence may be used.
In some former CIS countries, there is a requirement to use Storno or Red Storno to reverse an existing invoice
instead of entering a new credit note number. This requires entry of the same invoice number as the transaction
being reversed in the Invoice/Credit Note Number field.
Users can enter the following commands in the Invoice/Credit Note number field.
Commands Description
Storno Storno creates a normal double entry journal as a simple credit note but records against
the same invoice number with an S added. A new transaction number is generated.
Payment Transactions
Red Storno Red Storno posts a negative transaction value on the AR debit side and a negative
value on the GL revenue account credit side of the GL journal in accordance with
former CIS book-keeping requirements with an R following the invoice number. A
new transaction number is generated.
Re-invoice Re-invoice posts an adjustment to the original invoice value.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Invoices/Journal > Enter Credit Notes
Follow the same steps as in the previous Enter an Invoice and Payment Transactions section to enter a credit note.
3.2 111
Print An Invoice Journal
The Print Invoice Journal routine allows you to verify and post to the General Ledger individual invoice transactions
that have already been posted to the Sales Ledger.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Invoices/Journal > Print Invoice Journal
To print an invoice journal:
1. Click No to the Do you want to change Invoice/Transactions? message.
2. Click Yes to the Checking, Sort and Printout message.
3. Press Enter in the User Code field to indicate All or enter a company code.
Note The application offers to change all empty mandatory accounting dimensions to the account's
defaults if it finds an accounting code string with a missing mandatory dimension or dimensions.
4. Select an account in the Account/Sub Account field.
5. Click Next.
6. Select the Report Format to use.
7. Review the Sales Ledger Invoice Journal.
8. Click No to the Is Re-printing of Journal required? message.
9. Click Yes to the OK to Update File? message. Enter No to retain the invoice file to post later.
10. Click Yes to the Sales Ledger Invoice file will be emptied as the General Ledger is Updated, OK?
message.
Generate Automatic Payment Forecast
You can generate a report on payments expected in the near future for selected customers.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Payment Forecast
To generate automatic payment forecasts:
1. Enter the From Date and Date To.
2. Select a Customer Code to include in the report.
3. Select the appropriate report basis in the Daily/Weekly Basis field.
4. Notice the With Payment Habits field has an option to use a statistical algorithm that takes into account
the payment history of each customer to adjust the forecast.
5. Select the appropriate assumption for With Cash Discounts.
6. Click Next. The SELECTION CRITERIA screen displays.
7. Select an Account/Sub Account, Location/Cost Center, and other criteria as appropriate.
112 3.2
8. Click Next.
12. Click the Print button to print the forecast.
Use Multiple Due Dates
You and your customer can agree to use partial payments to distribute an invoice amount up to 100 due dates
after the invoice entry is completed.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Customer File > Other Customer Files > Change to Multiple Due Dates
To use multiple due dates:
1. Select a customer code in the Cust. Code field.
2. Enter the Invoice No. of the invoice to change to multiple due dates.
3. Use the PART. PAYMENT column to enter amount values in the same currency as the invoice lines.
4. Amend the due dates in the DUEDAT column.
5. Notice the New Invoice No. displays for each new due date.
Merge Invoicing
For high volumes of comparatively low value customer transactions, there is an option that merges or consolidates
invoices on a weekly or monthly basis. This option enables customer orders, projects, or contracts to be consolidated
into one weekly or monthly invoice. The Consolid. Invoice field in the Enter/Adjust Customer routine for the
customer supports this option. Functionality also depends on parameter setup. Once the consolidation invoice
prints, the specific goes to the Invoice Specification History. Here, it can be enquired, printed, and eventually,
deleted.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Invoice Merge > Invoice Merge
To merge invoicing:
1. In the Select Option window, select 3. Selection.
2. Click OK.
3. Determine the range of transactions to merge by selecting ranges based on the available criteria. Select the
Customer Code, Invoice Spec. No., Invoice Spec. Date, and other parameters as necessary.
4. Select a Source Module.
5. Click Next.
3.2 113
6. Select an Account/Sub Account, Location/Cost Center, and other criteria as necessary.
7. Click Next.
8. In the Select Option window, select 1. Print Invoicing Proposal or 2. Print Consolidated Invoices.
9. Click OK.
Sales Ledger Routines
The Sales Ledger module features multiple special utilities for various needs which are described in this section.
Revalue The Sales Ledger
Use this routine to revalue Sales Ledger currency transactions using the exchange rates for a specified date and
posting the profit/loss transactions to the General Ledger.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Special Utilities > Revaluate Sales Ledger
To revalue the Sales Ledger:
1. Enter the Per Date for revaluation. Transactions after this date are excluded.
2. Enter the Currency Date. The application will use the exchange rates on or nearest to this date.
3. Enter the Book-Entry Date required for the transaction.
4. Select the Currency Code range to include in the selection.
5. Click Next.
10. The OK to Update? confirmation message displays after you print the report. Select Yes and click OK to
update the file.
Validate Ledger Transactions
The iScala application can validate General Ledger transactions against the Sales Ledger by comparing the General
Ledger balance with the Sales Ledger balance for the specified accounts. No adjustments are made, but the
respective report prints.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Special Utilities > Validate Ledger Transactions
To validate ledger transactions:
1. Enter the Ledger Account No.
114 3.2
2. Enter the Book-Entry Period for the validation.

Note The Sales Ledger should not be emptied of paid invoices for this period in order to avoid
duplication.
3. Enter Yes in the OK to Validate field to confirm validation.
4. Click Next.
5. Print and review the report and adjust any differences.
Recreate Statistics
The Recreate Statistics utility can only be used if the Statistics Module is installed and if there are statistics stored
for the selection period. The application clears turnover and profit in the Customer File and recalculates these
values from Statistics (Invoicing Statistics). Only sales done with the Order Module are calculated.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Special Utilities > Recreate Statistics
To recreate statistics:
1. Select a range of invoices for which to recreate statistics in the Customer Code Invoice fields.
2. Enter Yes in the Recreate Period Statistics field to select the date range.
3. Enter Yes in the Recreate YTD Statistics field to select the date range.
4. Enter No in the Update existing statistics field to delete and recreate existing statistics or enter Yes to
update existing statistics from subsidiary companies only if you are using the Common Sales Ledger.
5. . Select Yes in the Confirm to recreate Statistics field.
Reports And Enquiries
This section describes routines you can use to print information about transactions, accounts, budgets, and
balances available in the Sales Ledger module. You can run these reports anytime.
View Customer Statements
Use this enquiry routine to generate the Sales Ledger customer statement.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Enquiries > Customer Statement
To view customer statements:
1. Enter a Customer Code.
2. Enter the date for the transactions you want to display in the From Date field. Transactions before this date
are summarized in an opening balance. The full chronology displays if no date is entered.
3. Enter Yes in the Incl. Paid Invoices field to include paid invoices or No to include only open invoice
transactions.
3.2 115
4. Select By Invoice when the Menu dialog box displays to sort the report by invoice or select By Statement
to sort by statement.
Create A Balance Report
A balance list is a report of the Sales Ledger details specified for each customer; the ledger statistics are also
included in the balance list. You can specify the selection criteria to customize and print reports in the required
sort order. You can print three types of balance list report - Balance List Detailed, Balance List Compressed, and
Sales Ledger Summary.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reports/Statistics > Balance Report > Balance List Detailed
To create a detailed balance report:
1. Enter a Per Date range to include in the report.
2. Enter a date in the Curr. Rate Per Date field. The report will use the rates effective on that date.
3. Select ranges in the Customer Code, Category, and Salesman fields if necessary.
4. Select a PN Print Mode to include open invoices or invoices paid by promissory note.
5. Enter Yes or No, as appropriate, in the Include not billing Invoices,Include Suspended Slips,Include
Billing Slips, Print Statement Invoices, and With Paid Invoices fields. This defines what record types to
include in the report.
6. Enter Yes in the Summary/Customer field to include customer details. Enter No to only print booked
invoice details.
7. Define what invoice type to include in the report in the Invoices/Cred. Notes field. Enter C to only print
credit invoices, D to only print normal invoices, or * to print all invoices.
8. Enter Yes in the Calculate OB field to print year and period opening balances. This is only allowed when
the start date is within the current financial year.
9. Click Next.
10. Use the available fields to further refine the report by Account, Cost Center, and other parameters.
12. Select an option by which to sort.
13. Click OK.
14. Print and view the report.
Print A Compressed Balance List Report
Use the Balance List Compressed routine to create a compressed balance list report.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reports/Statistics > Balance Report > Balance List Compressed
To print a compressed balance list report:
116 3.2
2. Enter a date in the Curr. Rate Per Date field. The report uses the rates effective on that date.
5. Enter Yes or No, as appropriate, in the Include not billing Invoices, Include Suspended Slips, Include
Billing Slips, and Print Statement Invoices fields. This defines what record types to include in the report.
6. Define what invoice type to include in the report in the Invoices/Cred. Notes field. Enter C to only print
credit invoices, D to only print normal invoices, or * to print all invoices.
7. Click Next.
10. Select an option to sort by and click OK.
Create A Sales Ledger Summary Report
Use the Sales Ledger Summary routine to print a balance summary for the whole Sales Ledger.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reports/Statistics > Balance Report > Balance List Compressed
To create a Sales Ledger summary report:
2. Enter a date in the Curr. Rate Per Date field. The report uses the rates effective on that date.
5. Enter Yes or No, as appropriate, in the Include not billing Invoices, Include Suspended Slips, Include
Billing Slips, and Print Statement Invoices fields. This defines what record types to include in the report.
6. Define what invoice type to include in the report in the Invoices/Cred. Notes field. Enter C to only print credit
invoices, D to only print normal invoices, or * to print all invoices.
7. Click Next.
10. Select an option to sort by and click OK.
3.2 117
Print Statistics Reports
The Statistics folder includes a number of statistics reports.

• Customer Statistics A displays the turnover and gross profit for the specified customers and periods.
• Customer Statistics B prints the budget, turnover, discount or subsidy, and gross profit for the specified
customer and year.
• Payment Statistics shows the turnover, payment habit, effective interest, interest charged, number of
reminder notes sent, and credit code for the specified customers and in total. The statistics are for the current
statistical year.
• Bonus Report prints the turnover, percentage rate of the customer bonus and the total bonus over the year
for the specified customers and in total.
These reports have the same layout and fields. Complete the steps in this section to print a Customer Statistics
A report. Use the same steps to print other statistics reports.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reports/Statistics > Statistics > Customer Statistics A
To print a Customer Statistics A report:
1. Enter the number of the field to use as the selection criterion for the report in the Enter Selection number
field and press Enter . Each field on this screen has a number next to its name. For example, enter 1 to
select a Customer Code.
2. Select a Customer Code and press Enter. The cursor moves to the Enter Selection number field again.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add additional selection criteria to the report.
4. Click Next.
5. Use the CUSTOMER STATISTICS A – SELECTION CRITERIA screen to add more selection criteria to the
report as described in steps 1 and 2.
6. Click Next. The CUSTOMER STATISTICS A – SORT ORDER screen displays.
7. In the Select Sort field, enter the number of the field by which you want to sort the report and press Enter.
For example, enter 1 to sort by Customer Code.
8. The field you selected automatically displays a sorting number. If a field displays No. 1, the statistics are first
sorted by this field. The data is further sorted by No. 2, No. 3, and so on.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to add more fields by which to sort the report. Press Enter when you are done.
10. Select a Report Format.
11. Click OK.
12. Enter the File name for the report.
118 3.2
Print Tax Reports
You can print tax reports sorted by invoice, customer, customer total, tax code, and tax type, as well as a tax
summary. The following reports are available in the TAX Reports Customers folder:
• Sales Tax Summary
• Sales Tax Report/Invoice
• Sales Tax Report/Customer
• Sales Tax Report/Customer Total
• Sales Tax Report/Tax Code
• Sales TaxReport/TaxType
These reports have the same layout and fields. Use the steps in this section to print a sales tax report sorted by
invoice. Follow the same steps to print other tax reports.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reports/Statistics > TAX Reports Customers > Sales Tax Report/Invoice
To print a sales tax report by invoice:
1. Enter a transaction date range in the Trans. Date fields.
2. Enter an invoice date range in the Invoice Date fields.
4. Enter an Invoice No.
5. Enter TAX Codes.
6. Select a Country Code.
7. In the Export Cust. fields, enter the exports customer codes to include.
8. In the Tgt Currency field, select a target currency for the report.
9. Enter the report Date. This date must not be greater than the current date. Enter * to use the book entry
date for conversion factors.
10. Select a Sorting order option to define how to sort the report.
11. Select a Report Layout.
12. In the OK to Sort? field, enter Yes and press Enter.
13. . Preview and print the report.
Print an EC Sales List
This report shows amounts of goods and services supplied to customers located in the European Community
countries.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Reports/Statistics > TAX Reports Customers > EC Sales List > Print EC
Sales List
3.2 119
To print an EC sales list:
1. Enter a Report Layout option. Enter 0 to create a new layout or 1 to use an old layout.
2. Click Next. The EC SALES LIST screen displays.
3. Enter the Report Period. This should be a month or quarter.
5. Enter an invoice number range in the Invoice No. fields.
6. Enter a range of TAX Codes.
7. Select a Country Code and press Enter.
8. Click Yes to the OK to Sort? message.
9. Preview and print the report.
View Sales Ledger Summaries
Use this enquiry routine to generate a Sales Ledger summary, payment forecast, and ageing analysis for selected
customers. The payment forecast is for payments expected in the near future and is divided into the periods
defined in the Sales Ledger Period for Statements parameter (Statements and Interest option). The ageing analysis
divides unpaid invoice amounts into the specified periods.
Main Menu Path: Sales Ledger > Enquiries > Sales Ledger Summaries
To view Sales Ledger summaries:
1. Enter the Customer Code range.
2. Select the Category range if necessary.
3. Click Next.
4. View the Sales Ledger summary information that results from the search criteria by Ledger Values, Payment
Forecast, and Aging Analysis.
120 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Direct Invoicing
Chapter 5: Direct Invoicing
Direct Invoicing is an easy-to-use module that supports businesses that offer services such as advertising and consulting
services as well as businesses with a low quantity of common stock items. This module can also be used to record sales
outside normal business activities such as internal sales. Direct Invoicing supports different invoice lines. Text, stock
items, and specification lines can all display on an invoice. You can enter additional charges or discounts directly. When
you print and close an invoice, the Sales Ledger is updated with invoice details. Direct Invoicing also supports item
pricing and statistics. The Customer File in the Sales Ledger is used in the Direct Invoicing module. Direct Invoicing
maintains its own simple stock file that does not record on-hand balances. This should not be confused with the more
comprehensive stock file from the Stock Control module.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in order to use the Direct Invoicing functionality.
Only the main setup records are described here. Parts of the Operations section may also contain setup records
if they are required for a specific scenario.
You may also need to adjust parameters within Application Setup. Some modules have global settings you define
through this administration program. Review the application help for more information.
Activate Direct Invoicing In The Company File
Before you can use Direct Invoicing, make sure it is activated in the Company file.
Main Menu Path:System Utilities > Business Data Management > Company Setup
To activate Direct Invoicing:
1. Click Next to navigate to the 2 MODULE SELECTION screen.
2. Select the Direct Invoicing check box in the Module column. This activates the Direct Invoicing module in
your company.
Enter Currencies In The Currency File
If you work with foreign currencies, enter them in the currency file. You can work with up to 30 currencies within
each iScala company.
Main Menu Path:System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Currencies > Add/Change Currency Definition
To enter currencies:
1. In the Rates from field, enter the starting date when the currency is applied.
2. Click Next .
3. Enter the currency NAME. Use international three-letter codes.
4. Enter the CURRENCY_DESCRIPTION and press Enter.
3.2 121
Direct Invoicing Epicor iScala User Guide
Enter Currency Rates
After you enter currency definitions, enter current exchange rates.

MainMenu Path:System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Currencies > Enter CurrencyRates
To enter currency rates:
1. In the Rates from field, enter the starting date when the currency is applied.
2. Click Next .
3. Enter the currency NAME . Use international three-letter codes.
4. Enter the RATE_SELL and RATE_BUY values.
5. Click Next . The Report format dialog box displays.
6. Click Next . The Report format dialog box displays.
7. Click OK .
8. Enter the save path for your currency rates report.
9. Click Save .
10. Navigate to the location where you saved the report and view it for accuracy.
Enter A Tax Code
Use the Enter Tax routine to enter tax rates and associated information. You can enter up to 100 tax codes.
Main Menu Path:System Utilities > Miscellaneous > Tax Setup > Standard Tax Engine Setup > Enter Tax
Codes
To enter tax codes:
1. Select a Language Code .
2. Enter a TAX Code, TAX Name, and Description .
3. Enter a Rate Rule code that reflects Origin/Destination combinations used in this tax code.
4. Use the TAX Rate [%] field to specify the percentage rate for this tax code.
5. In the Deductible [%] field, enter the deductible tax percentage. This is for input tax only.
6. Define the TAX Rule. Enter 0 to use the tax rate effective at the time of transaction creation. Enter 1 to
recalculate the tax using the current tax rate.
7. Enter the TAX Macro column (a value between 1 and 9 or A and Z ) to use for this tax code. This is only
used for some country-specific tax reports. Enter 0 to indicate no tax macro should be used.
8. Use the Tax override [Y/N] field to indicate whether you can override this tax code on individual order
lines.
122 3.2
9. In the Account No TAX Output field, enter the nominal account to use for outgoing taxes in sales
transactions.
10. Use the Account No TAX Input field to specify the nominal account to use for incoming taxes in purchase
transactions.
11. Use the Tax Accrual Output and Tax Accrual Input fields respectively to enter account numbers for
outgoing and incoming accrual tax during tax note registration.
Enter Parameters
Use the Parameters routine to define how the Direct Invoicing module should work for your company.
Main Menu Path:Direct Invoicing > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
To enter direct invoicing parameters:
1. Enter the Next Invoice Number . This is used as the first sequential number for invoices.
2. Enter the Next Credit Note Number . This is used as the first credit note number in the series.
3. Specify the Next Internal Invoice Number . This is used as the first number for internal invoices.
4. Use the No. of Invoice Copies field to define how many copies of the original invoice or credit note to
print.
5. Enter the Normal TAX Code . For stock items on invoices, the application uses the default tax code specified
on the stock item or customer record. The tax code you enter here is used for non-stock items or services
and for items and customers where no tax code is defined.
6. Specify the Normal Auto Accounting Code . Enter a value between 00 and 99 to use for order line entries
in invoices or credit notes. This number determines to which account the revenue posts.
7. Enter the Invoicing Fee . This is only applicable if an invoice fee is indicated on the customer record in the
Sales Ledger.
8. Use the Length of Stock Code field to define the number of characters allowed for direct invoicing stock
codes. Enter a value between 2 and 22 . The stock code length affects the invoice line format.
9. Use the Other Extra Tax fields to enter taxes such as advertising tax, insurance tax, and so on. These are
entered as a percentage of the selling price.
10. In the Prices incl. TAX field, define whether the prices on the price list already include taxes. If taxes are
not included, the application adds them to the prices based on the values you enter in this routine.
11. Specify the No. of Decimals in Quantity . Enter a value between 0 and 5 .
12. Enter the Average Gross Profit % . This is used for non-stock items only to update the customer's gross
profit in the Sales Ledger.
13. In the Currency from customer field, define where the order currency originates. Enter Y to use the
customer currency or N to use the price list currency.
14. Use the Save Invoice History field to define whether the application should save the invoice history.
3.2 123
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the Direct Invoicing module. Each operation is
represented as a scenario to help you go through the process from start to finish. If a setup record is required
for the operation, it is also described in the section.
Stock
Use the Stock module in Direct Invoicing to process stock items and create price lists. Stock codes can contain
up to 20 characters and depend on the type, category, and quantity of stock you are processing. Set up the stock
code length in the Parameters file. Pay special attention to the stock file since it can be time-consuming to change
a stock item after you save it.
Also carefully consider how to use the different accounting codes, where the General Ledger is integrated, and
how to use the different accounting dimensions, including the accounts to which you post sales and purchases.
Enter a Price List
In Direct Invoicing, you can work with multiple stock price lists. You specify a price list for each stock item. Price
list 00 is the default.
Main Menu Path:Direct Invoicing > Stock Items > Enter Price Lists
To enter a price list:
1. Enter the Stock Code for which you want to define a price list.
2. Select a Price List .
3. Enter the stock item Price . This price is automatically recorded into the price list you selected.
Recalculate a Price List
Use the Recalculate Price List routine to change prices in existing price lists.
Main Menu Path:Direct Invoicing > Stock Items > Recalculate Price List
To change prices:
1. In the Stock Code fields, select the stock item or stock item range for which to change the price list.
2. Specify the Category or category range for the selected stock items.
3. Enter the Source price list and Target price list.
4. Enter the Date for currency rate . The application uses this currency rate to recalculate list prices.
5. Click Next .
6. Enter the Conversion Factor by which the original price is increased. For example, enter 1.25 to increase
the price by 25% or enter 0.9 to reduce the price by 10%. Enter 1.0 to round the price. If you enter 1.0,
specify the rounding rules in the fields below.
124 3.2
7. In the Rounding fields, specify how the price is rounded within each price interval. Enter 0 if you do not
want to round the price.
8. Use the Save calculated Price as New field to define whether to save the recalculated prices in the price
list file. If you enter No , the new prices will only print on the list.
9. Click Next .
10. In the Report format dialog box, select the Report Format.
11. Click OK .
12. In the Save As dialog box, enter the File name.
13. Click Save . The report saves to the location you selected and opens automatically. The report displays the
stock item prices you recalculated. You can view or print the report.
Delete A Stock Item
When your company no longer needs a stock item, you can delete it from the file.
Main Menu Path:Direct Invoicing > Stock Items > Delete Stock Item
To delete a stock item:
1. Select the Stock Code to delete.
2. Click Yes to the OK to Delete? message.
3.
Invoices
To enter an invoice, first create a header and define parameters for the entire invoice. Then enter stock lines.
After you print the invoice, you can close it so it can be posted to the Sales Ledger.
Enter An Invoice Header
Use the Enter/Enquire Invoices routine to enter invoice headers and lines.
To define an invoice header:
1. Enter an Invoice number or select an existing one. To use an existing invoice number, press Enter. The first
available invoice number set in the Parameters file defaults. To use a new invoice number, enter it manually
in the field and click Yes to the confirmation message.
2. In the Cust. No field, enter a customer number.
3. Enter the Book Entry Date .
4. Use the Our Ref field to enter any text or note to display on the invoice.
3.2 125
5. Use the Yr. Ref field to enter any required customer reference to display on the invoice.
6. In the Pay Trm field, enter the pay term to use for this invoice.
7. Use the Pri. Li field to enter a price list for the invoice.
8. Enter the sales person in the Salesmn field.
9. Enter the language to use on the invoice in the Lang. field.
10. Use the Automatic Acc. Code field to specify the automatic accounting code.
11. Click Next .
12. Use the ACCOUNTING DIMENSIONS – INVOICE HEAD screen to define where to post the invoice.
13. Click Next .
Enter Invoice Lines
Once the invoice header information is defined, you are ready to enter invoice lines.
To enter invoice lines:
1. Select a stock code for the invoice line in the TEXT field.
2. Enter the required quantity in the QTY field.
3. Enter the PRICE .
4. Use the A field to specify the accounting code, if necessary, or accept the default value.
5. In the V field, enter the tax code. The tax code defined on the stock item displays.
6. In the T field, enter the product tax for the line.
7. Enter a discount as a percentage in the DIS field if applicable.
8. Click Next .
Repeat these steps to enter other invoice lines.
Now you can enter discount and freight parameters for the invoice.
Enter Invoice Parameters
You can enter discount and freight parameters for the invoice.
To enter invoice parameters:
1. Enter the invoice DISCOUNT as a percentage.
2. Enter the INVOICE FEE .
3. Enter the FREIGHT charge.
126 3.2
4. Select Yes or No in the INTEREST BLOCKED field. If you select No, penalty interest is calculated if the
invoice payment is late.
5. Enter the INTEREST RATE as a percentage.
Print and Close Invoices and Credit Notes
After you print invoices, you can close them so you can post the transactions to the Sales Ledger.
Main Menu Path:Direct Invoicing > Print Invoices/Credit Notes
To print an invoice:
1. In the Select Option dialog box, select 1. Print Invoices/Credit Notes .
2. Enter the Invoice Number to print or select an invoice number range.
3. Enter the Language Code to use.
4. Enter the Document Code to use and press Enter.
5. In the Report format dialog box, select the Report Format .
6. Click OK .
7. In the Save As dialog box, enter the File name .
8. Click Save . The invoice saves to the location you specified and opens automatically. You can view or print
the invoice.
Close An Invoice
To close an invoice:
1. In the Select option dialog box, select 2. Close Invoices/ Credit Notes .
2. Enter an Invoice Number or select an invoice range.
3. Click Next .
3.2 127
Reports and Enquiries
This section describes routines and enquiries for the Direct Invoicing module
Enquire The Stock File
Use this routine to find stock item information. This information is partly retrieved from the Direct Invoicing stock
file and partly from statistical values for the stock item. The statistics are in the original currency.
Main Menu Path:Direct Invoicing > Enquire Stock Items
To find stock item information:
1. Enter the Stock Code .
2. View the information that displays in the available fields.
128 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Accounting
Chapter 6: Accounting
Accounting is handled in the General Ledger. The General Ledger is a fully functional accounting system featuring a
multi-dimensional, multi-currency environment for all businesses requirements. The multi-dimensional aspect allows
reporting of grouped information by several different methods. Optional modules such as Consolidation and Promissory
Notes provide more functionality if required.
The iScala accounting string is made up of all dimensions and can be a maximum of 120 characters. It is very important
to agree upon a dimension structure with the chief accountant as it affects other routines such as customer codes,
stock items, suppliers, and applies to order lines in the sales and purchase order modules. This chapter contains
information on how to enter, change, or delete Accounting Dimensions. The process of setting up an accounting string
is described in Chapter 2: Application Setup, which explores company and module setup.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the General Ledger module. Only the main
setup records are described here. Some parts of the Operation sections may also contain setup records if they
are required for a specific scenario.
define through this administration program. Review the application help for more information.
Chart Of Accounts And Currencies
Before you use the General Ledger, you first need to add specific entries in the accounting dimensions that were
previously defined in System Utilities; for example, accounts, cost centers, products, projects, and so on. To set
up these entries, use the routines described in this section.
Enter Or Change An Accounting Dimension Entry
The Chart of Accounts can be manually set or edited along with the other accounting dimensions. When you
select the Enter/Change Accounting Dimensions routine, a list of existing accounting dimensions displays. An
example of a company's accounting dimensions displays below.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Chart of Accounts/Enquiries > Chart of Accounts > Enter/Change
Accounting Dimension
To enter or change an accounting dimension entry:
1. In the ACCOUNTING DIMENSIONS window, select Account.
2. Click OK.
3. Enter a new Account. The default value of the account type depends on the first digits of the account
number; however, the type can be manually adjusted.
3.2 129
Accounting Epicor iScala User Guide
Note Account codes 1-50 preceded by letters A-J are reserved for automatic allocations. If you enter
such an account code and the automatic allocation with this number exists, a warning message
displays.
The accounting code string in the System Utilities module controls the maximum number of characters per
account number. The alphanumeric accounts parameter defines whether account numbers can be
alphanumeric. You can use any account number as long as it adheres to the rules.
4. Enter or edit the Account Name which will serve as a description of the account. The account name prints
on reports and displays on application screens.
5. Specify the account Type. The following types are available:
Account Type Description

B Balance sheet account
P Profit and loss account
Z Statistical account, which can be used as currency
accounts at the bank
Transactions do not need to be balanced. If you select type Z (for statistical account), you are prompted to
enter the Number of Decimals and Transfer Opening Balance information for the account.
6. In the Inactive field, enter the account status.
7. Assign an Automatic Allocation No. to run one of 99 preset allocation routines that distribute cost and
revenue between prescribed accounts.
Numbers 1 through 50 are activated immediately on any transaction entry and numbers 51 through 99 are
used for periodic allocations. See the section Entering Automatic Allocations in application help for more
details. Enter 0 if you do not require automatic allocation. Press F4 to display a list of automatic allocations.
8. Optionally, define a Special function - additional functions that can be linked to this account. Special
functions do not work for automatic allocations.
9. Enter the Description of the account. This text will display on the printout of the Chart of Accounts and
on enquires.
10. Enter the External Report Code to use for exporting accounting data and for queries.
11. Enter the User Group that can run queries on transactions posted to this account and press Enter to move
to the next screen.
12. Define options for further analysis of the additional accounting dimensions when posting to this account
code. Options include:
Account Code Description

0 should not be used
1 mandatory
2 optional
130 3.2
13. Enter a Default code for other dimensions, if required. For example, you may establish a link between this
account and a cost center. The default value is proposed on transaction entry. When finished, press Enter
and return to the main menu.
Delete Dimension Entries
You can only delete entries with no transactions. The opening balance, debit, and credit fields must be zero.
To delete an entry with transactions, first enter an amount to zero the balance. After an update from the General
Ledger daybook journal is run, you can delete the entry in the next financial year.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Chart of Accounts/Enquiries > Chart of Accounts > Delete Accounting
Dimension
To delete dimensional entries:
1. Select the required dimension option from the Accounting Dimensions window.
2. . Enter the Code to delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm deletion.
Modify Chart Of Accounts Headings
The chart of accounts can have up to three account groups. The number of account groups and their length are
controlled by the General Ledger parameters. The code number for the group (or sub-group) starts with the code
number of the preceding group and must comply with the corresponding group length set in the parameters.
Account group descriptions display in the chart of account headings in relevant reports.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Chart of Accounts Headings
To modify chart of accounts headings:
1. Select the required Language from the list.
2. Enter a new Account Group code 1.
3. Enter or edit a Description for the account group. This description is printed in some reports.
4. Select the Default Account Type for account group 1. This account type is used in the Entering Accounts
and Importing Accounting Dimensions routines.
Note The Default Account Type value is considered when you define the account default value Type.
For more details, review the previous Enter or Change an Accounting Dimension Entry section.
5. If required, enter the codes for the remaining account groups in the Account Group code 2 and Description
(and, if required, in Account Group code 3) fields.
3.2 131
The Currency File
The application is a multi-currency transaction-based system. This system is common for all modules. You can
work with multiple currencies within each company and choose to use either the 01 company currency file or
individual currency files for each additional company.
Enter Exchange Rates
Use this routine to enter or adjust currency exchange rates for a specified date.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Miscellaneous > Currency File > Enter Currency Rates
To enter exchange rates:
1. Enter the Rates from date or accept the system default date.
2. Currency Name and Currency Type are displayed in the NAME and TYPE columns, respectively, as defined
in the company currency definitions and cannot be adjusted.
3. Enter the number of DEC IMAL places to round off the currency calculation results.
4. The DEC P, DEC C, and DEC S fields define the number of decimals for the purchase unit price, unit cost,
and sell unit price for the currency. You can define these values for every currency. The general purpose of
these fields is to improve price and cost accuracy.
5. Specify the value the MIN IMUM COIN, or minor currency unit, represents for this currency.
6. In the UNIT field, enter the coefficient to be used as a multiplier or divider (depending on the setting of the
O field) for exchange rate calculations.
7. Use the O field to define whether the rate is multiplied or divided by the coefficient, entered in the
corresponding Unit field.
8. Enter the RATE SELL and RATE BUY values based on the Units and Operator (Unit and O) columns settings.
9. Enter Effective rates for all currencies required.
10. Press Enter or Page Down to the end of the screen to post the rates and print out confirmation of entry.
Enquire Currency Rates
Use this option to enquire currency exchange rates for a specified date.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Miscellaneous > Currency File > Enquire Currency Rates
To enquire currency rates:
1. Enter the Rates from date or accept the system default date. Press F4 or click ? to view exchange rate dates
history.
2. The information on currency rates displays, but cannot be adjusted.
132 3.2
Use Special Function 10 to Link a Foreign Currency Statistical Account to the Chart of
Accounts
You can link foreign currency statistical accounts to the corresponding base currency account within the chart
of accounts using special function 10. This allows simultaneous entry of the transaction in its own currency into
the statistical account as well as conversion to the system base currency and entry into the linked General Ledger
account using the prevalent exchange rate from the currency file.
With Special Function 10, transactions are posted directly into the Statistical Account in their foreign currency
amount. The transaction is also converted into the bookkeeping currency and posted into the corresponding
Balance Sheet account (the General Ledger base currency account selected in the Account field). The conversion
is made using the appropriate rate from the company or system Currency File. A revaluation of the balance of
the Statistical account can then be performed periodically and the balance on the base currency account adjusted
by posting a revaluation transaction either to that account or an identified accrual account.
Note
Statistical Accounts in the system are not part of the Balance Sheet or Profit & Loss account of a company;
rather, they act as an addendum to the Trial Balance. The advantage of using Statistical accounts for foreign
currency bank accounts is that the balance of the account can be easily displayed in the original currency.
This also supports revaluation of the Balance Sheet amount.
Revaluation of the Balance Sheet amount associated with a Statistical Foreign Currency Bank Account (using
Special Function 10) is done in the Revaluate Currency Accounts routine.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Chart of Accounts/Enquiries > Chart of Accounts > Enter/Charge
Accounting Dimension
To use special function 10 to link a foreign currency statistical account to the chart of accounts:
1. When the ACCOUNTING DIMENSIONS window displays, select Account and click OK.
2. Enter a new foreign currency Account, or press F4 or click ? to select an existing foreign currency account.
3. Enter or edit the account Name of the foreign currency account.
4. In the account Type field, enter Z for statistical accounts. The statistical account screen displays. One this
screen, define the No of Decimals and whether to Transfer Opening Balance.
5. Enter 0 (for active account) in the Inactive field.
6. Assign an Automatic Allocation No. to run one of 99 preset allocation routines that distribute cost and
revenue between prescribed accounts.
7. Press F4 to select function 10 from a list of additional Special functions. When you press Enter, a new
screen displays.
8. On the Function Parameters screen, enter the General Ledger base currency account to which you want
to link in the Account field.
9. Press F4 to select the required, predefined Currency Code from the Currency File.
10. Select the Revaluation Method. Available options include no valuation, post only losses, post both profits
and losses, or post only profits.
11. Optionally, in the Profit Account and Loss Account fields, define the General Ledger accounts in which
to post the converted base currency gains and losses.
3.2 133
12. If an Accrual Account is entered, the accrual account is used as the contra account to the currency gain/loss
account when the General Ledger base currency account (selected in the Account field) is revalued. If no
accrual account is entered, the currency gain/loss is posted directly against the General Ledger base currency
account.
13. Define the Rate for Debit and Rate for Credit.
14. In the Alternative Currency? field, select No. Alternative Currency supports multi-currency bank accounts.
If you select Yes, you are prompted for the currency of the transaction. Press Enter to return to the first
screen.
15. Enter the Description of the account. This text will display on the printout of the Chart of Accounts and
on enquires.
16. Enter the External Report Code to use for exporting accounting data and for queries.
17. Enter the User Group that can run queries on transactions posted to this account and press Enter to move
to the next screen.
Cashbooks
The cashbook links one or more General Ledger accounts to a specific cashbook code. When a transaction is
posted via General Ledger journals to a linked account, the transaction is also recorded against the cashbook
code. Within the cashbook, the status of these transactions can be amended during the Bank Reconciliation
routine from Opened to Reconciled. Using the Enquire Cashbook routine, the system will then mask all transactions
that have been reconciled leaving only the transactions that have not cleared the bank.
Create Cashbook Accounts
Use this routine to create the cashbooks you need.

Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Cash-Books > Cashbooks Accounts/Codes
To create cashbook accounts:
1. When the Select Option window displays, select Enter Cash Book Codes.
2. Enter the predefined Cash Book Code to which the Account Code is to be linked. This code is used to mark
transactions which are to be reconciled against a bank account.
3. Optionally, enter a Name and Description.
4. Define the Clearing Account for this cashbook. If a clearing account is not defined, a warning message
displays. You can, however, create the cashbook with an unassigned reconciliation account. If you choose
to do this, General Ledger transactions are not created and only the amounts are posted to the cashbook.
5. Accept the Next Transaction No.and press Esc to return to the menu.
134 3.2
Reconcile Cashbooks
Use this routine to reconcile transactions in your cashbooks with external reports such as account statements
from the bank.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Cash-Books > Reconcile Cashbooks
To reconcile cashbooks:
1. Select the Cash-Book Code to reconcile.
2. Enter the Reconciliation Date.
3. Specify the Book Entry Date.
4. Select Yes in the Include Reconciled Items field to display all transactions (including previously reconciled
transactions), or No to exclude them.
5. Set the bank statement Total Debit figure. This amount will be shown at the foot of the reconciliation
screen together with the reconciled amount.
6. Enter the bank statement Total Credit figure.
7. When all required fields are defined, the next screen displays all transactions available. Move the cursor and
press Enter to open the supporting screen for each transaction. Change the status to Reconciled for
transactions seen on the bank statement and then press Esc to exit the routine. Debit and credit balance
differences should be zero.
8. Click Yes to allow entry to the next cashbook or press Esc to return to the menu.
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the General Ledger module. Each operation is
represented as a scenario to help you go through the process from start to finish. If some setup is required for
the operation, it is also described in the section.
General Ledger Transactions
Transactions can be booked directly into the General Ledger. Through the Enter Transactions routine, you can
also access a number of other features such as creating/modifying Accounts and Dimensions, reversing transactions,
booking of accruals, making entries directly with Sales or Purchase Ledger, booking inter-company transactions,
tax transactions, currency transactions, and so on.
Enter Transactions
Use this routine to enter transaction lines. There is no limit to the number of lines a transaction can have.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Transactions > Enter Transactions
To enter transactions:
1. Enter a Journal Code when prompted if required.
3.2 135
Note Single or multiple transactions can be entered in a single journal. Unbalanced transaction
journals are blocked for update. The system warns of any difference if you attempt a posting.
2. If the Automatic Transaction Numbering parameter in the General Ledger parameters is set to Yes, the
Transaction No displays automatically and you cannot change it. Otherwise, you can enter the transaction
number manually in these ways:
• Enter any transaction number.
• Press Enter. The next number in the regular transaction number counter is used.
• Press a letter key, A to Z. The first available number in the extra transaction number counter will be used
(the number is preceded by the letter from the counter).
3. Enter the Book Entry Date or press F6 to set today's date.
4. Enter the General Ledger ACC OUNT.
5. If dimension information is required to support further analysis, enter the appropriate dimension code.
6. Enter the line AMOUNT, debit or credit.
7. Type the Transaction TEXT. You can also use pre-defined Default Phrases (set up in General Ledger
Parameters). Press Enter to go to the next Transaction Line and enter new transaction lines information.
8. On the last Transaction Line, enter the Amount which balances the transaction or press Enter to automatically
balance credit and debit amounts. Then press Enter to validate the transaction.
The top right hand field indicates the current balance of the transaction journal. The amount in this field
must be zero in order to validate the transaction.
Enter Bank Transactions
Use this routine to enter transactions with control of the balance from the corresponding bank account.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Transactions > Enter Bank Transactions
To enter bank transactions:
1. Select the Journal Code.
2. The booked value on the linked bank account (via the journal code) displays as the Beginning Balance of
the transaction.
3. Enter the End Balance on the Statement.
4. Notice the system calculates the difference between the beginning and ending balances. After entering the
Book Entry Date, the system automatically displays the Bank Account and the difference.
5. Enter the different movements that affected your Bank. To book payments coming from Purchase or Sales
Ledger, enter PL or SL, respectively.
6. When the transactions balance, press Enter to update. Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable are
updated. Accounting transactions are created and posted in journals.
136 3.2
Enter Check Payments
Use the cheque printing feature when you make payments (to employees or suppliers) directly from the General
Ledger module. The system can generate checks in a pre-defined format. You can have up to 10 different check
layouts to accommodate different banks' requirements.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Transactions > Enter & Print checks > Enter checks
To enter check payments:
1. Enter the Suppl ier Code.
2. Define the supplier Invoice No.
3. Select a Document layout.
4. Enter any Spec ification for this cheque.
5. Enter the Curr ency Code and Payment Date.
6. Enter the Currency Cheque Amount and Invoice Amount, including the currency base.
7. Enter the Expense ACC OUNT and dimension codes, if applicable.
8. Validate the AMOUNT and enter a TEXT.
9. Press Enter to save the transaction and exit.
Print Checks
Use this routine to print checks for previously entered payments.

Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Transactions > Enter & Print checks > Print & Update checks
To print checks:
1. . In the Select Option menu, select Cheque Printing.
2. In the Reference No fields to the left and to the right, enter reference numbers for the first and the last
checks to be printed.
3. Select the Report Format; then, optionally, use the Printer setup and the Page setup buttons to adjust
the report. Click OK.
4. Press Esc to exit the report.
Modify or Update General Ledger Transactions
This section describes the process of printing and updating transactions that are posted to the General Ledger.
This is an important feature of the system as it ensures the accuracy and consistency of information posted to
the General Ledger. Once transactions are updated, you no longer have access for modification. The routine
updates the account balances and affects any report printed from the General Ledger.
No user can enter General Ledger transactions when modifying transactions
3.2 137
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Transactions > Print DayBook Journal
To modify or update General Ledger transactions:
1. When prompted with the question to adjust existing transactions, click Yes.
2. Enter the Transaction Number you need to adjust.
3. Select a transaction from the displayed list.
4. Modify the transaction; that is, Book Entry Date, Account, Dimension Codes, Amounts, and Transaction
Text.
5. After all changes, press Enter to validate changes. Then, click Cancel in the window that displays or go
back to the Printing and Updating processes.
6. To print transactions for a specific user, enter the User Code or press F4 to list all users. Leave this field
blank if no user selection is required.
7. Press Enter to print to the specified Output channel.
8. Select whether to reprint the Day Book Journal or proceed with the update process.
9. Update the General Ledger with the transactions printed above by selecting Yes to start the updating
program and selecting No if further changes are required.
10. Confirm by clicking Yes.
Consolidation
The Consolidation module is used for three purposes, each of which can be run separately or simultaneously:
• Converting a Chart of Accounts from one company to another.
• Converting the base General Ledger Currency from one company to another.
• Aggregating General Ledgers of several companies into one 'consolidated' company.
Two main routines are used:
• Continuous Consolidation runs continuously for the transaction.
• Periodic Consolidation runs periodically on balances.
The system database must include multiple companies with the General Ledger module installed in each company.
Enable Consolidation
The consolidated (or Target) company must be enabled for consolidation.

Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Business Data Management > Company Setup
To enable consolidation:
1. Enter Yes in the Consolidation field.
2. Complete other fields as required. Click on Next through all entry screens.
138 3.2
Convert a Chart of Accounts
Each Account from a Source company can be mapped to an account of a Target company. It is possible to map
several Source accounts to the same Target account. The reverse is not possible.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Optional Modules > Consolidation > Convert Chart of Accounts
To convert a chart of accounts:
1. Enter the Target Company and Source Company codes.
2. Select the Account Code of the Source Company.
3. Define the Translated to Account Code of the Target Company.
4. Specify the Conversion Currency to use, if any. Review the next Convert Currency section for more details.
5. Enter a Remark if required, and then press Enter to begin mapping the next account.
Convert Currency
Use this routine to enter the exchange rate to be used when you transfer data to the accounts in the target
company. You may enter an exchange rate for every book entry period and for an opening balance. You can
enter tables for currency conversion for any company. In periodic consolidation (for financial years and companies),
the target company's table for currency conversion is used. In continuous consolidation, the source company's
table is used.
convert currency
Main Menu Path: General Ledger> Optional Modules> Consolidation > Tables for Currency Conversion
You can enter exchange rates individually for specific accounts, or generally for all profit and loss, balance sheet,
and statistical accounts. Here's how:
1. Enter the Company Code. In periodic consolidation, the target company's table for currency conversion is
used. In continuous consolidation, the source company's table is used.
2. Enter the Acc ount No/Type: B for balance sheet account, P for profit and loss account, and Z for
For periodic consolidation, balance sheet accounts are usually converted at the exchange rate on the last
closing day of the period. Profit and loss accounts are usually converted at the monthly average exchange
rate. The exchange rate for statistical accounts depends on what the account is used for (if they are not
included in consolidation, enter zero for all periods). These rules can differ depending on Company policy.
3. Enter the Exchange Rate to which the accounts or account types are to be converted for each period. You
can enter exchange rates for CURRENT YEAR, BUDGET, and PREVIOUS year.
Enable Periodic Consolidation
The Consolidate Companies routine combines several companies to a new common company.
Note If the chart of accounts between the source and the consolidated company are different, review the
Convert a Chart of Accounts section. If the currency of the consolidated company is different from the
currency of the source company (or companies), review the Convert Currency section.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger> Optional Modules> Consolidation > Consolidate Companies
3.2 139
To enable periodic consolidation:
1. Enter the COMPANY/CLIENT Code of the source company (or companies).
2. Optionally, specify a Conversion FACTOR.
3. Enter the Target COMPANY/CLIENT code.
4. Choose to clear the General Ledger Zero before Consolidation. If not, there is a risk of duplicating values
from a previous consolidation session.
5. Select whether to Keep Account Schedule? or not. If not, the chart of accounts of the source company
overwrites the chart of accounts of the target company.
6. Define whether you want to consolidate accounting dimensions. Dimensions 1-3 are available for periodic
consolidation. Alternatively, you can enter F to have the Source Company Code as a repeat entry in one of
the dimensions.
7. Set Consolidation criteria, such as data to be consolidated, and whether transactions should be created in
the target company or update Accounts Balance only.
8. Press Enter or click OK to validate the criteria and start the routine.
Enable Continuous Consolidation
You can use Continuous Consolidation to simultaneously post transactions in up to six currencies and in up to
six target companies' General Ledgers. The source company's transactions are recalculated and posted one by
one to the target company or companies when the daybook is printed and the General Ledger is updated. The
target company's General Ledger must be manually updated. The benefit of using Continuous Consolidation is
the ability to run General Ledger reports anytime during the period as well as keeping historical rates if the
consolidated company is in a different currency.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger> Optional Modules >Consolidation >Continuous Consolidation
To enable continuous consolidation:
1. Enter the C ompany C ode of the target company. One source company can have up to 10 target companies.
2. Identify which Currency Conversion should be used (if any):

• t - continuous consolidation is based on the Tables for Currency Conversion.
• xx - continuous consolidation is based on the rate of currency xx (1-30).
Note Transactions in the process of being moved from one company to another in continuous
consolidation can have three stamps: Date Stamp, Exchange Rate Stamp, and Amount Stamp. One
of the currency codes (1 to 30) in the currency table of System Utilities must be used. The stamp is
placed in the text field of the coding string when you enter transactions in transaction entry.
3. Specify how the invoice currency rate should be handled. If you enter Yes, the invoice transaction amount
in the accounting currency is consolidated to the target company using the currency xx selling rate specified
in the currency file for the invoice book entry date. If you enter No, the invoice transaction amount in the
accounting currency is re-converted to the invoice currency using the exchange rate specified when entering
the invoice.
140 3.2
Revaluation
The system has the ability to revaluate the currency accounts.
Revaluate Currency Accounts
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Miscellaneous > Special Utilities > Revaluate Currency Accounts
To revaluate currency accounts:
1. When the Options window displays, select Revaluation.
2. In the Including Period field, enter the period for which you want to calculate the currency account
valuation.
3. Enter the Curr ency Date. The exchange rates on this date are used for revaluation.
4. If you request updating, enter the Book-Entry Date of the transaction where you want to adjust the balance
of the currency accounts (only used if you request updating).
Epicor does not recommend you enter a date within the closing accounting period.
5. Enter a Transaction Text for the transaction lines (only used if you request updating).
6. You can include accounts from the Sales Ledger and Purchase Ledger modules in the revaluation. Use the
Incl. Sal. Ledger and Incl. Pur. Ledger fields to define if the ledgers are to be revaluated.
7. Enter the Currency Code interval for revaluation.
8. Enter an interval of Currency Account s to be included in revaluation.
9. If you select Yes in the Reverse Transaction field, a revaluation transaction is created together with a
reversal transaction. If No is selected, a revaluation transaction is created without a reversal.
10. Enter Yes in the Use Accrual Account field if you want to book revaluation to the accrual account. Enter
No if you want revaluation to be booked to the normal currency account.
11. Use the Book Entry Date Reversal field to enter the date when the reversal transaction is to be booked.
Normally revaluation is done at the end of the period process, with the reversal transaction scheduled for
the first day of the following period.
12. Enter Yes in the Update field to create a transaction with the correct exchange rate differences and to save
it in the Day Book Transaction file. If you enter No, there will be no update. The difference is printed in the
report.
3.2 141
balances available in the General Ledger. You can run these reports whenever you need.
General Ledger Enquiries
The application provides comprehensive on-screen enquiry by search on Account Code and other dimensions
(Enquire General Ledger); by individual transactions (Enquire Transaction); or by multiple transactions (Enquire
Transaction Lines).
Enquire Transaction Lines
Use the Enquire Transaction Lines routine to view individual transaction lines. You can use several different
selection criteria. Transaction lines are divided into coloumns for transaction number, book entry date, other
accounting dimensions, amount, reporting level, and opening balance. In addition, you can choose between
columns for transaction text, contra account, or balance
This routine marks all reversed transactions and transactions created as a result of a reversal with special signs
according to the table.
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Chart of Accounts/Enquiries > Enquire General Ledger > Enquire
Transaction Lines
To enquire the General Ledger:
1. Select the search criteria. The search criteria include ranges for Book-Entry Date, Transaction Number,
Account Code, Amount, and so on.
2. Define options to Include Reporting Trans actions and to Calculate O pening B alances or to include
Closing Period Treatments.
3. Enter Yes in the Show stock transactions field to print details about source stock transactions, if necessary.
4. When prompted, select the sort order from Account, Book Entry, or Transaction Number.
5. A list of transaction lines displays in the Enquiry Transaction Lines window. Select a transaction, and then
press Enter to view the subsequent transaction lines.
General Ledger Reports
Various General Ledger reports are available in the Standard Reports folder. These reports include information
on accounts schedules (actual, opening balance, and budget), tax reports, and transaction reports.
Other customized reports can be generated in the Report Generator as required. See the application help for
more details.
142 3.2
Promissory Notes
If you have the Promissory Notes module, then a company can make and receive payments by means of promissory
notes. There is also automation available to make operational proposals based on the date information of the
notes. The module links to the General Ledger and also to the Sales and Purchase Ledgers.
To make new customers or suppliers available in the Promissory Notes module, the module must be updated
from its set up menu. If the Promissory Notes module is installed and integrated with Sales Ledger (Promissory
Notes > Miscellaneous > Setup > Enter/Adjust Parameters., Switches option, Integrated with SL field) and Purchase
Ledger (Promissory Notes > Miscellaneous > Parameters > Enter/Adjust Parameters, Switches option, Integrated
with PL field), you have the option to automatically update the Promissory Notes partner file (Promissory Notes
- Miscellaneous - Partner File) with new or changed customer and supplier information after entering or adjusting
customer and supplier details.
Enter Payments (Receivable)
Use this routine to enter payments received from customers.

Note Entering Promissory Notes payable is a similar procedure.
Main Menu Path: Promissory Notes > Promissory Notes Receivable > Invoices Payment
To enter payments:
1. Specify the book entry date in the BEDATE field or press F6 to enter today's date.
2. Enter PN to access the promissory notes entry screen.
3. Enter the required operation number in the OP field. Once the operation has been selected, the operation
name displays in the Current operation field at the top of the screen.
4. Enter the type of partner who is cashing the relevant Promissory Note/Post Dated Cheque in the T_ENDORSEE
field. If no Endorsee is required; that is, the operation is acceptance to a portfolio, press Enter to move to
the next field. If the Endorsee is your company, leave this field blank.
5. Enter the type of partner who has endorsed the relevant Promissory Note/Post Dated Cheque in the
T_ENDORSER field.
6. In the TY_NUMBER field, enter the type of Promissory Note/Post Dated Cheque; for example, whether your
Promissory Note/Cheque is payable or receivable. If the entry runs counter to the selected operation code,
you are prompted to enter the appropriate type.
7. Enter the DUE DATE for the relevant Promissory Note/Post Dated Cheque.
8. If the portfolio's Promissory Notes/cheques are handled, the CUR RENCY of the relevant Promissory
Note/Cheque automatically displays. If the Promissory Note/Cheque is being issued, the default currency is
that of the company. Otherwise, you must define the currency manually in the Promissory Notes/Post Dated
checks Entry routine.
9. Notice the Promissory Note/Post Dated Cheque face AMOUNT is inserted automatically.
10. To confirm the payment, press Enter in the empty field.
3.2 143
Use Operational Proposals
Use this routine to automatically generate a proposal for due notes.

Main Menu Path: Promissory Notes > Operational Proposal
To create an automatic proposal:
1. In the Select Option window, select Create Proposal.
2. Define for which Notes Type you want to automate a proposal. Enter R for receivables or P for payables.
3. Enter the sorting criteria; for example, Due Date.
Use a Transaction Enquiry
Use this routine to gather information on promissory note transactions.

To use a transaction enquiry:
1. Set the Book Entry Date interval for which transactions are to be included in the printout.
2. Select the Promissory Note/Post Dated Cheque Internal Number interval for which transactions are to be
included in the printout.
3. In the Partner Code field, enter the code of partners whose transactions are to be included in the enquiry.
4. Specify the Portfolio Number interval for which transactions are to be included in the printout.
5. Set if the General Ledger, Sales Ledger and Purchase Ledger transactions should be included.
Use A Partner Balance Enquiry
This routine provides a quick and easy way of obtaining a complete statement for a partner, both in hard and
soft copy. The complete balance includes invoices sent to customers and received from suppliers, promissory
notes received, promissory notes paid, and so on. Paid invoices or notes can be excluded or included in the
balance as required.
Main Menu Path: Promissory Notes > Enquiries > Partner Balance > Partner Complete Balance
To use a partner balance enquiry:
1. Select the Customer Code range.
2. Specify the date from which you want invoices and promissory notes to display in the From Date field.
Transactions entered before this date are totaled and displayed as the opening balance.
3. Decide if paid invoices should be included in the balance in the Incl. Paid Inv. field.
4. In the Incl. Settled PN field, set the rule for settled promissory notes.
5. Click Next to print the report.
6. Select the Report Format and click OK.
144 3.2
Use Partner Statements
Use this routine to view partner statements.

Main Menu Path: Promissory Notes > Enquiries > Partner Balance > Partner Prom.Notes/cheques Balance
To use partner statements:
1. Specify the Partner Type and Partner Code.
2. Enter the From Date.
3. Define if the Settled promissory notes should be included in the Partner Statement in the Include Settled PN
field.
4. Enter Y in the To Print field to print the report.

Other promissory notes enquiries are also available, such as Payment Forecast.
Balance Transfers
This section describes posting the closing balances from the existing year to the next financial year.
Transfer Balances to the Next Year
This routine is used to transfer the chart of accounts to the General Ledger for the next financial year, as well as
to transfer balances between financial years. It also copies all budget alternatives to the new financial year and
all other accounting dimensions to the next financial year.
It is only possible to use this routine in Exclusive Mode. Balances that are carried forward will only be created for
balance sheet accounts, such as accounts identified with an account type B. (Review the Enter or Change an
Accounting Dimension Entry section at the beginning of this chapter for more information on Account Types).
This routine can be repeated more than once and the opening balances will be adjusted according to revisions
to the current year. This allows posting to the next year while year-end adjustments are still in progress.
To transfer the chart of accounts to the General Ledger for the next financial year:
Main Menu Path: General Ledger > Miscellaneous > Transfer Balances to Next Year
To transfer balances to the next year:
1. Enter the Balance Sheet account to post this year's retained earnings (losses) in the Enter A/c to take
Balanced P&L field. It will be brought forward into next year's opening balances.
2. In the Transactions for Profit? field, enter Yes if you wish to create a journal that will balance the profit
and loss accounts, and post the net result (profit or loss) for the current year to retained earnings brought
forward in this year's closing balances. If you enter No, the routine will transfer the balances but will not
post this journal into this year's accounts.
3. Use the Enter A/c to take Profit [P&L] and [B] fields to enter the number of accounts to which the
transactions for profit are to be posted: one balance sheet and one profit and loss account.
4. Optionally, enter Yes or No as required in the Transfer Budget? and Create Prior Year Comparatives?
fields.
3.2 145
5. Confirm Ok to Transfer the Ledgers? The system then informs you that it is copying the account schedule.
146 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Managing Inventory
Chapter 7: Managing Inventory
The Stock Control module is used for material management (raw materials ingredients, purchased items, and finished
goods) used in production, various forms of finished goods, and warehouse management. iScala Warehouse management
supports extensive location management and warehouse optimization solutions. This module is used with the Requisition
Management, Purchase Control, Sales Order, Service Management, Manufacturing, and Lease Management modules
to provide a flexible stock management system. Integration with Material Production Control (MPC), Service Management,
Project Management, and Asset Management allow additional scenarios to be supported.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the Stock Control module. Only the main
define through this administration program. Review the Application Help for more information.
Stock Items
Stock items include any goods, components, commodities, or raw materials that are regularly kept in stock.
Permanent stock information is entered in the stock file.
Enter Life Cycle Phases
iScala supports the definition of up to 100 different item life cycle phases (0 - 99). Each item life cycle phase can
be defined as active or inactive for the stock item. Once defined as active (Applicable), the phase can be assigned
a start and end date. Multiple life-cycle phases can share the same date ranges as each phase is linked to specific
user permission.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Life Cycle Phases > Enter/Adjust/Delete Life Cycle
Phases
To enter life cycle phases:
1. Select the language to use from the list.
2. Enter the Life Cycle Phase ID.
3. Specify a descriptive name for the life cycle phase in the Screen label field.
4. In the Warning Message field, define the message to display when stock items are used within the life cycle
phase.
5. In the Error Message field, specify the message to display when stock items are blocked within the life
cycle phase.
6. Define the cycle Priority. In case of overlapping life cycle phases, the priority determines from which life
cycle phase the message is taken. Messages that relate to the life cycle phases that block usage of a stock
3.2 147
Managing Inventory Epicor iScala User Guide
item within the phase always have a higher priority than those that relate to the phases that allow usage
within the phase. A priority of 0 is the highest priority.
7. Specify the Permission level. Permission in the range from 1 to 10 will check the corresponding life cycle
phase permission applicable to the type of order/entity to determine whether usage of an item within the
life cycle phase shall be blocked or allowed. Specify 0 to always allow usage with a warning. Specify 11 to
always block usage of items within the phase.
8. Adjust the switches as required. Refer to the Application Help for more information.
9. Click Save.
Enter Stock Items
Stock codes can consist of up to 35 letters and numbers depending on the type, category, and quantity of stock
you are processing. It is recommended that you consider the structure of the stock file carefully before entering
stock records; adjusting all stock item records can be time-consuming.
To enter stock items:
1. Enter a unique Stock Code identifier. It is used as a primary code for managing, finding, and using the stock
item.
2. Create a Description for the stock item. The description entered can be used for enquiring stock items. As
a default, the first line is the primary description used and displays in enquiries, reports, and documents.
The second line and Long Description are additional descriptions which can be added and used, if necessary.
3. Specify the nature of an item so it can be treated appropriately in the Status Code field. It can also be used
as a sorting and searching mechanism.
4. Notice other codes available for grouping, sorting, searching, and managing stock items. These are controlled
against predefined codes. You can use these codes on reports and documents, as necessary.
5. Enter the EAN Code or the GTIN Code, if used. This is the unique identification number guaranteed to be
unique by the organization that issued the number range. It is commonly used to label goods when they
move between companies.
6. Optionally, enter Remarks for the stock item.
7. In the Item Type field, enter whether the item belongs to goods, capital goods, or services; then press
Enter.
8. Select Sales/Budget from the Menu.

Note Status usage may depend on whether the item is physically held in inventory. Physically held
materials (status 0-7) may be sorted into Finished Goods (for example, Status 1), Purchased Items
(generally, Status 6, 7), Spare Parts, and so on. Non-physically held items (Status 8, 9) are services,
product structure parent items (sales kits (sales of multiple products as a bundle)), simple assembly
built to order, or manufactured items.
148 3.2
Enter Sales and Budgeting Information
1. Enter the price in its currency in the Price List 00 field. Additional prices can be set in the Price List routine.
2. Optionally, define a New Price 00 for Price List 00. It can be set prior to its effective date.
3. Enter the start date and the end date for the new selling price to establish the Valid Period.
4. Enter the Tax Code for this item.
5. Enter Yes for EC VAT Exempt or No for EC Tax, if applicable.
6. Enter any Other Tax es applicable (0 is none).
7. Enter the Distrib ution Fee code, if applicable (0 is none).
8. Enter the Units/Package number.
9. Enter the Price Multipl e to be applied.
10. Enter the Delivery Rule. The various choices available control the treatment of an item at the point of the
sales order.
11. Optionally, enter the Default Bin to use for new warehouses. New items, or batches, are automatically
assigned to the Default Bin when they are placed in a new warehouse.
Note To change the default bin for an existing warehouse, use the Standard Bin field within the
Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Other Stock Files > Warehouse Information routine.
12. Accept the default entry for the ABC Code and the Frequency Code.
Note Using ABC Codes is a method of grouping stock items into High (A), Low (B), and Lowest (C)
levels of profitability. Routines are available to have this automatically calculated. This is helpful, for
example, for identifying items that should be manually planned and purchased versus taking advantage
of the system's automated routines. The Frequency Code is used in a similar fashion to the ABC code.
The Frequency Code ranks items from A to P, depending on the frequency of stock item turnover.
The application can also calculate this automatically.
13. Enter any Budget Q uanti t ies applicable.
14. Enter any Budget Type applicable.
15. Press Enter and select Discount/Provision from the Menu.
Set Up Discount and Commission Information
To set up discount and commission information:
1. Set up as many as eight general QTY Disc ount levels. Volume discounts specified here are available to all
customers. Enter the Q uanti ty threshold, as well as the Percentage Disc ount, or set the Price, whichever
applies.
3.2 149
2. Notice stock items can use special codes that give unique percentage customer Discount Code s, Bonus
Code s, and salesmen Commiss ion Cod es, depending on the customer being sold to. Enter any required
codes in these fields.
3. Enter the BOM Discount Method and Extended Commission Code if applicable.
4. Press Enter and select Measure/Units from the Menu.
Enter Measurements And Units
1. Enter the specific stock item measurements. These can be printed on export documents and calculated as
totals for deliveries.
Note These values will be used by the Business Transaction Control Engine (BTCE) to track volumes
or weight.
2. Enter the appropriate Unit Code and Factor to be used when holding the item in inventory, purchasing
from a supplier, selling to a customer, or used in manufacturing.
3. Press Enter and select Purchase from the Menu.
Enter Purchasing Information
1. Enter the standard purchasing Curr ency code and the Purch ase Price for this stock item.
2. Enter the required percentage uplift to this purchase price to represent the Est imated- Oncost such as
customs duties, shipping, and so on. If actual on-costs are entered against the stock items, this should be
left at 0%.
3. Enter the Landed Cost. This is the estimated cost price (including on-costs) in local currency.
4. Enter default purchase information including the Purchaser, Supplier Cod e, Alt ernative Supplier Cod
e, Suppl ier Stock C ode (if different), and Delivery Time.
5. Enter a Purchase Rule for the item.
6. Specify critical default material management controls such as the Reorder Level and the E.O.Q. (Economic
Order Quantity)
7. Define the number of purchase units per package in the Units/Package field and the price multiple for
purchase and stock value prices in the Price Multiple field.
8. Define the Drop Shipment rule for the stock item.
9. Enter the Delivery leadtime for this item and Delivery leadtime unit.
10. Select the DS Supplier selection rule type.
11. Press Enter and select Cost/Accounting from the Menu.
150 3.2
Define Costing And Accounting Information
To define costing and accounting information
1. Enter the Stock Valuation Model and Stock Valuation Model for CC (consolidation currency). This data
is used when iScala Company Consolidation is activated.
2. Depending on the valuation model, enter the relevant Weighted Av Purch Cos t (Average Purchase Cost)
or Standard Cost per unit. These are defaults for new warehouses where they can be re-calculated and
adjusted automatically. If consolidation is used, enter the consolidation currency cost, as well.
3. Enter the average purchase cost and standard cost for consolidated currency in the Aver. Cost CC and
Stand. Cost CC fields.
4. If the item is used as a top item in a BOM template, enter the summary cost per components in the local
currency in the BOM Cost field.
5. In the P&L Account field, enter the primary General Ledger account used in requisitions to allocate expenses
for stock issues and direct purchase orders.
6. Enter the correct Account ing Code. This allows flexible accounting down to the stock item level.
7. Enter the default Accounting Dimension codes that should be used when creating accounting transactions
for this stock item.
8. Press Enter and select Maintenance from the Menu.
Enter Maintenance Information
To enter maintenance information:
1. Define the item's warranty period in months in the Warranty Months field.
2. Specify the Inspection Interval and Maintenance Interval.
3. Select the Maintenance C o d e associated with the stock item. The Maintenance Code is used in conjunction
with Service Order and Contract Management to display which products are covered under maintenance
agreements.
4. Complete the other fields, as required.
5. Press Enter and select User Defined from the Menu.
6. Select whether Serial Numbers are used, and if they are mandatory or optional.
Enter User-Defined Information
To enter user-defined information:
1. Select any User Defined codes that have been set up. These fields can be free-form or controlled by a
pre-set Stock Control Code File.
3.2 151
2. Press Enter and select Miscellaneous from the Menu.
Enter Miscellaneous Information
1. Indicate whether the on-hand balance should be allowed to go negative for any reason in the Negative
Bal ance field.
2. Select Yes to Enter Batch information with warehouse transactions.
3. Select Yes if the item should be Quality Control led or No if it should not.
4. Select Yes if the items are Controlled Goods and should only be purchased from approved vendors or No
if they should not.
5. If the item is batch controlled, select the Batch Picking Order. Options include First In First Out, Last In First
Out, First Expire First Out, Best Before date sequence (shortest life picked first).
6. If the Available To Promise feature is activated, enter Yes for an ATP Check at order entry.
7. Complete other fields, as required, to control replacement items and end of life items (Product Hold set
to Yes) if complimentary items are automatically offered and it is possible to issue goods from batches that
have expired.
8. Press Enter and select Bin from the Menu.
Determine Bin Information
To determine bin information:
1. Select if this item is submitted to Bin Control.
2. Determine the Item/Batch Placement. Options include No Restrictions, One Stock Item per Bin, One Batch
per Bin, and One Batch per Stock Item and Bin (different stock items are allowed).
3. Enter the permitted Temperature and Humidity range for the item.
4. Enter the Storage Type s.
5. Select the Bin Location Rule Type. This controls how to identify bins during put-away activity.
6. Press Enter and select Master Planning from the Menu.
Enter Item Life-cycle Information
Item Life-cycle management allows for the control of how activities are supported when working with a specific
stock item in a specific life-cycle phase.
1. The Life Cycle Phase ID and Description display in the first two columns.
2. Use the Apply Phase column to select whether the life cycle is checked for the item.
3. In the Start Date field, specify the start date of the life cycle phase.
152 3.2
4. Define the End Date of the life cycle phase.
Enter Master Planning Information
This data is used when using the iScala Manufacturing module and controls the basic manufacturing parameters
for the stock item.
To enter master planning information:
1. Enter the rule for the Lot Size Technique. This defines how to calculate the quantity to order when planning
stock requirements. Options include Lot for Lot, EOQ (Economic Order Quantity), Fixed Order Quantity, Fixed
Period of Time, and MOQ (Max Order Quantity).
2. Enter the default Order Quantity. This is used as the Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) or Fixed Order Quantity
(FOQ) and the application can calculate it.
3. Enter the Fixed Period Time for orders.
4. To avoid placing small orders, select a Multiple to use for quantities.
5. Input the level of Safety Stock required. Typically, this is the forecasted demand during the time it takes
the supplier to replenish inventory.
6. In the Due before Need field, enter the number of days of demand used when calculating the safety stock.
7. Determine the basis of the stock requirement calculation in the Reservation/Forecast field. This parameter
defines how the combination of reservations and forecasts is evaluated when assessing current and future
stock demands. Options include both reservations and forecasts, only reservations, only forecasts, the greatest
of reservations or forecasts, and the sum of reservations and forecasts.
8. Adjust the Forecast Consumption information for the item.
9. Complete any other fields as required, accepting defaults where applicable.
10. Press Enter to move to the Basic Info screen where you can enter a new stock item or adjust an existing
one.
Stock Management
iScala uses both Batch Numbers and Batch ID Numbers. A Batch Number is a unique number created when a
batch controlled item is received, and it remains the same for the life of the item. Batch Numbers often print on
items and are used for batch tracing, batch pricing, and other batch related activity.
The Batch ID is an internal ID the application creates when goods are received. Every time an item is moved to a
new bin or warehouse or something happens to it, such as used in production, a new batch ID is created. The
Batch ID can be used to identify the specific place and condition of a batch controlled item. Thus, one batch
number can relate to numerous batch IDs for the same physical item.
It is also possible to work either with a Batch Number or a Batch ID as a primary identity (except for some specific
places), depending on parameter setup. The Batch Number serves as a unique identifier you can assign to a batch
when you enter batch details on a new receipt entry. If you do not specify a batch number at this stage, the
application can automatically generate a batch number in accordance with the set parameters in the corresponding
3.2 153
batch template. If you do not define a batch number, the application takes it from the Stock Control counter
and inserts it in the Batch ID field once a new batch is created.
Define Batch Templates
When you create a new batch template, you can associate it with a stock item, product group, supplier code,
and other parameters. When stock is received, you can specify a stock item code and retrieve other batch relevant
information from the batch template specified for this particular stock item.
The parameters in the batch template include information on the Batch Number, warehouse, expiry dates, and
so on. This information is stored and automatically retrieved once a particular template is selected for a batch.
Batch templates that contain this data are activated during Stock Transactions Entry, Work Order Receive, Purchase
Order Delivery, and Sales Order Return. You can thus employ batch templates in Stock Control, Purchase Control,
Sales Order, and Material Production Control (MPC).
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Batch Functions > Enter/Adjust Batch Templates
To create a batch template:
1. Enter the Template Type. You can create one batch template for a single stock item. When creating a
batch template, determine the template type. The following codes are used to identify batch template types:
Type Description
00 Stock Item Code- based template
01 Product Group- based template
02 Alternative Product Group-based template
03 External Product Group-based template
04 Stock Item Status-based template
05 Supplier Code-based template
06 Default template which is applied if no other
templates are available (other templates are not
found in the application). It does not refer to any of
the parameters specified in other batch template
types.
2. In the Template ID field, enter the stock item code, product group code, or another code in compliance
with the selected template type.
3. The Description field automatically displays the value once you have specified the template ID.
4. Specify batch details in the Batch fields section to determine the basic structure and settings for a new
batch. Follow the User Assistance to define field usage.
5. Press Enter to save the template and create a new one.
Enter Batch Information
If batch information is set up, it can be entered along with inventory transactions. Alternatively, the information
can be entered directly into Stock Control even though no transaction is created.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Other Stock Files > Batch Information
154 3.2
To enter batch information:
1. Select the Stock Item for which batch information is to be entered.
2. Select the Warehouse where the batch is located.
3. Select the Batch ID to enter information for. To select by Batch Number, use F4 to list all available batches
of the selected item in the selected warehouse.
4. Enter the Batch Type, if applicable.
5. Press Enter and select Batch Details from the Menu.
Enter Batch Details
To enter batch details:
1. Adjust any fields, as required, including Supplier Batch ID and Bin Code.
2. Adjust the QC Category (quality control category), as necessary.
3. Complete the rest of the fields as required.
4. Press Enter and select Batch Dates from the Menu.
Enter Batch Dates
To enter batch dates:
1. Enter any dates that relate to a batch, including the Delivery Date, Manufacture Date, Best Before date,
Deliver Before Date, and Expiry Date.
2. Press Enter and move to the User Defined Fields screen. Batch user-defined fields can be set up as
mandatory and to be checked against code file.
3. Adjust the fields as appropriate.
4. Press Enter and select the Display Quantities option from the Menu.
Display Quantities
1. Notice the system displays the current quantities on Balance, what has been Allocated, and what has been
Ordered.
2. Press Enter and select Extra Data from the Menu. Enter any additional information in the free text fields
available.
Set Up Picking
To set up picking:
3.2 155
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Picking > Miscellaneous > Setup
1. Define the warehouse for which the document code is entered or adjusted in the Warehouse field.
2. In the Request Type field, specify the request type for which the document code is entered or adjusted.
Click the down arrow to display the list of types.
3. Enter the Document Code to use when printing picking lists.
4. Click Update.
5. Enter new setup or click Exit.
Pricing
Set Up Price Lists
An extensive array of Price Lists can be set up and used when selling stock items. This allows flexible control of
current and upcoming prices for products in any currency. Price Lists control the default price given to customers.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Other Stock Files > Price Lists
To set up price lists:
1. Select Enter/Adjust Price Lists from the Option window.
2. Select the Stock Code for which the price is entered.
3. Define the Price List corresponding to the price being entered for the stock item.
4. Enter the current Price.
5. Enter a New Price for the stock item on the price list. The new price has the same price multiple.
6. Enter a Valid Period for the new price in the fields provided. In the first field, enter the date from which
the new price is effective. If you do not want a new price, enter 999999. In the second field, enter the date
to which the price is effective. If the price is applied until further notice, enter 999999. The new price will
apply for the interval you have specified.
7. Enter an Exchange Price for the stock item on the price list, if applicable. Press Enter to save the data and
create a new price list.
Manage Advanced Discounts
Traditional sales discounts are supported based on the item or item-customer combination. The setup is intuitive
and can be adjusted in the Stock Control > Discount/Commission Codes > Customer/Stock Discounts >
Enter/Change Discount routine. More advanced discounting is supported where the amount of the discount can
be based on many factors relating to the customer or item, and complex rules can be defined within hierarchical
Discount Schemas.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Discount/Commission Codes > Discount Schemas > Enter/Adjust
Discount Templates
156 3.2
To establish advanced discounts:
1. Select the Language Code associated with the Discount Template.
2. Enter a new discount Template Code.
3. Enter a Description of the Discount Template in the selected language.
4. In the Table field, select whether to use discounts based on stock item or supplier.
5. Select any Field that exists in the specified table to define the stock item or customer.
Define Discounts
Discount Definitions
To define discounts:
1. Enter a unique Discount Code.
2. Define the Discount Type. Discounts can be percentage based, fixed amounts, order value based, or
progressive.
3. Define if the discount can be used for Grouping.
4. Select the discount Template Code to use.
Set Up Discounts
Discount Setup
To set up discounts:
1. Enter the Discount Code that was created while defining a discount and the Setup Code.
2. Notice the Field Description column is taken from the Discount Template form. That is a criterion to select
the cases when the discount is granted.
3. Define the Value From and the Value To columns. These contain the range of values that define the items
to which the discounts are given.
4. Determine if the discounts are to be given to the items that fall into the specified range or to the items that
do not fall into the specified range in the Incl/Excl field. The inclusive value is used by default.
5. Set the Period for which the discount is valid and define a Price List.
6. Enter either the Maximum Quantity or Maximum Amount for the discount, depending on the Range
Type parameter of Amount or Quantity.
7. Use the Update Max Qty/Amount Counter on Delivery Date to define the moment to update accumulated
values to the right of the Maximum Quantity and Maximum Amount fields.
3.2 157
8. Press Enter to move to the next screen where you can specify discounts for a certain quantity or amount.
Apply a Discount Schema
Discount Schemas are used to combine Discount Templates into complex marketing tools. Depending on the
Schema type, the total, most significant, or least significant discount will be applied. This is based on a tree-based
structure defined in the schema.
Discount Schemas
To apply a discount schema:
1. Create a new Discount Schema Code.
2. Select the Schema Type. Choose between accepting all discounts, only the least, or only the most significant.
3. Link the appropriate Discount code to the Schema. For each discount code, define if child discount templates
are always processed or if only the parent is applied; and whether to apply further discounts at the same
level, the parent level, or to finish the discount calculation.
Note Once Advanced Discounts are set up, any sales order for which an advanced discount is not
applied will have a note automatically created explaining the reason the discount was not applied.
Batch Pricing
In some countries, there is a statutory limit on the maximum mark-up a distribution company can add to a logistic
chain from the producer, or supplier, to the final customer. As a result, different sales prices for individual product
batches must be considered.
Some products fall under the batch pricing regulations and others do not. Similarly, if your company has both
domestic and foreign customers, only domestic sales are liable under the regulations. All customers and products
subject to batch pricing should be set up as such.
Individual batch prices can be entered manually for each batch or calculated automatically based on the price
list mark-up settings stored in the application. Each batch price is associated with a specific price list, so for each
batch, several prices are stored.
In addition, there can be different rules as to which additional purchase- or on-costs to include in the base price
for automatic calculation. The corresponding cost types should be set up accordingly.
After batch-specific prices have been set up, prices in the new sales orders are modified automatically. When
entering a new sales order for a customer affected by batch pricing, for one or more items subject to batch
pricing, the price on the order line will be adjusted accordingly after batch allocation.
If several batches of the same product are allocated to the same sales order, the order lines are split accordingly,
with each line acquiring the price of a specific batch. The same technique is applied if a delivery proposal is used
instead of manual batch allocation.
158 3.2
Serial Numbers
Serial Numbers are specific codes used to register individual items within batches of stock items. These are often
linked to warranties, configurations, and other contractual obligations.
Create Serial Number
Before entering serial numbers, think how the numbers should be formed. A serial number can be alphanumeric
consisting of up to 20 characters. The format of the serial numbers will depend mainly on the type of item and
the quantity of the type of item.
To create serial numbers:
1. Select the Stock Code with a Serial Number assigned to it.
2. Enter the Serial Number. This can be done manually, in an automated sequence by using the + symbol,
or in a sequence following a specific batch number by using the * symbol.
3. Press Enter to move to the Supplier Details screen.
4. Select the Supplier of the stock item.
5. Select the Warehouse where it is located.
6. Choose the Batch ID, if any.
7. Press Enter to move to the Customer Details screen. Adjust the required customer information.
If the Serial Number is part of an existing BOM Configuration, it can be selected for later reference.
Bill of Materials
A Bill of Materials Template is a pre-defined Bill of Materials which generally lists all the possible components in
a Bill of Materials. This is different from a Configuration which contains a specific selection of components from
the Template. Optional items cannot exist in Configurations.
For example, a stock Bill of Materials Template is a BOM that has generic specifications that can be customized
for a particular configuration. The BOM Template may have a configuration created according to a specific
customer request or represent a recipe in a hotel.
BOM Configuration
A stock Bill of Materials Configuration is a specific BOM created for a single customer and has a unique Serial
Number. If there are multiple versions of a BOM Configuration, each version must have its own serial number.
A Configuration History is saved and can be referenced in relation to the original or future customers. The process
of entering a Configuration is essentially the same as for a Template and is not documented here apart from
noting the menu path.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control> Bill of Material > Enter/Adjust BOM Configurations
To enter a BOM configuration:
3.2 159
1. Enter the Configuration Code for a new BOM.
2. Enter the Configuration Name.
3. Click Add Node.
4. Use the Stock Code field to select an item.
5. Adjust the node parameters following User Assistance and Application Help and click OK.
6. Use the Edit Node button to adjust the existing node data.
7. Click Save to save the BOM.
8. You can create a node from an existing one, that is, copy the existing one. To do so, select the Make New
Configuration check box at the bottom of the tab.
9. If you want to create a new version of the adjusted configuration, select the Make New Version check
box. Otherwise, the changes made will be saved in the current version of the configuration.
10. If you have not finished creating the configuration and do not want it to be broken down in an order, select
the Not ready for processing check box. When you are finished, clear the check box. Note that once it is
processed, the configuration cannot be set as not ready for processing again.
11. Click Exit to exit the routine.
Create a Bill of Material Template
You can use a BOM template to simplify the process of creating a large number of similar bills of material.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Bill of Material > Enter/Adjust BOM Template
To create a bill of material template:
1. Enter the Template Code and create a Template Name.
2. Click the Add Node button to create a node. A Node can be a parent or child item. The first Node created
is assumed to be the Parent item.
Create a Bill of Material Note
1. Enter the Node Name.
2. Enter the related Stock Code. This field is optional for a BOM Template, but mandatory for Configurations.
3. Enter the Child Q uanti ty of items contained in a Node. This only applies to Sub-Nodes.
4. Enter the Structure Type by deciding whether BOMs can be sold as complete or partial forms. The Structure
Type is only defined for the top-level item.
5. Define if the Node is Optional or mandatory.

Note To create a BOM Configuration based on a BOM Template, right-click in the top item field,
and select Copy from Template.
160 3.2
To Use the Graphical View
1. Click the Graph ical view button.
2. The Graphical View provides a user friendly mode for viewing a Bill of Materials.
3. Use the Grid View button to return to the BOM grid view.
4. Click Save to save the BOM Template.
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the Stock Control module. Each operation is
Bin Management and Quality Control
This section reviews how to add bins to the application and how to enable quality control.
Add Bins
A bin is an elementary storage unit as opposed to a more complex storage unit such as a warehouse or warehouse
area.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Bin Management > Enter/Adjust Bins
To enter a bin:
1. In the Warehouse field, enter the code of the warehouse in which the bin is stored.
2. Enter the Bin No.
3. Enter the bin Description.
4. Use the Capacity checking switch to assign control over the bin capacity.
5. Specify the maximum allowed weight of goods that can be placed in the bin in the Weight Capacity field.
6. In the Used Weight Capacity field, enter the total weight existing batches use in the bin.
7. Specify the bin Length, Width, and Height.
8. Define the bin volume parameters in the Volume Capacity, Used Volume Capacity, and Volume Margin
fields.
9. Enter the Temperature range for the storage of goods.
10. Specify the Humidity range for the storage of goods as a percentage.
3.2 161
11. Press F4 to select a Storage Type. This code is generally used when allocating goods that require special
storage conditions, such as refrigerated goods, chemicals, and so on. The Storage Type must be specified
for a Stock Item and a Bin. To allocate goods to a bin, the stock item storage type must match the bin
storage type. This helps you avoid storing incompatible goods in the same location. Storage type is set as a
one-character code.
12. Select the WarehouseArea to store the bin.
13. Enter the Bin Type.
14. Select the Temperature Validation Rule. To allocate goods that need a controlled storage temperature
to appropriate bins, the bin temperature interval is compared to the stock item storage temperature interval
according to the temperature validation rule. In case a stock item with a controlled storage temperature is
assigned to a bin with a temperature interval inappropriate for the item, the process stops and the application
prompts you.
15. Select the Humidity Validation Rule. To allocate goods with controlled storage humidity to appropriate
bins, the bin humidity interval is compared to the stock item storage humidity interval according to the
humidity validation rule. In case a stock item with controlled storage humidity is assigned to a bin with a
humidity interval inappropriate for the item, the process stops and the application prompts you.
16. You can mark a bin as blocked if it is not ready for use (created in advance) or is not in use. To use this
functionality, adjust the Bin Status field, following the User Assistance prompts.
17. Press Enter to save changes and create another bin.
Enable Quality Control
The Quality Control functionality provides tools for controlling purchased and manufactured goods before they
are sold or used in further manufacturing processes. If Quality Control is activated for a batch of stock items, all
operations with this batch are locked until the control is passed successfully.
Quality Controlled items are tracked via their Quality Category. Typically, if the Quality Category is zero, the batch
is available for any operation. If the Quality Category is not zero, the batch is locked. Use the Stock Control >
Miscellaneous > Setup > Code Files routine to set up quality categories.
To enable quality control for a stock item:
1. Press F4 to select a stock item in the Stock Code field and press PgDn.
2. Use the Menu to navigate to the Miscellaneous screen.
3. Set the Quality Control field to Yes to enable Quality Control for this stock item by default. Otherwise,
set this option to No.
4. If needed, set Dangerous Goods to Yes to deny access to this item for unauthorized customers and
suppliers.
You can set up the application to skip Quality Control if the goods come from an Approved Supplier, or you
can require or skip Quality Control for individual customers and suppliers working with specific goods. Refer
to the Application Help for more information on these operations.
162 3.2
Stock Transactions and Counting
Stock transactions take place for a variety of reasons. These transactions give rise to accounting transactions, if
required.
Stock transaction types include:
• Type 00 - Goods received
• Type 01 - Stock issued
• Type 02 - Stocktaking discrepancy
• Type 03 - Purchase costs
• Type 04 - Stock transfers
• Type 05 - Purchase discrepancy
• Type 06 - Purchase costs
• Type 07 - Appreciation/depreciation
• Type 08 - Transfers between warehouses
• Type 09 - Transfer between Bins
• Type 10 - Convert purchase costs
Make a Stock Transfer
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Transactions > Enter Transaction > Stock Transfer
To make a stock transfer:
1. Select the warehouse from which the transfer of stock items should take place in the From Warehouse
option window.
2. Select the warehouse to which the transferred stock items go in the To Warehouse option window.
3. Enter or confirm the DATE for transferring stock.
4. Select the STOCK CODE to transfer.
5. Enter the QUANTITY to transfer.
6. If the stock item requires that Batch information is entered along with transactions, the Batch Info dialog
box displays. Enter the appropriate batch details.
7. Enter the Reference for the transaction and the Order Number. These could be used to indicate the nature
of the transfer and or the person responsible.
8. Press Enter to update, and when prompted to proceed with the update, enter Yes.
9. To print an Int ernal Dispatch note, enter Yes.
3.2 163
Receive Stock
This routine is used for the initial setup of the Stock Control module. Additionally, you can use this routine if you
do not have the Purchase Control module installed. If the Purchase Control module is installed, this routine is
managed automatically. The routine can be used as an option when dealing with a supplier over the counter.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Transactions > Enter Transaction > Stock Received
To receive stock:
1. Select the Warehouse to receive stock in the option window.
2. Enter the DATE of the transaction.
3. Select the STOCK CODE to be received.
4. Enter the Q UANTI TY to be received.
5. Adjust the cost PRICE, if necessary.
Issue Stock
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Transactions > Enter Transaction > Stock Issues
To issue stock:
1. Select the Warehouse to issue stock in the option window.
2. Enter the DATE of the transaction.
3. Select the STOCK CODE to be issued.
4. Enter the QUANTITY to be issued.
5. Adjust the sales PRICE, if necessary.
6. If batch information is needed, batch information will display. Enter the Supp lier Batch ID and the Order
Number. Use this information as needed.
7. Press Enter to update. This will issue the stock items from stock.
Use Stock Transaction Lists
Stock Transaction lists give full details about all stock transactions processed in the application.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Transactions > Stock Transaction Lists
To use stock transaction lists:
1. Define the selection criteria for the Stock Transaction list, as needed.
2. Define the Transaction Types to view in the list.
164 3.2
3. Use the Date Order field to select whether to date the order or order the transactions in which they were
processed. When finished, press Enter.
4. Select any Accounting or Dimension selection criteria required. When finished, press Enter. Define if
calculations are made in Base Currency. Click OK and confirm sorting.
5. In the Save As dialog box, enter the File name and select the report type in the Save as type field.
6. Click Save and view the report.
General Ledger Journal
The General Ledger Journal is a summary of the transaction entries in the stock data. By using this journal, you
can reconcile the stock accounting against the General Ledger. Inventory-based accounting transactions are
generated by printing the General Ledger Journal; these transactions can be validated or adjusted from the
journal.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Transactions > General Ledger Journal
To print the general ledger journal:
1. Select Yes in the Do you want to change Transactions dialog box if you want to change some of the
previously made stock transactions. Then, enter a Transaction Number you want to change and make
necessary adjustments.
2. Enter Yes in the Create GL Transactions? dialog box.
3. Set the Date range for the inventory transaction you want to print.
4. Enter Yes In the Ready to Create GL Transactions? dialog box.
5. Define which Date Range should be posted to the GL and with what Book Entry Date.
6. Enter Yes in the Ready for Check, Sort and Print? dialog box.
7. Print in the Base currency.
8. Select No in the Is Reprint of Journal Required? dialog box.
9. Select Yes to update the General Ledger.
Create a Traditional Stocktake List
The Stocktaking Basis report is used to create periodic stocktake lists that can later be used to report current
stock levels for each stock item in the various warehouses.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control> Reports > Stock Reports> Stocktaking Basis
To create a traditional stocktake list:
1. Define the selection criteria through the Enter Selection Number field.
2. Define the Order in which sorting should occur. Select and input a Data Code as a basis of sorting.
3. Select the Warehouses to view.
3.2 165
4. Select whether to include the on-hand balance in the report, whether to sort by Bin Order, and whether to
print items with a zero on-hand balance.
5. In the List Number? Field, enter 0 for absolute and relative stocktaking. To generate saved stocktaking
bases, select list number 1-999. You can use this number later to enter stocktaking results. The system
displays a warning if the list with a chosen number already exists, and offers an option to overwrite it.
Picking, Packing, and Shipment
This chapter describes a common picking routine in iScala. It provides printing or sending one picking list, rather
than creating different picking lists in each module, and entering picking results (issues against picking a list) in
a common function. Several picking requests can be merged to one printed/sent picking list according to various
merging rules. You are able to handle picking for warehouse transfers and manually entered stock issues, create
picking lists, and report the result.
You can also use the Box Handling functionality to enter shipment information, register received boxes according
to the previously specified shipment information, move stock items between boxes, create Box Picking Proposals,
print box delivery documents, and register boxes delivered to customers according to the previously created Box
Picking Proposals.
Enter Picking Results
Use this routine to enter actual picking results and create appropriate changes and transactions depending on
the entered results.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Picking > Enter Picking Results
To enter picking results:
1. Select the Warehouse for which you want to enter picking list results. Only warehouses that are set up to
use the common picking routine are available.
2. Select the Picking List number for which you enter picking list results.
3. Select Current Box.
4. Press Enter or click the Load-Show button. The system displays all open lines from the selected picking
list. Information in some fields is read-only and those fields are not available for entering values or adjusting.
5. Use the buttons in the bottom of the screen to perform the corresponding operations with the picking list.
6. Click Update to save the changed data.
Release for Shipment
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Picking > Release for Shipment
To release picking lists for shipment:
1. Enter the Warehouse for the picking lists you want to release for shipment. Only warehouses that are set
up to use the common picking routine are available.
166 3.2
2. Enter the Request type for which you want to release the picking lists.
3. In the Request Id field, select the range of request type ID of the picking lists you want to release for
shipment.
4. In the Picking List fields, select the range of picking lists to release.
5. Click OK.
Enter a Shipment
You can create, adjust, and delete shipments, packing lists, boxes, box lines, and box line elements or select and
adjust each child element of any member of the Shipment tree-like structure.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Box Handling > Enter/Adjust Shipment
To enter a shipment:
1. Enter the number of the shipment you want to create in the Shipment Number field.
2. Define the Supplier for whom the shipment is intended.
3. Enter the code of the Shipping Method to apply to the current shipment.
4. Enter the code of the Shipping Agent to which the shipment is assigned.
5. Specify the Supplier Shipment Number and press Enter to move to the Pack List screen.
6. Enter the Pack List Number to include in the current shipment.
7. Creation Date and Creation Method values display as read-only.
8. Enter the Supplier Contact for the current packing list.
9. Define parameters of the pack such as Gross Weight, Net Weight, and Gross Volume.
10. Press Enter to move to the Box screen.
11. Specify the Box Number in the current packing list and enter a box Description.
12. Creation Date and Creation Method values display as read-only.
13. Enter the Package Type.
14. The Status field also displays as read-only.
15. In the Stock Code field, enter the stock item code through which a price and cost for the box are connected.
16. Enter the code of the Warehouse where the box is created or currently stored.
17. Enter the number of the bin assigned to the box in the Bin Number field end press Enter to move to the
next screen.
18. On the Box Line screen, you can create, adjust, and delete box lines. Specify the required data following
User Assistance and press Enter.
3.2 167
19. Use the Box Line Element screen to adjust the box line element data, if any.
Print a Picking List
You can select and print picking lists.

Main Menu Path: Stock Control> Picking > Print PickingLists
To print picking lists:
1. In the Warehouse field, select the warehouse range for which the picking list is to print. Only warehouses
set up to use the common picking routine are available in this routine.
2. Use the Credit Check field to specify whether the application prints order lines for invoice customers that
exceeded their credit limit.
3. In the Reprint field, define which picking lists to print.
4. Select the Picking List number range to print. Only picking lists for the selected warehouses display.
5. Select the Merged Picking List number range to print. Only picking lists for the warehouses that use merged
picking lists display.
6. Enter the Request type for which the picking lists are to print. Press the Spacebar to select all types.
7. Select the Request ref 1 range to print. This header name changes according to the selected Request type.
8. Use the Print closed lines to select whether to print closed picking list lines.
9. Press Enter and click OK to start printing.
Print Shipment Documents
When you ship goods, you need to create a list of items for each box.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control> Picking > Boxes > Print Box Contents
To print box contents:
1. Use the Box Number fields to specify the range of box numbers for which to print box content.
2. Select whether to use a document code while printing in the Specific document Code? field, and if you
set this field to Yes, specify the Document Code to use.
3. Define whether to print Open boxes?
4. Select the Re-Print rule.
5. Specify the picking Warehouse for boxes to print. Note that boxes are always fully printed even if only part
of the box fulfills selection criteria. So, if you select a warehouse and a box contains items from this and
other warehouses, then the box is printed fully, with all items. Only boxes that do not contain items picked
on the selected warehouse are skipped.
6. Use the Picking List fields to specify the range of picking lists for which to print box contents.
168 3.2
7. Enter the picking Request Type for which boxes are to print and enter the Request Ref. range.
8. Enter Yes in the Print? field and press Enter.
Cancel Picking Results
Use this routine to cancel the entered picking results.

Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Picking > Cancel Picking Results
To cancel the picking results:
1. Enter the Warehouse for which you want to cancel the picking results.
2. Select the Picking List to cancel.
3. Click OK.
Close Picking Lists
When you select a picking list to close, all lines that are not yet closed in this picking list are closed, and then the
picking list status is set to closed. During picking list line closing, all unrealized allocations are cancelled. Stock
control data is updated according to the changes in picking list.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control> Picking > Close Picking Lists
To close picking lists:
1. Enter the Warehouse for the picking lists you want to close.
2. Enter the Request type for which you want to close the picking lists.
3. In the Request Id field, select the range of request type IDs of the picking lists you want to close.
4. In the Picking List fields, select the range of picking lists to close.
5. Click OK.
6. View data for selected picking lists on the Close Picking Lists screen.
7. In the Close column, select the check boxes of the picking lists you want to close.
8. Click OK to close the picking lists and confirm the operation.
Delete Picking List
When a picking list is deleted, all allocated batches are de-allocated, and all batch allocation lines and delivery
lines are deleted. Picking lists can be deleted only if it is closed or it is in history. When a picking list is closed, all
unrealized allocations are removed; however, delivery lines can exist.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control> Picking > Delete PickingLists
To delete picking lists:
1. Define how deletion is performed in the Delete From field.
3.2 169
2. Enter the Warehouse for the picking lists you want to delete.
3. Enter the Request type for which you want to delete the picking lists.
4. In the Request Id field, select the range of request type IDs of the picking lists you want to delete.
5. In the Picking List fields, select the range of picking lists to delete.
6. Click OK to delete the selected picking lists and confirm the operation.
Forecasting and Purchase Planning
Forecasts are used to predict future demand and can be used as the basis of Manufacturing or stock replenishment
planning. Forecasts can be entered by day, week, month, or year for any stock item or group of items. Forecasts
can be automatically generated as well, based on prior year statistical details.
Replenishment proposals and requisitions created via Stock Requirement Planning are recreated the next time
SRP (stock requirement planning) runs. Locked from other terminals, Purchase Order Proposals (POPs) or requisitions
will not be recreated but will become invalid since new POPs and requisitions will be created instead. The list of
such POPs and requisitions displays after calculation.
Create a Forecast
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Forecasting > Enter/Adjust Forecast > Stock
Code
To create a forecast:
1. Create and register a Forecast number.
2. Enter a Segment code, if required. Segment codes can be used to split a single forecast into multiple sections
(for example, to represent different sales regions).
3. Select the Stock Code.
4. Enter the forecast DATE and the demand QUANTITY expected. Dates can be entered on a day, week,
month, or year basis.
5. Press PgDn to enter a new stock code forecast.
Use Stock Requirement Planning
You can use this routine to calculate net requirements using information from the Stock Planning file, forecast
or actual demand, safety stock levels, and so on. It is based on MRP concepts and follows MRP logic without
creating work orders.
To use stock requirement planning:
1. Define whether to run Lead Time Calculation before running Stock Requirement
2. Select the requirements used for calculation. For example, ST in the Which Demands field means
requirements are controlled by information on the stock item record.
170 3.2
3. Enter the Forecast Date range. This range includes the dates to include in the plan.
4. Select the Stock Code and Warehouse range you want to include in the forecast.
6. Enter Yes in the OK to start? field.

Note You can also use the Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Stock Requirement Planning >
SRP Action Screen routine to handle the results from SRP routines on one screen.
Print a Replenishment Proposal
Use this routine to print the replenishment proposals created when you generated the Purchase Schedule before
releasing them to the Purchase Control module.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Stock Requirement Planning > Print Repl.
Proposals
To print a replenishment proposal:
1. Enter a range of Supplier code s to include in the proposal.
2. In the Planned Order field, enter the range of calculated purchase proposals you want to print.
3. In the Date of order fields, specify a range of calculated order dates for the proposals you want to print.
4. Define a range of delivery dates in the Delivery date fields.
5. In the Sales Order field, enter the range of sales orders that caused the demand.
6. Optionally, enter a range of Planner s, Warehouse s, and Purchaser s to print and press Enter.
7. In the Save As dialog box, enter the File name and select the type of the report in the Save as type field.
Convert a Stock Requirements Planning Replenishment Proposal to a Purchase Order
Use this routine to retrieve the purchase order proposals from the SRP calculation and convert them to purchase
orders. You can also adjust the purchase order proposals before converting them to purchase orders.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Stock Items/Enquiries > Stock Requirement Planning > Convert SRP
Replenishment Proposals
To convert a stock requirements planning replenishment proposal to a purchase order:
1. Make the required range selections.
2. Enter 0 in the Convert to field.
3. Select the Purchase Order Type.
4. Define whether to Show Planned Orders.
3.2 171
5. Specify the Order Number Series.
6. Enter the reference you want to use on all Purchase Orders you are creating in the Our Reference field and
press Enter.
7. Use the buttons on the bottom of the screen to select, deselect, edit, and convert the MRP Replenishment
Proposals.
Cycle Counting
The Cycle Counting feature provides an enhanced stocktaking functionality for continuous stocktaking. This
feature is designed to achieve consistency between stock accounted for in your application and the physical stock
held in warehouses
Create a Counting Proposal
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Cycle Counting > Proposal > Counting Proposal
To create a counting proposal:
1. Select the default Campaign Type to create a list of items to be counted.
2. Click the ellipses … button to list the available campaigns.
3. Click OK to update. A List Created message displays.
Print a Cycle Counting List
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Cycle Counting > Proposal > Print Cycle Counting List
To print a cycle counting list:
1. Select the range of list numbers to print in the List Number field.
2. Enter the Warehous es range and press Enter to view the list.
Enter Stock Taking Results
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Transactions > Enter Transaction > Stock Taking
To enter stock taking results:
1. After selecting the warehouse and date, a List number dialog displays. Enter a ? to enquire the Cycle
Counting Lists rather than the regular Stock Taking list. Select the list to use.
2. Enter the results of the physical count in the Q UANTI TY field. Press Enter and confirm to update.
Note All stock items and batches that have discrepancies over their Tolerance Limit have a Recount
List printed as many times as defined in the setup. The Stock Taking should be conducted and entered
again. When the recount set is reached and the discrepancy is still too high, a Reason Code will be
requested.
172 3.2
Reports and Enquires
This section describes some routines you can use to print and enquire information about transactions, accounts,
and balances available in the Stock Control module. You can run these reports whenever you need.
Stock Reports
Many standard stock reports including batch traceability, price lists, stock takes, valuation, and allocation reports
are available. The following procedure is the same for all stock control reports.
Another useful report is the Stock Valuation List B. This list shows the total stock value per stock item and
warehouse, calculated using the stock valuation models plus the standard cost.
When preparing for purchasing, it can be helpful to print a Deficiency List. The deficiency list can be used as the
basis for purchase orders. The list includes all items where the quantity available is less than or equal to the reorder
level.
Use the Physical Stock List Report
This report shows the balance, reserved number of units, backordered number of units, ordered number of units,
stocktaking difference, stocktaking date, and bin number for each item and warehouse. All quantities are in
stock units. If an item is found in several warehouses, the total for each item is also shown.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Reports > Stock Reports > Physical Stock List
To use the physical stock list report:
1. Use the Enter Selection number field to define the selection criteria.
2. Define the Order in which sorting should occur. Select and enter a Data Code as a basis of sorting.
3. Select the Warehouses to view.
Print Picking List Status Report
Main Menu Path: Stock Control> Picking > Print Picking list status report
To print the picking list status report:
1. Specify for which Destination Type the status report is printed.
2. Enter selection parameters as required.
3. Use the Print Request Number field to define whether to print the request number in the report and press
Enter.
4. Select the Report format.
5. In the Save As dialog box, enter the File name and select the report type in the Save as type field.
3.2 173
Procurement, Purchasing, and Making Payments Epicor iScala User Guide
Chapter 8: Procurement, Purchasing, and Making Payments
iScala Purchase Control is used to manage the entire procurement process. Using purchase proposals, material
requirements can be analyzed in various modules in the system and organized into orders using the lowest cost, quickest
delivery, or standard supplier. Proposals can be generated in Purchase Control or in more specialized modules such as
Stock Control, Material Production Control, Project Management, Service Management, or Requisition Management.
Proposal quantities are calculated based on item reorder levels, economic order quantities, purchasing, or sales plans.
The application can also assess current inventory balances and transactions that have already been planned. If necessary,
a Request for Quotations can be generated for multiple suppliers. The orders can then be edited and adjusted, as
necessary, and converted to one or more purchase orders. Inventory can then be allocated for delivery to the appropriate
warehouse.
Purchase orders can be sent to suppliers using Electronic Data Interchange (requires Epicor Service Connect), mail, fax,
or other electronic means available. You can remind suppliers to confirm the order by sending them an Order
Confirmation Reminder.
Deliveries can be received prior to invoicing or at the same time. In the case of a delivery arriving prior to the invoice,
the shipment can be matched against the original purchase order for quality control. When the invoice arrives, it can
be reconciled with the actual delivery to make sure its value equates with what was received. Differences and additional
costs can be allocated, as necessary. Purchase Control will update Accounts Payable in the Purchase Ledger and update
inventory accounting in Stock Control when the matching process is complete. Historical purchase activity can be
analyzed in purchase statistics for future optimization and management of the process.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the Purchase Order management module.
Only the main setup records are described here. Refer to Chapter 2: Application Setup to learn how to set up
the Purchase Control and Purchase Ledger parameters. Parts of the Operation section may also contain setup
records if they are required for a specific scenario.
You may also need to adjust parameters within Company Setup. Some modules have global settings you define
through this administration program. Review the Application Help for more information.
Set Up Discounts and Requisitions
You can set the parameters, prices, and discounts for each supplier before you work with a Purchase Order. You
can then adjust the prices and discounts as needed.
Enter Supplier Prices and Discounts
Use this routine to enter and adjust prices and discounts in the stock file. If you adjust a price here, the price on
the stock record is not changed.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Miscellaneous > Prices/Discounts per Supplier > Enter Prices by Stock
Code
To enter supplier prices and discounts:
174 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Procurement, Purchasing, and Making Payments
1. Select the Supplier Code.
2. Enter the Stock Code for which you are entering supplier prices. Press F4 for a general query of the stock
items on file or ! to see the stock item prices entered for the supplier.
3. If the supplier uses a different stock code and supplier description for this item, enter it in the Supp lier
Stock Code and the Supp lier Description fields. As a
4. Enter a Remark, if necessary.
5. Enter the Supplier's pricing Currency Code. This currency must be recorded within the system Currency
File.
6. Enter the Price of the stock item in the supplier's currency.
7. Enter the Discount received from the supplier as a percentage, if any, as well as the dates for which it is
valid.
8. Enter the Delivery Time and the unit for the Delivery Time. The values available are D for days, W for
weeks, M for months, and Y for years.
9. Enter the Reorder Level for this supplier. Since this is equal to demand during the lead time plus any safety
stock that may be required, suppliers with a short delivery time usually have a lower order point. The default
comes from the stock file and can be automatically calculated in Stock Control.
10. Enter the Opt imal Purchase Q uanti ty for this supplier. Also known as the Economic Order Quantity, this
is an estimate only.
The default value comes from the stock file which can automatically be calculated in Stock Control.
11. Enter up to eight levels of QUANTITY DISCOUNTS received from the supplier. In the QTY field, enter the
minimum quantity required and the % DIS (discount) or a new fixed unit PRICE.If both are entered, the
fixed unit price is used.
12. Press Enter and confirm to update the prices.
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the Purchase Order and Purchase Ledger modules.
Each operation is represented as a scenario to help you go through the process from start to finish. If some setup
is required for the operation, it is also described in the section.
Purchase Proposals
A purchase order proposal is a system generated proposal advising the purchase of a certain amount of specific
products in a specified time frame at a pre-defined price. The proposal includes stock items whose stock balance
is below the re-order level. You can also include order lines from direct orders in the Sales Order module. Purchase
order proposals can be created by drop shipment, Stock Replenishment Planning (SRP), and Material Requirement
Planning (MRP). Refer to Application Help for more information.
3.2 175
Create a Purchase Order Proposal
This routine creates one proposal per supplier. The supplier is selected based on the parameters set when creating
the proposal.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Purchase Order Proposal > Create Purchase Order Proposal
To create a purchase order proposal:
1. Enter the number of selection criteria to modify, and press Enter.
2. Define the selection range for different criteria. Enter / to display more selection criteria. Enter S to save
selections used regularly. If necessary, enter L to load stored selection criteria. When all selection criteria
have been entered, enter 0 in the Enter Selection number field, and press Enter to go to the next screen.
3. Enter a percentage value in the Factor for Reorder Level field, if required. The actual Reorder Level will
be temporarily multiplied by this factor when compared to the current stock balance. For example, a factor
of 1.10 means stock items with a balance 10% over their reorder levelare included.
4. Enter Yes to only include direct orders and No to include all orders in the Only Direct Order to a Customer
field. This determines if the Sales Order module is included in the Purchase Proposal.
5. Enter Yes in the Delete Old Proposals? field to delete all earlier proposals in the order file before the new
proposal is calculated.
6. Select the Warehouse to consider for the proposal. Settings and current circumstances may be different,
depending on a particular location.
7. Enter Yes if the system should Check the Reorder Levels set in the stock file when creating the Proposal
or No if they should not be checked.
8. Enter Yes in the Use Budget Transactions field to check the purchase plan or detailed budget for the
stock item.
9. If the supplier prices and discounts are set, select a specific supplier for the proposal in the Supplier Select
Profile field.
10. Select which Order Number Counter series to use for the purchase orders created.
11. Enter Yes in the Merge Reservation Records field if you want to merge reservation records to one purchase
order line.
12. Enter Yes in the Make Purchase Order Proposal field to begin the calculation.
13. Select the Report format and click OK.

Note If selected, the routine can use the Stock Budget and account for the planned stock level
requirements. Set the Planning Weeks for the Purchasing parameter in the Purchase Order parameters
to indicate how far in advance the application should look.
Adjust a Purchase Proposal
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Purchase Order Proposal > Adjust Proposal
To adjust a purchase proposal:
176 3.2
1. Press F4 to select the Order Number of the purchase order proposal for adjustment.
2. Notice purchase proposals use order Type 0. This field cannot be changed.
3. Enter the Order Date of the purchase order. This field is automatically completed for existing orders but
can be changed.
4. Enter the Supplier code. This has been automatically entered, based on the supplier priority parameter
selected when the purchase order proposal was automatically created. This can be changed, if required.
5. Enter Other Quotation Suppliers codes, if required. You may want to send out a request for quotation
to other suppliers. All suppliers whose number is entered receive the same request for quotations as the
supplier above.
6. Enter the delivery address for the items in the Del/Add Cust Code field. This can be a Warehouse or a
Customer Code, in the case of direct orders or drop shipments.
7. Enter the supplier's reference name in the Supplier Ref field.
8. Enter the Supplier Sales Order Number and the Customer's Purchase Order Number, if available.
9. Enter the Delivery Date field for the order. Specific order lines can have alternative delivery dates, if
necessary.
10. Enter the Warehouse to which the order should be shipped, as well as the supplier's Shipping Address
it is coming from.
12. Enter accounting dimensions and press Enter.
13. Select Enter/Adjust Order Lines from the menu.
Enter/Adjust Order Lines
1. Adjust existing or add new Order Lines. The default information comes from the Purchase Planning
information in Stock Control, Supplier specific stock details, and Proposal Parameters used to create the
order. Use it as a base, and adjust as necessary.
2. Press Esc to save the changes and exit the routine.
Convert a Purchase Proposal
Use this routine to convert purchase order proposals to actual purchase orders. The order number is the same,
but the order type changes. The delivery date on each order line is taken from the purchase order header by
default, unless otherwise indicated on the order line. Warehouse details, delivery planning, and the values for
the purchase order quantity in the stock file are updated.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Purchase Order Proposal > Convert Proposal to Order
To convert a purchase proposal:
1. Select the Order Number to convert to an actual order.
3.2 177
2. Select which Order Type to convert the proposal to. Order types include normal orders, back orders with
delivery to your own warehouse, and direct orders with delivery to the customer.
3. Confirm or adjust the order's Delivery Date.
4. Select the Warehouse where the delivery is to be sent.
5. Select Yes at the OK to Convert? message to proceed and have the purchase proposal converted to a
purchase order.
Requisitions
When a Department within a company needs to obtain stock, office supplies or other consumables, they may
request the items they need by creating an internal Requisition (request).
The needed goods could be located in another Department or central Warehouse or may need to be ordered
from a Supplier. However, the person entering the Requisition does not need to know where the goods will come
from.
Newly created Requisitions should be authorized. During authorization, the manager can assign a Requisition
Type to each requisition line, thus determining whether it needs to be Purchase Ordered or fetched from existing
stock. The following Requisition Types are available:
Requisitions Types Description

0 Generic Requisition This is assigned to newly created Requisitions by default.
1 Normal Purchase Order If the goods are not in stock, the requisition can be
converted into a normal purchase order (type 1). A
normal purchase order requires a warehouse for
receiving the goods. Normal purchase orders imply that
the goods are taken into inventory and counted again.
2 Stock Transfer If the goods are held in stock and there is sufficient
quantity on hand, then they can be transferred to the
department warehouse from their original warehouse.
This transfer implies that the goods are moved from
one warehouse to another. These goods are still
considered as balance sheet inventory and are usually
counted again.
3 Direct Purchase Order If the goods are not in stock, the requisition can be
converted into a direct purchase order (type 3). Upon
invoicing, the requested goods will be expensed
according to the Purchase Ledger Automatic Accounting
Schedule. Direct purchase orders imply that the goods
are not taken into inventory or counted again. This
requisition type can be used for the requisition of office
supplies or other consumables as well.
4 Commissary Items If the goods are in stock but not registered in iScala,
the costs of recipe items can be transferred from one
location to another without moving the stock quantities
and balances.
5 Stock Issue If the goods are held in a warehouse and there is
sufficient quantity on hand, they can be issued to the
178 3.2
Requisitions Types Description

department. The issued goods will be expensed directly
to the requesting department with accounting according
to the Stock Accounting Matrix. An issue implies that
the goods leave a warehouse and are allocated to an
expense code in the General Ledger. These goods are
considered consumed and are not counted again.
After approval, the items on the requisition are converted to the chosen entity — a Purchase Order or a Direct
Purchase Order; or alternatively, the requisition can be directly fulfilled via a Stock Issue or Stock Transfer
transaction.
Different users involved in the requisition process may have different access levels. A level restricts Departments
for which a user can create Requisitions, the minimum and maximum amounts of a Requisition, Product Categories
which a user can requisition, whether a user is allowed to authorize Requisitions, and so on.
Requisition Management Setup
To set up requisitions:
1. Enter the number of the next requisition in the Next Requisition No field.
2. Define the Normal Fulfillment Time (in days). This is the offset used to calculate the default Delivery Date
from the Requisition Date.
3. Specify the Max Requisition Validity Period (in months) used during requisition entry.
4. Select Requisition Grouping Criteria.
5. In the Purchase Order Number Series field, enter the character that controls the purchase order numbering
when purchase orders are created from requisitions.
6. Enter Yes in the Requisition Line defaults to type 4 field if you want the line type to automatically change
to 4 when you enter stock items of status 4 of 9.
7. When the internal user opens the requisition for approval, current supplier and price values (defined in stock
item master card, warehouse information or supplier/stock prices) may differ from the supplier and price
defined in the requisition line. The Renew supplier and price in requisition parameter allows you to
define whether current values should override the values set in the requisition line.
8. The Automatic Requisition conversion during authorization parameter determines how the requisitions
of type 2, 4, and 5 are handled. It determines whether to use immediate conversion on requisition
authorization, or to do conversion in the Picking module (the transactions are created after reporting of
actual results).
9. Use the Create Picking Request when authorizing requisition? field to define whether to create a
picking request during authorization, or to create it manually using the Create Picking Request routine.
10. Use the Create allocations for Picking Request? parameter to determine whether to allocate batches
during the picking request creation.
11. Specify the next Requisition Picking List Number to use when printing or creating requisition picking lists.
12. Define priority for supplier selection in the Priorities Supp Selection in Requisitions field.
3.2 179
13. Press Enter to save the changes and move to the next screen. Then, press Esc several times to exit the
routine.
Set Up Departments
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Departments > Enter/Adjust Departments
To enter a department:
1. Enter a Department Code.
2. Select the Language and enter a Description for the new department.
3. Enter the department Warehouse. Press F4 or click ? to list the available warehouses.
4. Optionally, enter the Main Department for the new one.
5. Specify the Email Address, if any.
6. Enter the Accounting dimensions used for this department as apurchaser and press Enter to save the
changes.
Set Up Requisition Access Rights
To set up requisition access rights:
1. Enter the User Code and Department Code for which you want to authorize access to requisition.
2. Select the Product Category.
3. Select the Requisition Type to allow.
4. Select the Allow Access check box and set Authorisation Level.
5. Enter the Minimum Amount and Maximum Amount to allow.

Note You can enter * for User Code, Department Code, Product Category, or Requisition Type to
grant permission for all possible values in the corresponding field.
Enter Requisitions
Use this routine to enter, adjust, and delete individual requisitions and requisition lines.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Requisitions > Enter/Adjust Requisitions
1. Enter the Requisition Number. If a requisition with the same number already exists, it displays.
2. Enter the Department code.
3. Specify the Requisition Date. By default, the system date is used.
4. Enter the Delivery Date.
180 3.2
5. Optionally, specify the Pickup Time.
6. When you enter a Requisition Type, make sure it is authorized for the specified department.
7. Enter the Warehouse. The warehouse code you enter here is interpreted differently, depending on the
requisition type.
8. Press Enter to move to the requisition lines.
9. Complete the requisition lines as required. As you enter Requisition Lines, the application calculates and
shows the Estimated Cost per Unit for individual lines and the Total Amount of the entire Requisition.
Note
It is possible to create a requisition for a stock item not registered in the iScala database. The only
allowed Requisition Type in this case is Type 3 (Direct Purchase Order). To request non-inventory goods,
enter a period (.) instead of the stock code, and then type the goods description, quantity, and tentative
price. The price you specify here is only a guideline price. The final price will be determined and
confirmed upon conversion of the requisition to a purchase order, along with the supplier and
accounting information.
Authorize and Convert Requisitions
Use this routine to assign a specific Requisition Type and Authorization Status to previously entered Requisitions.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Requisitions > Authorize Requisition
1. Use selection criteria to specify the Requisition lines to process.
2. Use the Sort By Stock Code check box to display the requisition lines in stock code order. Otherwise, the
requisition lines display in order of entry. You can select/clear this check box when lines already display. In
this case, the grid will be resorted.
3. Click Select. The lines matching the criteria display in the grid below.
4. Modify the found lines as required.
5. After you adjust all required lines, click OK. A WHAT TO DO dialog box displays.
6. The Save changes check box is selected by default and all the adjustments you made are saved. If you do
not want to apply these adjustments, clear the check box.
7. Select the Start Conversion check box to initiate conversion for selected requisition lines.
8. Adjust the Issue\Transfer Date.
9. Use the Picking Sorting Order field to specify how requisition lines are sorted on the picking list. The
following options are available:
• 0 - Location sorting (Department, Warehouse, Bin, Alt Prod Group, Stock Code).
• 1 - Pick-up time sorting (Department, Warehouse, Delivery Date, Pickup Time, Requisition Number, Stock
Code).
• 2 - Requisition sorting (Department, Warehouse, Requisition Number, Requisition Line).
3.2 181
10. Click OK. Approved Requisitions which have been assigned a non-zero Requisition Type are converted to
Purchase Orders, Stock transactions, or General Ledger transactions.
Print Requisition Details
This report contains detailed printouts for specified Requisitions.

Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Requisitions > Requisition Report
1. Adjust the selection criteria for requisitions to be included in the report.
2. Use the Sort by Pickup and Sort by Stock Code fields to define the sort order.
3. Specify whether to Print Page Break. If you set this field to Yes, the report block of one header prints on
a separate page.
4. Define whether to Include printed requisitions in the report.
5. Specify whether to include requisitions Created from MRP/SRP Replenishment Proposals in the report.
6. Press Enter and select the Report format to view the report.
Note The Purchase Order > Reports folder contains a number of reports for converted requisitions
grouped according to the type of transaction generated by conversion. You can print the Requisition
Issue Report, Requisition Transfer Report, and Commissary Items Requisition Report to see the
transaction details.
Purchase Ordering, Delivery, and Invoicing
When you enter a Purchase Order for a supplier, you buy specific stock items from this supplier. You can monitor
orders placed to suppliers then inspect and receive them into stock in one step as you enter the supplier's invoice.
In the same way, you link a supplier's invoice to one or more purchase orders when you enter the invoice.
Enter/Adjust Purchase Orders
The Enter/Adjust Purchase Orders routine is essentially the same as the Adjust a Purchase Order Proposal routine
in the previous section.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Order Entry/Enquiries > Enter/Adjust Purchase Order
To enter a purchase order:
1. Enter information in the fields as described in the Enter Purchase Order Proposal section. Make sure the
order Type value is correct.
2. When the Menu window displays, select Enter/Adjust Order Lines .
3. Select the STOCK CODE of the item to purchase.

Note It is possible to purchase items for which no item master exists by using a period (.) as the first
character of the item code. The application labels these items as non- stock items. They display in
statistics but create no stock records.
182 3.2
4. Enter the Q UANTI TY to order. If 0 is entered here, you can change the Del. Date REQUESTED and the Del.
Date COMMITTED delivery dates agreed upon with the supplier, as well as the Ordered Quantity.
5. Enter the PRICE of the stock item being purchased. Press Esc to go back one field, and enter any Supplier
DISC OUNT which may apply to the order line.
Note To adjust a previously entered order line, go to the Line Item field, and insert the desired order
line number. To enquire a particular stock item's details and information, enter ! in the Stock Code
field.
Enquire Purchase Orders
Select the range of purchase orders you want to print.

Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Print Documents > Printout of Purchase Order
To print a purchase order:
1. Select the range of Purchase Orders to print using the Selection Criteria. This can be done by Order
Number, Supplier , Purchaser, or Order Type. It is possible to print more than one order at a time.
2. Select whether the purchase orders that have already been printed should be printed again in the Reprint
field.
3. Specify if purchase orders Created from MRP/SRP Replenishment Proposals should be included in the
report.
4. Enter Yes in the Separate file per order field if you want to create a new file or a new email for each
selected order. If this parameter is set to No, consecutive orders printed using the same template will be
included in the same file or email.
5. Press Enter to print selected purchase orders. After an order is printed, it is flagged as printed and omitted
from the next report, unless otherwise indicated.
Enter an Order Confirmation
Use this routine to confirm orders received from the supplier.

Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Deliveries/Invoices > Enter Order Confirmation
To enter an order confirmation:
1. Select the Purch ase Order to enter a confirmation. Use the F4 key to display orders by Purchase Order
number.
2. Enter the Delivery Date and press Enter.
3. Notice a Dialog window displays. There are several options for updating the Committed Delivery Date for
the order. With L, the dates for the lines are updated with the dates that already exist on each line. With
O, the dates for the lines are updated with the date that currently exists on the order header. If you enter
the line number, for example, 010, each line can be updated individually. Press Enter to confirm a selection.
4. If lines are updated individually, enter the Confirmed delivery date for that line in the DELDATE field. Press
Esc to move the cursor to the previous field, and change the Ordered Quantity.
3.2 183
5. When the dialog window displays, enter an asterisk * to update and exit.
Enter a Delivery Note
Use this routine to enter delivery details when you receive a delivery from a supplier. The stock file, warehouse
file, and stock transactions file are updated. You can postpone this routine until invoice entry, but entering delivery
notes makes delivering orders easier without risking negative stock items balances. Once a delivery note is entered
in iScala, it is called a goods received note (GRN).
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Deliveries/Invoices > Enter Delivery Note
To enter a delivery note:
1. Select the Purch ase Order for which you are receiving the goods.
2. Press Enter to get the current Goods Received Note No.
3. Enter the Delivery Date.
4. Optionally, enter the Supplier's Delivery Note number, and press Enter.
5. Enter A or + to accept all lines. If it is a partial delivery, enter the order line number to receive delivery for.
6. If the order is delivered, line by line, confirm the quantity was RECEIVED. It is possible to enter partial
deliveries.
Enter Supplier Invoices
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Deliveries/Invoices > Enter Invoices
To enter supplier invoices
1. Select the Supp lier Code for the invoice.
2. Enter the Supplier’s Invoice No.
3. Enter any Reference. This will print on the payment instructions.
4. Enter the Inv oice Date and the payment Due Date.
5. Enter the scheduled Disc ount Date for cash discounts if an early payment is made. In the next field, enter
the percentage discount, if applicable. Enter 000000 in the date field if cash discounts are not offered.
6. Enter the Book Entry Date in the B-E Date field.
7. Enter the Amount of the Invoice in the Supplier's currency. Press Esc to change currencies, otherwise, the
exchange rate will be used.
8. Enter the Tax Code that should be applied. Use the F4 key to display the current Tax Codes available. The
Tax Amount is calculated automatically. Enter Yes if there is any W ith hold ing Tax. If Yes, enter the
amount in the next field.
9. In the window that displays, select the Accept Entry option.
184 3.2
10. At the top of the screen, the total amount of the invoice displays. When the Menu window appears, choose
Entry on Purchase Order to match the invoice against a particular purchase order.
11. Select the purchase order to match against the Invoice and confirm the Delivery Date when the goods
were received into inventory. The current date displays by default.
Note It is also possible to enter the delivery of the order at the same time as entering an Invoice with
this function.
12. Enter the supplier’s Delivery Note number, if not entered separately.
13. If matching the invoice to a specific delivery of a purchase order, enter DN for the match to be done according
to what was actually delivered.
14. Select the Delivery Note to use. Repeat this action for multiple deliveries.
15. Enter * to update. Press Esc twice to return to the Invoice allocation options window.
Select the Updating option if satisfied with the matching process. Press Esc to cancel what was just entered
if it is not correct. Updating can only be done when the full amount of the invoice has been allocated.
Depending on the size of the organization, supplier invoices can be entered directly into the Purchase Ledger.
Enter Unauthorized Invoices
Unauthorized invoices are invoices not yet accepted that may not have been matched against the original purchase
order or delivery note. They are shown separately on reports. The entry of unauthorized invoices may or may not
generate a transaction, depending on your purchase order parameters setup.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Invoices/Journal > Enter Unauthorized Invoices
To enter unauthorized invoices:
1. Enter the Supp lier Code.
2. Enter the Invoice No. that displays on the Supplier Invoice.
3. Optionally enter a Reference.
4. After entering the Inv oice Date, enter the system prompted Due Date, according to the payment term
set for that supplier.
5. Set a discount on early payment by setting a Disc ount Date and a % (percentage). The application
automatically calculates and books the amounts based on the date of payment.
6. Notice, by default, the invoice Amount displays in the supplier's currency.
7. Change the TAX Code and/or the TAX Amount, if necessary. Multiple tax rates can also be entered. When
the Option window displays, select Miscellaneous.
8. Modify payment information such as the Pay ment Meth od, Payment Priority, or Author ization By Code.
3.2 185
9. Select Accept Entry, or go back to the invoice entry by selecting one of the available options. The Recurring
Payments option allows you to define a payment schedule.
Authorize an Invoice
Use the Enter Supplier Invoices routine to authorize an invoice. The status of the invoice will change from
unauthorized to authorized, and an invoice transaction will be generated. The transaction generated with the
unauthorized invoice (dependent on system configuration) will be reversed.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Invoices/Journal > Enter Supplier Invoices
To authorize an invoice:
1. Enter the Supp lier Code.
2. Select the Invoice No. to convert from an unauthorized to an authorized status. Unauthorized invoices are
marked with a U sign in the lookup window.
3. Notice the application assigns the invoice a B ook E ntry Date and a Trans action No. Validate this
information by pressing PgDn. Modify the invoice information in the relevant fields.
4. When the Menu window displays, select Enter Transactions to specify the nature of the expense.
5. Enter the debit Acc ount for the expense (unless the account was already defined in the Supplier file).
6. Enter the relevant Accounting Dimension Codes.
7. Enter (or validate) the AMOUNT and the Transaction TEXT.
8. Confirm the entry by pressing Enter. Accounts Payable is immediately updated. The accounting transaction
is kept in a Purchase Ledger Invoice Journal until it is updated to the General Ledger.
Invoice Periodically
Use the Enter Supplier Invoices routine if you wish to allocate an expense across several accounting periods. (This
procedure follows the procedure above.)
1. On the second invoice screen, enter Transactions and enter a * in the TEXT field.
2. Enter the Account for allocation .
3. To make the text of monthly transactions different from the original invoice transaction, enter Transaction
Text.
4. Enter the Allocation for current year periods. This can go across several years.
5. Notice the application calculates periodical amounts automatically. If required, they can be manually
overwritten. Click OK to validate the allocation and then press Enter to validate the invoice. This will update
the Accounts Payable. The accounting transaction will be found in the Purchase Ledger Invoice Journal prior
to being updated to the General Ledger.
186 3.2
Additional Purchase Costs
All stock item costs are defined by a cost type code. Cost type examples include freight, importation fees, duty,
or dispatch. Cost type codes contain two characters and are set up in the code file. Use this routine to allocate
additional purchase costs to a purchase order.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Deliveries/Invoices > Enter Invoices, Accept Entry, Allocation of Costs
on Purchase Orders
To allocate additional costs:
1. Enter the Cost Type.
2. Enter how to allocate costs in the Allocation Basis field. The allocation basis details in the stock file (weight,
volume, or quantity) determine how much is charged to each stock item.
3. Enter the Amount in the original currency. This field is only used when the cost is charged in a foreign
currency. The value is only used to calculate the cost in the accounting currency on the next line.
4. Enter the Amount in the accounting currency.
Modify an Invoice
Use the following routines to adjust an existing invoice. The application does not allow you to adjust the invoice
amount.
To adjust it, use the Enter a Credit Note routine.
Change the Invoice Date, Due Date, and Payment Information
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger> Supplier File > Other Supplier Files > Adjust Supplier Invoice
To change the invoice date, due date, and payment information:
1. Enter the Supplier Code.
2. Select the Invoice No. to adjust.
3. The invoice information displays. Adjust information in the required fields and press Enter.
Change the Book Entry Date, Payable Account, and Dimensional
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger> Supplier File > Other Supplier Files > Adjust Ledger Entry
To change the book entry date, payable account, and dimensional codes:
1. Enter the Supplier Code.
3. The invoice information displays. Adjust information in the required fields and press Enter.
3.2 187
Print or Update the Invoice Journal
Individual invoice transactions accumulated during the previous routines and posted to the Purchase Ledger are
verified and posted in the General Ledger when using the Print Invoice Journal routine.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Invoices/Journal > Print Invoice Journal
To print or update the invoice journal:
1. In the Do you want to change Invoice/Transactions? dialog box, click No to continue or Yes to change
transactions.
2. In the OK for checking, sorting and printout? dialog box, click Yes to continue or No to return to the
previous routine.
3. Enter the Company Code and the User Code.
4. On the next screen, select the Report Format to use and click OK.
5. View the report and press Esc.
6. In the Is Re-printing of Journal Required? dialog box, click No to continue or Yes to repeat the printing.
7. In the OK to Update File dialog box, click Yes to continue or No to retain the invoice file for later posting.
8. In the Purchase Ledger Invoice file will be emptied as the General Ledger is Updated OK? dialog
box, click Yes to update the General Ledger.
Create a Purchase Order and Link It to a Contract
When you create a purchase order, the application automatically searches for existing contracts with the same
item, so you can link the purchase order to the contract.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Order > Order Entry/Enquiries > Enter/Adjust Purchase Order
To link a purchase order to the contract:
1. Enter a purchase order, adjust all necessary data, and move to order lines entry.
2. Enter the item Stock Code, Qty and adjust the Price if necessary.
3. Press Enter. If there are contracts for the same stock item, the dialog box View list of available contracts?
displays. Click Yes.
4. Select the contract to link to the purchase order and click OK.
188 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Lead Time Management
Chapter 9: Lead Time Management
Lead Time Management (LTM) can be used in different iScala modules, such as Sales Order, Service Order, Contract
Management, and others where sophisticated planning or order fulfillment time is required. LTM allows you to calculate
lead time for order fulfillment processes, control the processes via business events associated with activities, give alerts
when the actual process is not going according to plan, and make the overall process more visible to all parties concerned.
Set Up Business Transaction Types For LTM
To start setting up Lead Time Management (LTM) parameters, enter a business transaction type (BTT).
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Lead Time Management > Enter/Adjust
Business Transaction
To enter a BTT:
1. Enter the Business Transaction Type Code.
2. Specify the full Business Transaction Type Name.
3. Select a Language for this business transaction type.
4. Click Update.
Enter Lead Time Elements
Each business transaction type consists of a number of elementary operations, or Lead Time elements (LTE).
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Lead Time Management > Enter/Adjust LT
Element
To enter an LTE:
1. Select a BTT Code.
2. Select the Module where this LT element will be used. Select Sales Management to use this LT element
for contracts.
3. Enter the LTE Name.
4. Select a Milestone Type.

The following milestone types are available for Sales Management:
Milestone Types Description

MS Start This milestone contains the start date of the action plan and has a duration
of zero days. This milestone is system- defined and is not visible to users.
This is actually the start date of the first element on the current action plan.
3.2 189
Lead Time Management Epicor iScala User Guide
Milestone Types Description

MS Available (OR) This milestone defines the date when the goods are available in the
warehouse. The duration of this milestone can change depending on the
LT rules.
MS Shipment Date (OR) This milestone defines the date and time when goods are to be shipped
to the customer.
MS Delivery Date (OR) This milestone defines the date and time when goods are to be delivered
to the customer.
MS Supplier Shipment Date This milestone defines the proposed delivery date for suppliers in case of
(OR) drop shipment.
MS Finish This milestone contains the finish date of the action plan and has a duration
of zero days. This milestone is system-defined and is not visible to users.
This is actually the end date of the last element on the current action plan.
You can also create user-defined milestones with a unique code and name. You can use them in existing
Lead Time schedules to keep the schedules up to date according to the actual movement of goods. A
user-defined milestone can be used just like a standard milestone on a Lead Time element. You can only
use a user-defined milestone once on an action plan, but an action plan can include any number of
user-defined milestones with unique codes.
5. Select a Language for this LTE.
6. Click Update. The LTE you entered moves to the grid on top of the screen.
7. Enter other LTEs if necessary and then Exit the routine.
Enter A Lead Time Rule
Enter a Lead Time rule to define the duration for each LTE.
Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Lead Time Management > Enter/Adjust LT
Rule
To create an LT rule:
1. Select a BTT Code.
2. Select an LTE #.
3. Select a Definition Level. The available options include Standard, Stock Item, Product Group, Sales LTM
Group, and Purchase LTM Group.
4. Select a Key Type.
5. Click Durations. The Enter/Adjust LTR Durations screen displays.
6. Enter the LTR #.
7. Select a Delivery Variation.
8. Enter the Duration and Time unit.
190 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Lead Time Management
9. Select a Calendar Owner.
10. Click Update.
11. Click Exit to return to the previous screen.
12. Click Update.
Select a BTT for Sales Management
The next step is to select a BTT for Sales Management.

Main Menu Path: Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Lead Time Management > LTM Modules Setup
> Sales Management
To link a contract type to a BTT:
1. Enter the line number.
2. Enter a sales Order Type.
3. Enter a Delivery Rule. Enter * to use all delivery rules.
4. Enter the Sign of quantity. The options include +, -, or * for both signs.
5. Select a Regular BTT Code to link to this order type. This BTT is used to calculate the stock balance date
and each expected receipt.
6. Select an Extended BTT Code. This BTT is used to calculate the planning horizon date.
7. Click Update.
Activate The Delivery Milestone
Activate the delivery milestone in sales order parameters to be able to use LTM for sales orders.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters
To activate the delivery milestone:
1. Click Next until the DOCUMENT/INVOICING SWITCHES screen displays.
2. In the Delivery Time Planning field, enter 2 to use LTM-based stock planning.
3. Enter the Milestone related to the Delivery Date. Use one of the LT elements you defined earlier.
3.2 191
Drop Shipment Epicor iScala User Guide
Chapter 10: Drop Shipment
Drop shipment is an ordering technique where goods are shipped directly to a customer from a supplier, without the
need to pass through a warehouse first. Invoicing is normal (the supplier invoices you, and you invoice the customer),
so the commercial relationship does not change. This technique reduces the need to hold stock and ensures goods
arrive at the customer as quickly as possible. With drop shipment, the sales order directly creates the purchase order.
Related sales order tracking information is noted in the purchase order, and once delivered, it can be automatically
allocated and delivered to the customer.
The drop shipment functionality is available for normal sales orders (type 1) and back-orders (type 4), as well as during
the conversion of quotations to normal sales orders. Drop shipment is not compatible with the Available to Promise
(ATP) functionality.
Set Up the Sales Order Drop Shipment Template
When the application generates a purchase order from a sales order, it automatically updates information
according to existing field mappings. Mappings for some basic fields are controlled by built-in iScala business
logic and cannot be changed. You can create a drop shipment template to set up additional mappings.
Main Menu Path: Sales Order > Miscellaneous > Drop Shipment Template
To set up a drop shipment template:
1. Enter the Template type. The available options include:
Template Type Description

0 The default template is used when no specialized
template is found.
1 A template for purchase orders is used when
purchase orders are created for delivery from your
company’s warehouse.
2 A template for drop shipment is used to initialize a
purchase order for direct delivery to a customer.
2. Select the TARGET Table Name. This table contains the target purchase order field.
3. Enter the TARGET Field Name. This is the target purchase order field.
4. In the SOURCE Sales order fields field, enter the corresponding field on the sales order.
5. Click Back to exit the routine.
192 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Suppliers and Accounts Payable
Chapter 11: Suppliers and Accounts Payable
The Purchase Ledger module combines a comprehensive database of supplier information that supports detailed
accounts payables, authorization routines, accrued expenses, prepayments, payments in multiple outputs, automatic
transaction booking, and tax reporting. The module also contributes data to routines in other parts of the application
including purchase ordering, commitments accounting, Stock Requirement Planning, booking of Costs to Projects, and
so on. The Purchase Ledger module supports payable management for supplier invoicing in multiple currencies that
require multiple VAT or withholding tax rates as well as trading from one to many shipping addresses. An automatic
payment routine generates payment proposals, converts proposals into payment notices in any format, layout, and
currency while editing statements, payment forecasts, and aged balances based on overdue transactions.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the Purchase Ledger module. Only the main
define through this administration program. Review the application help for more information.
Suppliers and Trading Terms
When you enter suppliers, you provide information such as name, address, phone number, and payment
information, along with the delivery method and language to use for documents you send. You can create a
number of templates to assist in entering suppliers.
Note Use the Common Purchase Ledger parameter within Company Setup to handle suppliers and invoices
from subsidiary companies into a central company. The Common Ledger is only available from Company
01. Subsidiary companies can process normal transactions with the exception of payments that must be
handled from Company 01 when the Common Ledger is used.
The following supplier types are available in the application:
Supplier Types Description

Standard Supplier This supplier type has all functionality available that relates to purchasing and
accounts payable: orders, invoices, statements and enquiries, payment, and so on.
Temporary Supplier This supplier type has the same functionality as a Standard Supplier but can also
use a mass deletion routine (Purchase Ledger > Supplier File > Other Supplier Files
> Deletion (Miscellaneous) > Delete Temporary Suppliers routine).
Draft Supplier This supplier is not available for ordering and invoicing; only adjustment and
enquiring is available. A Draft Supplier can be turned into a Standard Supplier.
3.2 193
Suppliers and Accounts Payable Epicor iScala User Guide
Enter Suppliers
Use this routine to enter new suppliers and adjust existing suppliers' details in the supplier file.
Before you enter suppliers, consider how to set up the supplier codes. You can enter a maximum of 10
alphanumeric characters for a supplier code. Supplier codes should be easily remembered and found (for example,
standardized definitions and abbreviations) as well as facilitate searching, sorting, and using report producing
procedures.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Supplier File > Enter Suppliers
To enter suppliers:
1. Select an existing Supplier or enter a new supplier.

Note If suppliers share certain unchanging information (for example, Tax, Currency, or Accounting),
you can implement a standard supplier to facilitate work while you enter suppliers into the application.
2. Select Main Details in the option window that displays.
3. Enter a unique supplier identifier in the Global ID field.
4. Notice the supplier’s Name can differ from its Search Name.
5. Enter the Cmpl Name if it is too long to fit in the Search Name field.
6. Enter the required information in the Address, City, Postcode and Country Code fields.
7. Enter the name of a contact person in the Reference field. This name displays when you enter purchase
orders and on purchase documents.
8. Complete other fields such as Tel No., TAX Reg. No., Substitution Reg. No., Municipal Reg. No, State
Reg. No., or Remark which are used for information purposes only or may be printed on purchase
documents.
9. Select Payment in the option window that displays.
Set Up Suppliers Payment Method
To set up suppliers payment method:
1. Determine the Payment Method for Invoices and Credit Notes. This identifies how to pay the supplier -
manually or automatically (cheque printing, bank transfer) – in addition to the format. The payment method
can be set for individual invoices.
A series of Payment Methods are defined for settling accounts payable. Examples of available payment
methods include electronic transfer to Postal and Bank Giro, cheque printing, and so on.
2. In the Paym. Priority field, enter a payment priority for the supplier (0-9) which is used when printing
payment proposals. You can adjust the payment method in the invoices entering routine.
3. Enter the Overdue Interest per year charged by the supplier each day for overdue payments.
4. Enter a code by which the supplier identifies a company in the Customer Code field which can print on
purchase documents.
194 3.2
5. Complete the rest of the Payment information fields as required. When finished, select Factoring/Billing
in the option window that displays.
How to Use a Factoring Company
If the supplier uses a factoring company, here's how to define theat company:
To use a factoring company:
1. Enter the company Name.
2. Specify the Billing Code that determines the billing terms.
3. Define the Date Shifting Method.
4. When finished, select Codes in the option window.
Enter Codes for the Supplier
To enter codes for the supplier
1. Enter the supplier Category which is used across the Purchase Ledger to sort payment proposals, statistic
reports, suppliers' balances, and so on.
2. Enter the Import Code for the supplier.
3. Define the code for supplier organization (0-9 or A) in the Organis. Type field.
4. Enter the Origin Date for the supplier.
5. For countries that use this tax system, specify the With-h tax %, With-h tax code, and Tax District. The
application automatically calculates the tax amount to deduct from the invoice payment.
6. Enter the supplier's Currency Code and Language Code for external documents.
7. Enter the Payment Terms.
8. If the supplier is a Supplier of Goods, assign default Delivery Terms and a Delivery Method. You can
change these for individual purchase orders.
9. If the supplier is also a customer in the application, enter the Scala Cust. Code. For supplier payments, the
application checks due amounts from the Sales Ledger and displays them in the payment proposal.
Note You must first define purchase ledger codes, payment terms, delivery terms, and delivery
methods before you enter a supplier. Review Chapter 2: Application Setup for more information about
these codes.
10. Define the supplier's Local TAX and whether a Cash Method of Tax Accounting is applicable.
Note
Taxes are entered or calculated when you enter a supplier invoice. You can manage taxes in two ways
- the cash method or the accruals method. With the cash method, the tax for an invoice is entered in
a clearing account until the full invoice amount is paid. At this point, the tax is transferred to the
3.2 195
account for tax input. With the accruals method, the full tax amount is handled on only one occasion
- invoice entry. The amount is then transferred directly to the account for tax input. You can also print
tax reports from the Purchase Ledger, relating either to tax transactions in the Purchase Ledger or to
all tax transactions in the application.
11. Enter the required information in the rest of the fields and press Enter.
12. Select Accounting in the option window that displays.
Enter Accounting Information
To add accounting information:
1. Define the Automatic Accounting Code. This enables you to generate different accounting entries for
different suppliers or combinations of suppliers and stock items.
2. Enter accounts and dimensions for the supplier. For example, use the Account field to define the supplier's
accounts payable account that is used by default in the invoices entry procedure.
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the Purchase Ledger module. Each operation is
represented as a scenario to help you go through the process from start to finish. If some setup record is required
for the operation, it is also described in the section.
Based on your settings, you can choose whether to generate transactions with unauthorized invoices. If
unauthorized invoices are included, the accrued debit account is defined in the Supplier File. The accrued credit
and VAT accounts come from the Purchase Ledger Automatic Accounting Schedule. The transaction will be
reversed at the time the invoice is authorized.
For more information on invoice entry and authorization, review the Invoicing and Payments section in Chapter
8: Procurement, Purchasing, and Making Payments.
Enter a Supplier Invoice/Credit Note
Within the application, you can enter credit notes and supplier invoices or reverse existing ones.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Invoices/Journal > Enter Supplier Invoices or Enter Credit Notes
To enter supplier invoices and credit notes not yet entered in the Purchase Control module:
1. Enter the supplier code in the Supp. Code field.
2. If this is the reverse of an existing invoice, press F4 and select an invoice in the Invoice No. field.
3. Confirm the reverse of the original invoice as well as the number for the credit note and press Enter to
validate.
196 3.2
4. The application date displays by default in the Inv. Date and BE Date fields; if you need, you can change
to an earlier date.
5. Notice the invoice Amount is automatically reversed.
6. Reverse the Debit side of the transaction and press Enter to validate.
This updates Accounts Payable. The accounting transaction can be found in the Purchase Ledger Invoice
Journal until it is updated to the General ledger.
Enter Manual Payments
There are several ways to handle manual payments to suppliers:

• Book an invoice and a credit note in the invoices entry routine and match them in the payments entry routine.
• Book an invoice in the invoices entry routine and an advanced payment in the payments entry routine; then,
match them in the payments entry routine.
• Book an invoice in the invoices entry routine and a promissory note in the Promissory Notes module if installed;
next, match them in the payments entry routine.
• Book an advanced payment in the payments entry routine and book an invoice with the same number in the
invoices entry routine; the invoice will be automatically marked as paid.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Enter Payments
To enter manual payments:
1. Once you enter the BEDATE and the document number, if specified, the account mode displays unless the
journal code linked to an account was specified. If this is the case, the transaction cannot be balanced and
the balance difference automatically posts to this account.
2. Enter the account to withdraw the payment from in the Account field.
3. Define the accounting dimensions linked with the account.
4. Enter the payment transaction line amount in the Amount field. Use a plus (+) and a minus (-) to enter
positive and negative amounts respectively.
5. Enter Text up to 25 characters for the invoice transaction line to print in journals and transaction lists.
6. Once you enter the account mode transaction line, the transaction line type will automatically change to
the supplier/invoice mode.
Note To use the supplier/invoice mode at the beginning of the operation, enter an asterisk (*) in the
ACC field to change to the supplier/invoice mode transaction line entry.
7. Enter the code for the supplier whose payment you are entering in the Supplier Code field.
8. Define the Invoice Number.
9. The Currency Code field displays the code for the invoice currency or supplier currency for advanced
payments. To adjust the payment currency, press Esc or the up arrow in the Amount field.
10. The invoice/credit note amount you enter in the invoices/credit notes entry routine displays in the appropriate
currency by default in the Amount field, which you can adjust.
3.2 197
11. The discount you enter in the invoices/credit notes entry routine displays by default in the Disc/Rate field,
which you can adjust. The posted invoice amount is the paid amount in the previous field plus this discount
amount.
12. The Local Currency Amount field displays the default amount paid by the supplier. You can adjust this
value for currency payments if the currency codes allow exchange rate adjustments. The amount you enter
in this field automatically adjusts the exchange rate in the Disc/Rate field.
13. Press Enter to confirm the payment. The payment immediately updates Accounts Payable, for example,
invoices paid in full are removed. The accounting transaction is kept in a Payment Journal until it is updated
to the General Ledger.
Note The application can handle multiple currencies, and payments can be made in any of the
currencies in the Currency file. You can also use the Revalue Purchase Ledger routine to revalue the
Purchase Ledger to current exchange rates.
Create or Adjust an Automatic Payment Proposal
The application automates suppliers' payments. Through a number of steps, the application offers a secure way
to sort due invoices, authorize payments, create a payment file, and generate payment transactions.
When you create an automatic payment proposal, the application selects invoices to include in the proposal and
uses an algorithm which considers two goals:
• Optimization of the credit period for the company. If the due date is not an actual, an invoice is not selected.
• Optimization of the discounts granted by supplier (maximization of cash discounts). If the cash discount date
is an actual, an invoice is selected.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Automatic Payments
To create an automatic payment proposal:
1. When the option window displays, select Create Payment Proposal.
2. Enter the last boundary Due Date for invoices to include in the automatic payment proposal. The system
date displays by default but you can adjust it. Invoices with a due date before this date are included in the
payment proposal.
3. Enter the earliest boundary due date for invoices to include in the automatic payment proposal in the
Payment Date field.
4. Specify the minimum and maximum amount for invoices to include in the automatic payment proposal in
the Min . Invoice Amount and Max. Amount fields.
5. Enter the payment method range to create an automatic payment proposal in the Payment Method field.
6. Specify the currency code range for foreign currency payment methods to use for overseas payment notices
in the Currency Code No. field. The payment proposal will only include invoices in the specified currencies.
7. Enter the range of suppliers whose invoices to include in the automatic payment proposal in the Supplier
Code field.
8. Define the supplier category code range for the suppliers to include in the automatic payment proposal in
the Category field.
198 3.2
9. Set the rules for sales ledger credits and payment currency in the Use Sales Ledger Credits and Payment
Currency fields.
10. Enter the code of the currency in which payments should be drawn in the Payment Currency Code field.
11. Specify the Due Date for Credit Amounts and the Book Entry Date.
12. Define the range for the accounts payable specified for the invoice in the Account range field and press
Enter.
13. On the Accounting Dimensions sheet, enter the range of the accounting dimensions specified for the
invoice and press Enter.
14. Select the document format.
Adjust an Automatic Payment Proposal
You can adjust a proposal based on cash flow or other purchase-related feedback.
To adjust an automatic payment proposal:
1. When the option window displays, select Adjust Payment Proposal.
2. Define the code of the supplier whose invoice you want to adjust in the Supplier Code field.
4. Modify the Amount To Pay and the Cash Discount if necessary.
5. Set the Pay Blocked parameter and press Esc to validate the changes.
Note The Payment Proposal can be justified and printed (Reprint Payment Proposal) as many times
as required until the payments are updated.
Generic Bank Interface Setup
Generic Bank Interface is a set of user-defined document templates and data processing instructions. This feature
gives you the capability to set up document layouts for automatic payment procedures according to bank
requirements. iScala has some predefined payment methods that you can easily restore anytime, even after
deletion.
During Generic Bank Interface Setup, you define new output bank payment transfer documents and files without
programming for each new bank interface.
Enter a New Payment Method
During the setup process you can create and edit your specific payment methods with different document
templates for different types of payment methods. You are also allowed to define how to filter and group output
lines with sub headers.
To enter a new payment method:
3.2 199
1. Select the Set up generic bank interface option from the menu and click OK.
2. In the Generic Bank Interface Setup dialog box, select Enter/Adjust Payment Method and click OK.
3. Enter the Payment method code you want to create or select an existing one to edit.
4. Enter the Payment method name .
5. For standard payment methods, enter the DLL name without the path and extension in the Menu Name
field. For custom methods, leave this field empty.
6. In the Position of account number in PL AAS field, enter the position number in the automatic accounting
schedule for the automatic payment account number to use for the payment method.
7. Specify the type of payment (local or overseas) you want to adjust in the Domestic/Overseas payment
field.
8. Use the Cheques printing field to define whether the cheque should be printed or sent in an electronic
form.
9. Enter the status of the payment method in the Status of activity field.
10. Use the Type of usage parameter to select the usage of this method for different payment transactions.
11. Enter Yes in the Keep in Payment ledger field if you want to note Payments in the Payment Ledger for
further reconciliation with the bank statement.
12. Press Enter to save the changes and move to the next screen. Then, press Esc several times to exit the
routine.
Set Up Filtering and Sorting Rules
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Automatic Payments, Set up generic
bank interface, Set Up Selection-Sorting of Reports, Adjust selection/sorting description
To adjust selection and sorting rules, create or select the desired selection item:
1. In the Payment Method field, press F4 or click ? to select the available payment method code.
2. Enter a new selection code in the Selection field.
3. Enter the Selection Name and Selection Description.
4. Use the Line, Field, Low Limit, and Upper Limit fields to create a set of fields that should be in the report.
On the system window, these fields are presented as lines, representing single fields with defined range
values from different tables.
5. 5. Now, set up data sorting. Press Enter in the blank Line field to move to the Sorting screen.
6. 6. Use the Line and Field fields to select fields by which you want to sort report data.
7. Press Enter in the empty Line field to save the changes.
200 3.2
Enter a Prepayment Document
The Enter Prepayment Document routine safely issues prepayments to suppliers and generates accounting entries,
all at once.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Enter/Print Prepayment Doc. > Enter
Payment Document
To enter a prepayment document:
1. Enter the supplier Code.
2. Define the Name of the payment order recipient.
3. In the Document field, enter the code for the payment order's layout which is defined in the payment order
parameters.
4. In the Contr. field, enter the contract number for the payment order or any other reference.
5. Specify a reason for the prepayment in the Spec. field and press Enter or PgDn to go to the next screen.
6. Specify the currency code in the Curr. Code field.
7. Define the Date.
8. Define the Cheque Amount.
9. Notice the Account comes from the Supplier File prepayment account. Enter Accounting Dimension Codes,
if necessary, and press Enter to update the Prepayment.
Update a Prepayment
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Enter/Print Prepayment Doc. > Print
& Update Documents
The following are the options available when the option window displays:
1. Document Printing - Print the Cheque or Bank Transfer form in a predefined format.
2. Print Payment List - Print an internal control document for tracking and reconciling outgoing prepayments.
3. Update Files - Validate the payment list that was previously printed and sent. The Purchase Ledger will be
updated and a prepayment transaction created.
4. Document Parameters - You can define up to 10 different Prepayment Layouts. For each layout, you can
select the prepayment Currency, the Bank Account and payment method to use, and whether to apply and
account for any transfer fees.
3.2 201
Other Purchase Ledger Routines
This section describes additional purchase ledger routines.
Revalue the Purchase Ledger
You can revalue Purchase Ledger currency transactions using the exchange rates for a specified date and post
the profit/loss transactions to the General Ledger.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Special Utilities > Revaluate Purchase Ledger
To revalue the Purchase Ledger:
1. Define the Per Date. Transactions with a Book Entry Date prior to the Per Date are included in the
revaluation. The system date displays by default.
2. Notice the exchange rate used is set for the Currency Date. The system date displays by default.
3. Enter the Book-Entry Date for the revaluation transaction. The system date displays by default.
4. Enter the interval of Currency Codes to take into account in the revaluation.
5. Select the report format, view the report, and press Esc.
6. When prompted, click Yes to accept the revaluation and generate transactions. The application asks you
to confirm a second time.
Revaluation transactions automatically post to the Purchase Ledger Payment Journal prior to being updated
to the General Ledger.
Recreate Statistics
Typically used at period and year-end closing, the zero statistics routine clears turnover and profit statistics in the
Supplier file.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Miscellaneous > Special Utilities > Zero Statistics
To recreate statistics:
1. Enter Yes in the Zero Period Statistics or Zero Yearly Statistics fields.
2. When the prompt OK to Clear? displays, press Yes to continue.

The application recalculates the statistics based on the year date interval and period date interval defined
in Company Setup.
202 3.2
balances available in the General Ledger. You can run these reports whenever you need.
Balance Reports
Accounts Payable reports are available with various levels of detail. Printed reports include unauthorized invoices,
paid or unpaid items, payment blocked invoices, and so on. You can also access Balance Lists for each Accounting
Dimension to reconcile Accounts Payable with the General Ledger. The Balance Lists can show details or a summary
only.
Create a Detailed Printout
The detailed balance list contains all supplier invoices and information about withholding taxes.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Balance Reports > Purchase Ledger > Detailed Printout
To create a detailed printout:
1. Enter selection criteria. You can restrict the selection by Per Date, Supplier Code, Category, and
Authorization by criteria.
2. Specify whether to include Paid Invoices, Preliminary Booked Payments, and Unauthorized Invoices in the
With Paid Invoices?, Include Pay. Ledger and Unauthorized Inv.? fields.
3. Use the Remark column of the report to show the remark entered on the invoice or the amount in Local
Currency. Alternatively, you can use this column to display the original Sales Order Number.
Move to the next screens to define the Account, Dimension Codes, and Sort Order required for the printout.
For example, you can use this to include or exclude Prepayments from the selection assuming prepayments
use a different Account Code.
Create a Compressed Printout
The procedure to request a Compressed Supplier's Balances is similar to the procedure for a Detailed Print out
described previously. A Compressed Printout displays total balances and aging, or forecast, analysis by supplier.
Individual invoices do not display.
To create a compressed printout:
1. Enter the SELECTION CRITERIA.
2. Move to the next screens to define the Account and Dimension Codes for the printout and select the Sort
Order. Define the application settings for analyzing Payables – backwards (aging) or forward (forecast). Both
analyses are based on the invoice date. The time interval used in age analysis is taken from Purchase Ledger
(PL) parameters and is usually set to 15 or 30 days.
3.2 203
Create a Summary Printout
The Summary printout displays the total Accounts Payable for a given selection and is typically used to reconcile
the Purchase Ledger with the General Ledger. It displays variations due to currency exchange differences. These
differences can be booked automatically using the Revaluate Purchase Ledger routine.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Balance Reports > Purchase Ledger > Summary
The selection criteria and sorting order for the Purchase Ledger summary report are similar to those applied for
the Purchase Ledger Compressed Printout.
Other Balance Reports
Other Balance reports are also available for Unauthorized Invoices and the Payment Ledger. These reports display
invoices booked as unauthorized or invoices paid through the Payment Ledger (preliminary Payments).
Access these reports by following these menu paths:
• Purchase Ledger > Balance Reports> Purchase Ledger >Unauthorized Invoices
• Purchase Ledger > Balance Reports> Purchase Ledger >Payment Ledger
Other Purchase Ledger Reports
This section describes other Purchase Ledger reports available in the application.
Use Statistical Reports
The application keeps and updates purchase statistics for the period as well as the entire year. Periods for Statistics
are defined in Company Setup and should be cleared at month-end and year-end, respectively. Statistics include
a supplier's ABC analysis, period, and cumulative. Statistics Reports are available in values and percentages.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Reports/Statistics > Supplier Statistics
To use statistical reports:
1. Enter the Selection Criteria. Use PgUp and PgDn to view all criteria.
2. Enter the report Sort Order.
3. Press Enter to select the Output Channel and print the report.
Use Tax Reports
You can print common tax reports with transactions from both Sales Ledger and the Purchase Ledger modules.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Reports/Statistics > TAX Reports
To use tax reports:
1. Specify the Book Entry date range for the transactions to be included in the tax report in the Transaction
Date fields.
204 3.2
2. Enter the Tax Code range for the tax report.
3. Define the Import Code range for the suppliers to be included in the tax report.
4. Enter the Export Code range.
5. Use the Rate Sell switch to specify whether the rate sell or rate buy is to be used for recalculation from the
local currency to the target currency of the report.
6. In the Date for Exchange Rate field, enter the date to get the exchange rate for.
7. Select the Report format and press Enter to view the report.
You can also use other routines to print purchase tax reports from the Purchase Ledger > Reports/Statistics
> TAX Reports Suppliers folder after you adjust the required parameters in the Purchase Ledger (Purchase
Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Parameters, Switches sheet, Save TAX Transactions parameter and Purchase
Ledger > Supplier File > Enter Suppliers, Codes option, To TAX Reports parameter).
Print Supplier Statements
Supplier statements include information on all invoices, prepayments, and credit notes. You can sort statements
by invoice number or by date, depending on the menu item selected.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Reports/Statistics > Print Statements > Statements
1. Define the Selection Criteria for the printout and press Enter.
Supplier Enquiries
Supplier Enquiries work similar to Customer Enquiries in the Sales Ledger. The application provides key supplier
data, general information, balance summary and details, statistics, and so on.
Create a Supplier Summary
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Enquiries > Enquire Suppl. & Ledger Files
To create a supplier summary:
1. Select the Supplier Code.
2. Select the Summary option when the option window displays to see Purchase Ledger information for a
given supplier.
3. Press Esc to move back to the option window.
Enquire Individual Invoices
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Enquiries > Enquire Suppl. & Ledger Files
To enquire details about an individual invoice:
1. Select the Invoices option in the option window.
3.2 205
2. Enter ! to see a list of all Invoice Numbers, including fully paid ones, or ? to see open invoices only.
3. Notice overdue invoices are designated with a > sign that precedes the invoice number in the query list.
4. Select an invoice for more specific information.
Generate a Payment Forecast
Use this routine to generate a report of payments expected for selected suppliers. Totals print on a daily or weekly
basis (not available for particular suppliers). The forecast for each currency and a total in the accounting currency
also print.
Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Payments/Journal/CashFlow > Payment Forecast
To generate a payment forecast:
1. Enter the start date for the payment forecast you want to calculate in the From Date field.
2. Specify the code range for the suppliers to include in the payment forecast in the Supplier Code field.
3. Enter the supplier category code range for the suppliers to include in the payment forecast in the Category
field.
4. Enter the Payment Method range for invoices to include in the payment forecast.
Note The payment method for an invoice is specified in the invoices entry routine.
5. Use the Daily/Weekly Basis, Include Outstanding Items, Due Date Adjustments, Use Cash Discounts,
and Include unauthorized? parameters to set enquiry rules.
6. Enter the Forecast Details.
7. On the Accounting Dimensions sheet, select the Change Invoice Codings option and enter the range
of Accounting Dimensions (1-9) specified for the invoice to include in the payment forecast.
8. Press Enter and select the format in which to view the Payment Forecast report.
Create a Supplier Statement
Use this enquiry routine to generate a supplier statement.

Main Menu Path: Purchase Ledger > Enquiries > Supplier Statement
To create a supplier statement:
1. Enter the code for the supplier you want to enquire in the Supplier Code field.
2. Enter the From Date - the start date for the transactions to include in the enquiry result screen; transactions
before this date are summarized in the opening balance.
3. Select what kind of invoices to include in the report in the Incl. Paid Invoices and Incl. Unauthorized?
fields and press Enter to view the enquiry.
206 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Asset and Resource Management
Chapter 12: Asset and Resource Management
Asset Management provides automated transactional support to Asset Managers during the acquisition, consumption,
and ultimate disposal of assets. Asset Management integration with other system modules extends the range of
supported processes. For example, preventive maintenance of assets is supported through Service Management while
lease management integration supports asset rental or leasing.
The Resource Management module is intended to manage a variety of internal and external resources. These resources
can be human resources or machines. Resource codes can be used to assist in sorting and finding resources as well as
providing default information for related functionality. Resource information can be transferred automatically to the
Payroll module for wage preparation. Resources can be used in Project Management, Service Management, and
Manufacturing processes.
Asset Management
Asset Management provides a database and the Assets file in which you can enter all Assets. Use Asset
Management to track the value of your Assets, from purchase to sale or disposal by managing revaluation, plan,
and tax depreciations.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the Asset Management module. Only the
main setup records are described here. Some parts of the Operation sections may also contain setup records if
they are required for a specific scenario.
Set Up Asset Parameters
Parameters control general management of a module and the relationship between modules.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Asset Setup > Parameters
To use asset parameters:
1. In the Asset Number field, enter the initial number of a sequential number series to use for assets. The
number increases automatically as new assets are entered.
2. Define the current Insurance Index , which is used to calculate new assurance values for assets.
3. Enter the Index for Revaluation Depreciations for the current financial year. This Index is used to calculate
replacement costs for revaluation depreciations.
3.2 207
Asset and Resource Management Epicor iScala User Guide
4. Specify the Estimated Interest rate for each Financial Year. This rate reflects the cost of capital tied up in
assets and is used to calculate interest for revaluation depreciations.
5. In the Period Interval for Deprec. field, specify how often to perform budget and depreciation calculations:1
represents each month,2 represents every other month, and so on. When the calculation is complete, the
depreciation transaction is posted to the General Ledger providing you have entered Yes in the Generate
Transactions field on Asset entry.
6. In the Transaction Number field, enter the next number of a sequential number series to use for business
transactions.
Note Pay special attention to planning all transaction number series in the iScala application. Ensure
the same numbers are not used in more than one place to avoid confusion in the General Ledger. It
is important to number transactions so they can be identified later.
7. The Remaining Balance (%) parameter shows the lower limit of taxes on buildings and property. Building
and property taxes are based on the value in this field in relationship to the purchase price.
8. In the Use Asset Transactions field, select whether to use Asset Transaction functionality. When you set
this parameter to Yes , you enable a complex schema of asset business transactions. This schema allows
creating assets consisting of several value components each of which can be acquired, adjusted and
depreciated separately.
9. Use the Date Consistency Control switch to enable verification of the date of acquisition and the
depreciation start date.
10. Define the Stock Value Definition Method.
11. In the Use General Ledger Trans. No. field, select which transaction number counter to use.
12. The Budgeting Balance Sheet Acct parameter controls whether a budget should be generated for Balance
Sheet accounts used for depreciations. The default is No , which means that only Profit and Loss accounts
are budgeted.
13. Select the rule for Yearly Reducing Tax Depreciations, First depreciation period calculation rule, and
Last depreciation period calculation rule.
14. Define whether to Insert Date Stamp for FASB-52 .
15. Define whether Full Amount of Tax Depreciation can be booked to appropriate accounts.
16. Enter the Rounding Rule for Depreciation Calculation.
17. In the Asset Value Component Number field, enter the next sequential number to be used for a business
transaction applied to the asset. It is used for the Asset Management module internal transactions and
history.
18. In the Automatic Asset Value Component Number field, define whether to adjust the asset value
component number automatically from counter or to adjust it manually.
19. If you enter Yes in the Reducing Depreciation Basis by Residual Value field, depreciation basis will
reduce by residual value (if any) before calculating depreciation.
20. Define the Calculation Type.
208 3.2
21. Use the Create Reporting Level for Tangible Type field to specify whether to create a reporting level
master asset for a parent item if it has a tangible type.
22. Use the Check depreciation for transferred/scraped/sold components parameter to control the ability
to transfer, scrap, and sell components that have not been depreciated up to the Book Entry date in Selective
Asset Transfer to Stock, Mass Asset Transfer to Stock, and Change Value Component routines.
Set Up Asset Codes
Asset Codes Description

Asset Group This field is used to group assets. For example, if an
asset is part of another asset, enter the asset number
of the latter as an Asset Group. When you print reports,
you can select and sort by Asset Groups. Use a
maximum of 10 characters to define a group.
Category A, Category B These two category types are another way to group
assets. When you print reports, you can select and sort
by category. Categories can be used to define the
depreciation type or the tax class of the Asset.
Categories are defined in the Codes - Category section
of the parameters. You can enter a maximum of four
characters in this field.
Location This parameter represents the asset location. When you
print reports, you can use this field by which to select
and sort. The field has a maximum of 15 characters.
Field Engineer This is the name of the person or Company in charge
of service or maintenance. Use a maximum of 15
characters for the code and 25 characters for the name.
Disposal (Scrap) Code This defines a code, using 3 characters, which you can
use to describe why or how an asset was scrapped or
sold. When you print reports, you can select and sort
by this code.
User Defined Codes 1 to 4 This defines your own code by which to sort and group
assets.
Insurance Company This defines whether you insure assets with different
insurance companies. Assign the code, or codes, for
each insurance company with which you work.
Insurance Category You can select and sort by insurance categories when
you print reports. Generate an Insurance Values report
for a subtotal for each insurance category. You can
define insurance categories, although it is recommended
to follow the insurance company's categories. A
maximum of five characters can be entered for a code.
These codes are entered in the same way, using two fields. One field is for the actual code, and the other is for
descriptive text.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Asset Setup> Code Files
3.2 209
To enter, change, or delete a code:
1. Select the type of code you want to enter, change, or delete.
2. Enter a new code or select an existing code.
3. Enter descriptive Text for the code using up to 25 characters (20 characters for order status).
4. Continue as above for any additional codes of this type.
Enable Asset Transaction Codes
Transaction types are used to follow assets through the application. Transaction types are a declaration; the
accounting part is often the same. Transactions are what we enter for changing or creating the asset values.
Every asset transaction type can have its own field availability configuration for entry and changes, as well as an
automatic accounting schedule (where accounting is affected).
The Asset Transaction code is used for grouping transactions and controlling automatic accounting. Each transaction
code can be used for posting to another set of accounts.
To enable or disable transaction codes:
1. Select an Asset Transaction Code from the Select Code Type menu.
2. Enter Yes or No in the type fields to activate required business transaction types.
Assign Accounting Codes
You can assign different accounting codes to transaction types.

To assign accounting codes:
1. Select an Asset Transaction Code from the Select Code Type menu.
2. Select the Transaction Type for which you want to define an Accounting Code from the list.
4. Enter descriptive Text for the code of up to 25 characters (20 characters for order status).
210 3.2
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the Asset Management module. Each operation is
Enter Master Assets
Assets are defined using a combination of a Master Asset shell and a Value Component which can be attached
or removed during the life of the Asset. Components can be depreciated using different depreciation rules, if
required. For example, a car can be defined using an Asset Master with a Value Component that captures supplier
details, capitalized costs, depreciation methods, and so on. An alarm system installed in a car at a later date can
be defined as a second Value Component associated with the same Asset Master. This concept enables you to
track items that are viewed as single assets even though they can be comprised of multiple components purchased
at different times.
A master record is a template for transactions that supply data and is updated by transactions.
Be aware that the data entered by means of the Enter/Adjust Assets Master routine has no direct impact on the
General Ledger. To make postings to the General Ledger via the Daybook Journal, use the function Enter Value
Component. Purchase costs, depreciations, and other values are entered in the Enter Value Component function
or generated by other functions like Calculation of Depreciations.
The availability for fields to be edited is configured in the Asset Management > Asset Setup > Enter/Adjust Master
Profile routine. The window displays all the fields even though all fields are set to read-only and do not allow
data entry.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Enter/Adjust Asset Master
To enter master asset basic information:
1. Select an existing Master Asset or enter a new Asset; to display the next available Master Asset Code ,
press the + key. A number is provided automatically from the counter set in the Asset Management
parameters.
Note Master Assets can be selected by Code, Name, or Asset Template.
2. Enter the Description .
3. Complete the Asset Group, Categories A or B, and Location fields.
4. Use the New Label field to define whether a label for the asset prints when you request a printout.
5. Enter any Remarks about the Asset.
6. Determine if User Defined Fields are required for additional categories. The list for possible values also
must be set in the code file, as mentioned above.
7. Press Enter ; when the Menu window displays, select Suppliers.

Note Profiles can be used for Master Asset entry, transaction entry, and transaction modification.
The Profile describes which fields are accessible during each transaction type entered. Use Profiles to
speed up data entry and enhance data security.
3.2 211
Asset Transactions
The value of an Asset can be modified by adding new transactions to the Asset; for example, add new features,
repairs, and so on, or by revaluing existing transactions which is mainly used in countries with hyper-inflation.
Adjust Asset Values
When you add new features to an asset, such as air conditioning or a telephone for a car, you need to change
its value component. For example, the MASTER ASSET AM301 - Delivery Vehicle has the following Value
Components:
• Value Component 01 - Initial vehicle purchase
• Value Component 02 - Air conditioning installation
• Value Component 03 - Telephone installation
How value is added to a Master Asset is described in the acquisition process. The concept is to add transactions
to the existing Master Asset to constitute its global value.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Business Operations > Change Value Component
To revaluate asset values manually:
1. Select transaction code REV to change master data.
2. Select the Master Asset Code .
3. Select an existing Asset Value Component Nu mber to revalue.
4. Enter the Book Entry Date for the revaluation.
5. Select Depreciations [Revaluation] from the menu.
6. Enter the revaluation amount in the Depreciation Basis field.
7. Press Esc and click Yes in the dialog box to confirm the transaction.
Consume Assets
Asset consumption is determined by calculating depreciation based on the parameters entered in the various
asset transactions. In Asset Management, calculated depreciation automatically generates GL transactions.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Business Operations > Calculate Depreciation
To calculate depreciation:
1. Specify the ranges of items to include in the calculation.
2. Define the Up to Period to calculate depreciation.
3. Enter the Transaction Text that will display on the General Ledger transaction.
4. Enter No to check the depreciation before updating or Yes to update the asset file and day book journal
with the calculated depreciation in the Update GL field.
212 3.2
5. Define the Depr eciation Calculation Mode . The options are only Tax 2 , only Plan 1 , or Both 0 .
6. Press Enter Enter and in the Save As window, select or enter the report File name and type.
Dispose of an Asset
Asset disposal can be done by selling or scrapping. Both operations follow a similar path within the application.
This operation can only be completed if all depreciation has been calculated.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Business Operations > Change Value Component
To sell an asset:
1. Select transaction code SAL .
2. Enter the required master asset information.
3. Navigate to the Supplier screen.
4. Enter the Scrap/Sold date.
5. Enter the Disposal Code and press Enter.
6. Select Depreciations [Plan] and enter the amount of the sale in the Scrap Value field.
7. Enter the Sales Revenue .
8. Press Esc and click Yes in the dialog box to confirm the transaction.
Use the Asset Management > Business Operations > Change Value Component routine to scrap an asset. The
same process as Selling an Asset is followed except the transaction code SCR is used and the scrap option is used,
instead of the sold option. There is no revenue associated with scrapping an asset.
Write Off an Asset to Stock
When an asset is not in use anymore, you can transfer it to stock. In this case, a stock transaction is generated.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Business Operations > Stock Control Integration >Transfer Asset
to Stock Control
To write-off an asset to stock:
1. Select the Type of write-off (Mass or Selective).
2. Select the Master Asset Code .
3. Select the destination Warehouse and existing Stock item Code s (target of the transfer).
4. Specify the Quantity that should be in Stock. This can be different from the Asset quantity.
5. Specify the Value of each transferred unit.
6. Enter the Date to record the transaction.
3.2 213
7. Press Enter and click Yes in the dialog box to confirm the transaction.
Delete an Asset
Asset deletion applies to Master Assets only and can only be completed once all elements, (or transactions), of
the selected Master Assets have been disposed.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Delete Asset
To delete an asset:
1. In the Asset Code field, enter the code of the asset you want to delete.
2. Press Enter and click Yes in the dialog box to confirm the deletion.
Update Yearly Values
Use this routine to close the financial year's depreciations. All yearly values are updated and transferred as opening
balances for the following financial year. The accumulators for the current financial year are cleared so the new
financial year can begin with the fixed assets module. After you run this routine, you can no longer use the values
for the current financial year. Ensure all fixed assets are entered, all depreciations and budgeting is complete,
required reports are printed, and the fixed assets file is with the General Ledger before you use this routine.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Business Operations > Update Yearly Values
To update yearly values:
1. In the Password field, enter YRKILL.
2. Confirm the updating of the fixed asset values and the clearing of the financial year's accumulators.
and balances available in the Asset Management module.
Enquire Assets
and balances available in the Asset Management module.
Main Menu Path:Asset Management > Enquire Assets .
To enquire assets:
1. Search for and select an Asset Code .

Note Assets whose line starts with an R are reporting level.
2. Select an enquiry from the list of available options. For example, select Sum Depreciations.
214 3.2
Comparative information about the PLAN and TAX depreciation methods display with the depreciation
amounts already calculated.
The Transaction Enquiry option shows details of previously entered transactions and the Transaction History
option shows a log of transactions with the time, date, and user who posted them.
Resource Management
The Resource Management functionality is designed to manage available human and other work resources. A
resource can be a local or external technician (engineer), a group or machine. The functionality enables you to
enter or adjust available resources, plan and timetable available resources, assign codes and scheduling, create
and print reports on available resources and get statistics.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the Resource Management module. Only the
main setup records are described here. Some parts of the Operation sections may also contain setup records if
they are required for a specific scenario. You may also need to adjust some parameters within Company Setup.
Some modules have global settings you define through this administration program. Review the Application Help
for more information.
Set Up Resource Code
Resource codes are located in the Resource file, common to the Service Contract, Project Management, and
Material Production Control modules of iScala. When working with an integrated system, some of these codes
may have already been entered in other modules.
Use this routine to enter the basic codes to use for your resources. You can use these codes as selection terms
for reports and statistics as well as with the Service Management module if installed.
You can enter the following codes within the Resource Management module:
Codes Description
Categories Use this code type to divide engineers into categories, for example, service engineers and
specialists. You can use up to four alphanumeric characters for the codes to use as selection
and sorting terms for reports and statistics. Use the last two characters, or the entire code,
for statistical sorting.
Skills This code type is entered in the engineer resource file to show the engineer's qualifications.
It can then be used when allocating work, as well as for selection and sorting of terms in
reports and statistics.
Price Codes Use this code type to define specific labor prices, for example, a standard charge for normal
maintenance and a higher charge for an expert engineer. This type can contain two
alphanumeric characters. These price codes are entered in the engineer resource record and
are used for pricing service orders.
Price Code 00 is the default used for pricing expenses and costs. You do not normally need
to make an entry for this in the Code file. Price Code 00 can still be used to price labor codes.
Professions Use this code type to define different trades. It can be up to six alphanumeric characters.
The code is entered in the engineer resource record and can be used to select an engineer
when assigning work, as well as for making special enquiries on resources.
3.2 215
Codes Description
Departments Use this code type to define different departments within a service organization. It can be
up to 11 alphanumeric characters. This code can be used for selection and sorting criteria
in reports and statistics.
All codes are entered in the same way, using two fields. One field is for the actual code, and the other is for
descriptive text.
Main Menu Path:Resource Management > Miscellaneous > Resource Codes
To enter, change, or delete a code:
1. Select the type of code you want to enter, change, or delete.
3. Enter descriptive Text for the code of up to 25 characters (20 characters for order status).
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform in the Resource Management module. Each operation is
represented as a scenario to help you go through the process from start to finish. If setup is required for the
operation, it is also described in the section.
Enter New Resources
Use this routine to enter data for all resources to use on projects or orders.
Main Menu Path:Resource Management > Resources > Enter/Adjust Resources
To enter a resource:
1. Enter a Resource code for the Resource. This is the primary code used to sort, find, and use Resources;
therefore, it must be unique.
2. Enter the Resource Name .
3. Notice the remaining fields on this screen are optional. The Email Addr ess field can be completed to allow
automated messaging.
4. Complete any required fields and press Enter . In the Menu window, select Codes.
5. Select the Resource Type .
6. Assign the Resource to the appropriate Resource Group .
7. Assign the Resource's Price Code . This determines the hourly rate to assign.
8. Notice the remaining fields on this screen are optional. Complete any required fields and press Enter. In
the Menu window, select Costs and Payroll.
216 3.2
9. Select Yes if the activity data for this resource should generate Payroll Transactions .
10. In the remaining fields, enter the Costs of this Resource. Different cost levels can be linked to Resources.
This can correspond to costs during normal working hours versus overtime or weekend costs.
11. Complete any required fields and Press Enter. In the Menu window, select Work Schedule.
12. Select the Calendar Collection to use. This structures the normal Work Schedule for this Resource.
13. Click Next to move to the next screen.
14. Press Enter . In the Menu window, select Accounting.
15. Enter the Accounting Dimensions and select those to use when processing transactions that relate to this
Resource.
16. Press Enter . In the Menu window, select Warehouse Information.
17. Select the Local Warehouse, which is used for stock transactions in the Service Management module.
18. Optionally select the Common Warehouse , or alternate warehouse, which can be used if stock is not
available in the Local Warehouse.
19. Optionally select the Resource Warehou se, which is a technician's van.
20. Optionally select the Delivery Bin location within the Local Warehouse.
21. When complete, click Next to return to the main resource screen.
All resources can be updated using the methods described in the previous steps. Use the menu window
that displays to access screens.
Use the Resource Planning Board to Manage Resources
The Resource Planner is a graphical interface used to schedule resources. Scheduling can be done for Projects
and Service Orders.
Main Menu Path:Resource Management > Resources > Resource PlanningBoard
To use the resource planning board:
1. Select the Resource, or range of Resources, for which to schedule.
2. Press F4 to open the Engineer Query tool. Search by Engineer or Skill set. Users can enter partial information
in the query; for example, enter SM to search for resources with codes that start with SM. All entry fields
are from and to.
3. Select the Period range to view.
4. The remaining fields on this entry screen are optional. Complete any required fields.
5. Select which Tasks to view in the Resource Planning Board and click Next or OK to view the Resource
Planning Board.
6. Notice on the Resource Planning Board , you can see planned tasks, as well as free time. If selected, you
can also see unallocated tasks that remain to be assigned.
3.2 217
7. The table is sorted by resource. At the end of each resource, total work and total free time are calculated.
The table legend is as follows:
Legend Description
White Non-Allocated Time
Yellow Non-Allocated Overtime
Grey Non-Working Time
Green Allocated Time
Red Over Allocated Time
Red [90] Collision (exceeded time zone limits)
Pink Non-Adjustable Task
Right-click a resource to create a New Service Task or New Project Task or to Refresh Table. This takes users
to the Enter/Adjust Service Order or Project Order utility where a new Order can be created or an existing
Order can be adjusted. After finishing, press Esc to return to the Resource Planning Board.
and balances available in the Resource Management module .
Resource Management Reports
All reports can be obtained through a flexible choice of criterion. To run a report, select the required report from
the Reports folder in Resource Management.
• Depreciation [Plan] - This report shows current year depreciations as well as previously calculated depreciation.
The information displays in transaction order and is grouped by Master Asset.
• Totals by Year of Acquisition - This report shows details for each of the past four years and summarizes
earlier years including acquisition values of the Assets.
• New Assets - This report can be printed for tax or plan mode depreciation. This report provides users with
the date and cost of acquisition, current year book opening and closing values, and current year changes.
• Net Book Value Report - This report can be printed for tax or plan mode depreciation. This report contains
more information than the New Assets report.
Enquire Resources
Main Menu Path:Resource Management > Enquiries > Enquire Resources

To enquire resources:
1. Select the Resource Code to enquire.

The Resource's main details display and a menu window opens with options. Select the enquiry from the
list of available options.
218 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Statistics
Chapter 13: Statistics
The Statistics module provides access to statistical information available within the application. These statistics include
sales and purchase information that relate to customers, suppliers, salespeople, and other recorded data. Technically,
the Statistics module is a transaction-based system, wherea transaction recordis saved for each order line. The report
generator in this module allows you to generate a large number of reports, with up to 10 levels of summation.
You can use the report generator in statistics to print pre-defined reports based on selection criteria you define from
details listed in the module. You can select whether to print a report or save it to file. You can import saved details
into another application, such as a word processing or spreadsheet application, from which you can easily generate
documents and charts based on your statistics. Reports and statistics in many modules use a report generator with
common conventions for specifying, saving, and printing reports. The Statistics module uses the report generator to
access essential sales, purchasing, and service data.
Setup
This section contains the primary adjustments you need to make in the Statistics module. Only the main setup
records are described here. Some parts of the Operation sections may also contain setup records if they are
required for a specific scenario.
Prerequisites
The use of the Statistics module differs from organization to organization and industry to industry. Each
organization may want to track different statistics split by different variables or parameters. When the Code files
within the Stock Control module are configured, take into consideration the particular statistical reporting
requirements for the individual organization.
The use of Product Groups, Alternative Product Groups, Extended Product Groups, as well as Product and
Customer Categories can all be used to generate useful statistics that enable tracking of sales by specific product
lines. The use of Commodity Codes and other Purchase related categorizations allows organizations to track
purchases from one or more suppliers for similar products.
Before you start to work with statistics, ensure you adjusted all the necessary code files within the Stock Control,
Sales Order, Purchase Order, Sales Ledger, Purchase Ledger, Service Management, and Statistics modules. You
can find information on how to set up the codes in Chapter 2: Application Setup or in the chapters that describe
the workflow or the corresponding modules.
Adjust Salesman Information
The salesman code is entered as a reference on orders entered in the Sales Orders module. You can also use
salesman codes entered in the Service Management, Project Management, and Sales Ledger modules.
When you adjust salesmen in iScala, you define the basis of commission calculations for them. The sales commission
is based on the salesman's gross profit or turnover. You can also set a minimum, where if the minimum is not
achieved, no commission is paid. If you change values for a salesman, the program will not recalculate any
commissions; the new rates apply from the date of entry.
3.2 219
Statistics Epicor iScala User Guide
When you enter a salesman code, you can automatically enter the district or group of the salesman; enter the
first digit of the code. The headings for the district codes are entered in the Enter/Adjust District Headings routine.
Main Menu Path:Statistics > Salesman Statistics/Commission > Salesman File & Statistics > Enter/Adjust
Salesmen
To enter a salesman:
1. Enter a code for this Salesman . You can use this code for selection and sort criteria when statistics are
printed.
2. Specify the name of the salesperson in the Name field.
3. Enter an Email Address.
4. Optionally, use the Turnover Commission field to specify a percentage of the sales man turnover to pay
as commission.
5. In the Commission Point (Min) field, enter a minimum amount of commission to pay. If the turnover
commission does not reach this limit, no commission is paid.
6. Optionally, use the Gross Profit Commission field to specify a percentage of the salesman's gross profit
to pay as commission.
7. Define the minimum amount of commission to pay in the Commission Point (Min) field. If the gross profit
commission does not reach this limit, no commission is paid.
Note If the Commission Management feature is activated, the fields are used duringinvoice closing.
8. Press Enter and on the Enter Accounting Dimension screen, specify the accounting dimensions to use
for the commission.
9. Press Enter to move to the Other screen.
10. Use the Agent field to define whether the salesman is an employee of your company or a professional from
another company.
11. Optionally, specify the District, Advertising area, Area, Trade Code, Product Group, and Alternative
Product Group codes. The entered codes go to the sales statistics. If you do not define them here, this data
is taken from the stock items file and the customers file.
12. The Discount Code field is for informative purposes only.
Enter Commodity Codes
Commodity Codes are used to categorize each product into a specific product category, family, and type as
defined by statutory, industry, or other bodies. Commodity codes are any alphanumeric system designed to
identify particular products. There are several different codes, some government and some private sector. All
commodity codes are used to classify goods and services to better identify them.
Use Commodity Codes when entering purchase order lines, converting orders, creating purchase orders during
drop shipment, authorizing requisitions, and using multiple Material Production Control routines. Codes can print
in purchase order statistics reports. When commodity codes are set up and entered, they can be defined for a
stock item and a supplier.
220 3.2
iScala supports the definition of the following structure:

• XX Segment - The logical aggregation of families for analytical purposes
• XX Family - A commonly recognized group of inter-related commodity categories
• XX Class - A group of commodities that share a common use or function
• XX Commodity - A group of substitutable products or services
• XX Business Function- The function an organization performs in support of the commodity
Use this routine to enter, adjust, or delete the commodity codes using the predefined segment structure.
Main Menu Path:Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Commodity Codes> Enter/Adjust Commodity
Codes
To enter a commodity code:
1. Select a language code from the list.
2. The application displays the segment level structure according to the settings in Segments Setup. To specify
all segments for a code, enter the segment names in the appropriate fields. To specify one or more
sub-segments for a code as the default, enter 0 (zero) in the appropriate field or leave it blank.
3. Enter a Description of the code.
4. Select Yes in OK to update field.
Configure Commission Parameters
Adjust the commission functionality parameters.

Main Menu Path:Statistics > Salesman Statistics/Commission > Commission Management > Parameters
To configure commission parameters:
1. Use the Split commission by discount field to define commission setup for a sales order.
2. Define the part of Own Freight to subtract from the total commission in the Contribute Miscellaneous
Salesman Expenses field.
3. Specify the part of External Commission to subtract from the total commission in the Contribute External
Commission field.
4. Select the Distribution method .
5. Use the Split transaction lines per salesman field to define whether to split Sales Ledger transactions per
salesman when the invoice is closed.
6. Specify the part of summarized Freight, Packing, and Insurance to subtract from the salesman commission
in the Recover debited agent cost field.
3.2 221
Operations
This section explores the operations you can perform within the Statistics module. Each operation is represented
as a scenario to help you go through the process from start to finish. If some setup is required for the operation,
it is also described in the section.
Sales and Purchase Statistics
When you enter the sales and purchase orders, the application creates sales and purchase statistics based on the
entered order details.
Create Invoice Issued Statistics
Invoicing statistics for customers and items are based on order lines entered and invoiced and the invoice closed.
All these details are retrieved from Sales Orders in the form of transactions with each order line generating one
transaction. You can obtain specific details about sales from these statistics; for example, customers who have
purchased a specific item or items a particular customer has purchased.
Main Menu Path:Statistics > Customer/Stock Statistics > Sales/Invoicing Statistics > Invoices Issued
Statistics
To generate customer or stock statistics:
1. Specify selection criteria ranges to generate a report. Press PgDn to go to the second and third pages of
the Selection Criteria; more specific ranges can also be set.
2. Press Enter to move to the Sort Order screen.
3. Enter a sort order for the Invoices Issued Statistics report in the Enter the Sort/Selection number field.
4. Define the Column in the report where the field is to print. If a column number is not entered, the field is
not included in the report.
5. Press PgDn to move through the various types of data available.
6. In the Name for Selection/Sort screen, the application suggests a name for the printout in the Name for
selection/sort field.
7. Confirm the name or change it, as required; press Enter to move to the Additional Parameters screen.
8. Enter the Decimal Number for the Quantity printed for quantities and define whether to Print Zero
Amounts; press Enter.
9. Define POS (point of sales)Additional Parameters and press Enter to view the report.
Use Purchase Order Statistics
The Statistics module can help in the analysis of purchasing activity by reviewing variances between the quantity
ordered and the quantity delivered.
The Statistics module can help in the analysis of purchasing activity by reviewing variances between the quantity
ordered and the quantity delivered.
222 3.2
Main Menu Path:Statistics > PO Statistics > Purchase Order Statistics / Supplier Performance Analysis
Reports
To use purchase order statistics:
1. Specify selection criteria ranges to generate a report. Press PgDn to go to the second and third pages of
the Selection Criteria; more specific ranges can also be set.
2. Press Enter to move to the Order/Group parameters screen.
3. Define the consequence of sorting for this report and press Enter.
4. Adjust Detail parameters and press Enter to view the report.
Statistic Definition
You can define and print various types of user-defined Statistics and Reports. Depending on the Output Channels
settings, many output options are available such as printing reports to the screen, exporting reports to a word
processor or spreadsheet, and more.
Selection Criteria
Use suitable selection criteria to define a report. Enter the Selection Number depending on the range of data
which should be seen. Enter the criteria code in the Enter Selection Number field. Press F4 to query the available
selection codes where they exist. Specify the section range. Input the starting criteria in the first field and the
end criteria in the second. Press PgDn to display all available options. To move to criteria for the Sort Order for
the report, press Enter in the Enter Selection Number field. Ensure it is set to 0 and not to a criteria code.
Sort Order
In the Sort Order section, specify the order in which records should display. In the Enter the Sort/Selection number
field, input the criteria number desired. Multiple criteria are permitted. In the Column field, define in which
column the data should display in the report. Press Enter in the Column field to confirm.Press PgDn to explore
the available criteria. To move to additional Report Details to view in the report, press Enter in the Enter
Sort/Selection number field. Enter 0 in this field.
3.2 223
Report Details
In Report Details, select additional data to display in the report. To do this, select the number of the criteria in
the Select Detail Number field. In the Column field, select in which column the data should display on the report.
Press Enter to confirm the selection.
Save and Load
To save predefined Statistics reports, enter S in the Selection or Sort field. To load previously saved Statistics,
enter L.
Service Statistics
When you enter service orders, the application generates service statistics which may be obtained in the Statistics
module.
Print Service Statistics
The application provides you with statistics on service activities. Service Managers can use the Service Statistics
to collate and analyze all service transactions by order, service object, serial number, service activity, material,
and cost.
Main Menu Path:Statistics > Service Statistics > Service Statistics
To print service statistics:
1. To edit a field, specify a selection number for the corresponding field in the Enter Selection field. Enter S
to save selections you make or L to load previously made selections.
2. Press Enter to move to the Sort Order screen to sort the field order. To sort the fields, specify the number
of the field to sort and the column to which the field is to be written in the Sorting fields.
3. Press Enter to move to the Report Details screen. Specify the field number and the column to which the
field is to be written in the Select Detail number and Column fields.
4. Press Enter to specify the report name on the Sel./Sort. Name screen.
5. Select the report format and click OK.
224 3.2
Salesman Statistics
You can use salesman statistics whenever you need to obtain the salesman details .
Print Salesman Statistics
You can use this routine to obtain a salesman's statistics in report format; you can use the routine for individuals
or groups of salesmen. A summary for each district or salesman group is included in the report.
Main Menu Path:Statistics > Salesman Statistics/Commission > Salesman File & Statistics > Print Salesmen
Statistics
To print salesman statistics:
1. Use the Salesman Code fields to specify the range of salesmen to include in the report.
2. Select the report format and click OK .
Commission Management
To set up commissions and print commission reports for one or more salesmen and agents, first activate the
Commission Management feature within the System Utilities > Business Data Management > Company features
setup > Edit company features setup, Statistics routine. When the feature is activated, you can assign several
different salesmen to a single customer. Different commission percentages can be assigned to different salesmen,
or salesmen can get different commission percentages depending on either the customer or the kind of items
sold to the customer.
Note Use the Sales Ledger > Miscellaneous > Setup > Code Files routine to adjust the Customer Extended
Commission Codes and the Stock Control > Miscellaneous > Setup > Code Files routine to configure the
Line Extended Commission Codes.
Enter or Adjust Commission
Set up the commission percentage to give to a salesman.

Main Menu Path:Statistics > Salesman Statistics/Commission > Commission Management > Enter/Adjust
Commission
To enter commission:
1. Select the Record Type.
2. Enter the Salesman. You can specify *** for all salesmen with a commission that is not explicitly set up.
3. Specify the Customer Ext. Comm. Code and Line Ext. Comm. Code .
4. Enter Commission % for the specified salesman.
3.2 225
Adjust Recognized Commission
Adjust the commission value calculated during payment entry.

Main Menu Path:Statistics > Salesman Statistics/Commission > Commission Management > Adjust
Recognized Commission
To adjust recognized commission:
1. In the Customer Code field, specify a customer or leave the field blank.
2. Specify an Invoice No . If a customer was entered in the previous field, you can select only from the invoices
for the specified customer. If the customer field is blank, it will be filled in according to the selected customer.
3. Enter the Salesman associated with the invoice.
4. Enter the Payment No.
5. Adjust the Recognized commission.
Calculate Commission
Set up the parameters to print the commission report.

Main Menu Path:Statistics > Salesman Statistics/Commission > Commission Management > Calculate/Print
Commission
To calculate commission:
1. Enter the required Document Code.
2. Define the range of salesmen in the Salesman field.
3. Use the Only Agents? field to define the types of salesmen to include in the report.
4. Specify the Customer Code, Invoice Date, and Invoice Number ranges.
5. In the Select non-paid invoices field, define whether to include unpaid invoices in the report.
6. Specify whether to Select partially paid invoices and Select fully paid invoices.
7. Define the Payment Date range to print.
8. Enter Yes in the Ok to print? field.
226 3.2
Packaging Statistics
Packaging Statistics allows you to generate packaging reports that include information on the type and weight
of materials used for the stock items package.
Enter Material Codes
Packaging Statistics allows you to generate packaging reports that include information on the type and weight
of materials used for the stock items package.
Main Menu Path:Statistics > Packaging Statistics > Enter/Adjust material codes
To enter material codes:
1. Enter a Material Code.
2. Enter a Description for the pack type.
3. Define the price per kilo in local currency in the Price/Kg field.
Enter Packaging Codes
Use this routine to enter packing codes, materials codes, and weights that relate to this code.
To enter packaging codes:
1. Enter the Packaging Code.
2. Enter a Description for the code.
3. In the Material Code field, select the code of material of which the package consists and specify its Weight.
One package type can include several components.
Mass Update Weights and Materials for Stock Items
Before you generate a packaging report, you can update the type and weight of materials used for the stock
items package.
Main Menu Path:Statistics > Packaging Statistics > Mass Update of Weights/Materials for Stock items
To update packaging materials and weights for stock items:
1. Adjust the required selection criteria in the Selection field and press Enter .
2. Use the Packaging Code field to select the package to update.
3. Optionally, select new material codes in the Material Code 1-5 fields.
4. Adjust the components weight in the Weight 1-5 fields.
5. Click Yes in the Mass Update of Weights/Materials for Stock Items dialog box.
3.2 227
Print Packaging Statistics
The packaging statistics report is the main report based on invoice statistics. You can generate it after stock item
delivery.
Main Menu Path:Statistics > Packaging Statistics > Print Packaging Statistics
To print packaging statistics:
1. Enter the Stock Code range for the packaging statistics output.
2. Define the Customer Code range.
3. Enter the range of Customer category codes.
4. In the Delivery date fields, enter the range of delivery dates.
5. Select a Sort Criteria in the dialog box and click OK.
Reports
The iScala application allows you to generate different kinds of reports for various business needs. Reports are
available within the application modules. Refer to the chapters which describe the modules to see how to run
these reports.
Define Reports in Other Modules
To define reports in other modules, follow the same procedure as Statistics. Reports show the current situation
of a particular product, customer, and so on. You can print reports categorized by a variety of criteria.
Use Output Channels
Depending on the settings for Output Channels, you can print to a printer, generate e-mails, send details to an
external database, or save the file in various formats such as a spreadsheet, word processor document, XML, or
HTML.
228 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Miscellaneous Features
Chapter 14: Miscellaneous Features
The iScala application includes many more features that have not yet been discussed. Most system administration tasks
are performed via the Administration Console; although, other utilities specific to the management of business data
and the setup of the application are also managed through System Utilities.
Snap Search
In business, the type of information required by end users depends on their role. For example:
• It is important for a credit controller to list customers' credit limits and credit codes.
• An order entry clerk will want to see customers' contact and address information.
• It is important for a warehouse manager to list stock items with the appropriate product group, length, height,
and width.
• It is important for a purchaser to list the order numbers, the total order value, and the warehouse for orders.
Many other queries may be needed. These can be built using the Snap Search Builder. The Snap Search Builder
enables you to create queries based on the various tables within the database using a user-friendly interface.
Advanced users may prefer to directly enter SQL statements.
Snap searches can be linked to any field in the application to serve as lookup lists. They can also be run from the
menu or a toolbar button, in which case they can be used as simple reports. Each snap search window has a
Copy button. Using this button, you can copy and paste the data from the snap search to other applications, for
example, spreadsheet applications.
Snap Search Builder
Snap Search Builder can be run from iScala (to do so, open the Windows Start Menu and click All Programs -
Epicor Software - Epicor iScala - Snap Search Builder); also, the tool can be started from iScala Administration
Console - browse to <Installation Name>\Snap Searches\Snap Search Objects, right-click the Snap Search Objects
node and select New Snap Search.
To customize an existing snap search, either run this tool the same way and then select the snap search you want
to customize or go to iScala Administration Console, browse to <Installation Name>\Snap Searches\Snap Search
Objects, right-click the snap search you want to customize and select Edit.
Create a Snap Search and Link It to a Field
In this example, you will create a snap search that limits the list of customers by internal customers only and then
link it to the Order Customer field in the Enter/Adjust Order routine.
To create a snap search and link it to a field:
1. Start the Snap Search Builder tool as described above.
2. In the Tables pane, select the check box for table SL01 (Customer File).
The SL01 table content displays in the right pane.
3.2 229
Miscellaneous Features Epicor iScala User Guide
3. In the SL01 table, select the check box for column SL01001 (CustomerCode).
The spreadsheet-like grid for specifying query options for SL01001 (CustomerCode) displays in the Snap
Search Results Columns pane.
4. As you want to limit the retrieved list of customers by internal customers only. Because internal customer
codes always start with "INTR", you enter the following limiting condition in the Criteria field for the
SL01001 column: LIKE 'INTR%'.
5. From the File menu, select Save and save the current snap search; for example, Internal Customers.
6. To ensure the snap search works properly, test it by selecting Test Snap Search in the Snap Search menu.
The Check Results window displays. It lists the data retrieved by the snap search and the query itself.
Link a Snap Search to a Field
To link a snap search to a field:
1. Since each snap search has an associated permission, and permissions are loaded during user logon, first
log off from iScala and re-logon.
2. Start the Enter/Adjust Order routine.
3. In the Entry of Order tab, click the down arrow to the right of the Order Customer field and select
Manage links from the menu.
4. In the Manage Links window, click Add.
5. In the Snap Search Link Type window, click OK to use default settings.
6. In the Snap Search Link Properties window, select the required Internal Customers snap search from
the list in the Snap Search field.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Manage Links window, click Close.
Run the Snap Search
To run the snap search:
2. In the Entry of Order tab, click the down arrow to the right of the Order Customer field and select the
required Internal Customers snap search from the menu.
3. The Snap Search result window with the retrieved data displays.
230 3.2
Parameter-Driven Snap Searches
In Snap Search Builder, you can set parameters to use as the search criteria for certain columns. When running
snap searches with such parameters in iScala to retrieve data, you will be prompted to specify values of these
parameters.
Set Snap Search Parameters
To set user-defined snap search parameters:
1. Select Parameters from the Snap Search menu. The Parameters dialog displays.
2. In the Name column, enter the name of the parameter. It should start with the ‘at’ sign (@).
3. In the Type column, select the type of the parameter (STRING, NUMERIC, or DATETIME).
4. In the Length column, specify the length of the parameter.
5. In the Decimal Places column, specify the number of decimal places for a NUMERIC parameter.
6. In the Default Value column, specify the default value for the parameter. This value is used unless another
value is entered.
7. In the lower pane, specify the parameter name that is used in the iScala interface.
8. Click the Layout button to set up the layout of the Snap Search Params dialog, which is shown when the
snap search with more than one non-constant parameter is started.
9. The Parameters Layout dialog displays with all the parameters listed in the left pane under the Parameters
heading. Drag-and-drop the parameters to the right pane, and put them in one or two columns in the order
you want them to display in the Snap Search Params dialog.
10. Click OK in the Parameters Layout dialog.
11. Click OK in the Parameters dialog.
Parameter Mappings
You can set a snap search to read values from certain iScala controls or grid cells and to use them as parameter
values.
Set Up Correspondence
To set up a correspondence between snap search parameters and iScala form controls, use the Snap Search
Parameter Mapping functionality:
1. In iScala, open a form containing the field to which the snap search is linked. Click the down arrow and
select Manage Links.
3.2 231
2. Click Add to add a new snap search link or Properties to modify the existing link.
The Snap Search Link Properties dialog box displays.
3. When creating a new snap search link, from the Snap Search menu on the Snap Search Link Properties
pane, select the required snap search.
4. Click Parameters. The Snap Search Parameter Mapping dialog box displays.
The Snap Search Parameter Mapping dialog box lists fields of the current iScala form (Form controls list),
and regular parameters (as opposed to constant parameters) of the snap search selected in the Snap Search
Link Properties dialog (Snap Search parameters list). For each parameter its type is specified: String, Numeric,
or Datetime. Control values are converted to one of these types.
Map a Parameter to a Control
To map a parameter to a control
1. In the Form controls list, select a control.
2. In the Snap Search parameters list, select a parameter.
3. Click Add under the Snap Search parameters list.
4. The mapping is added to the Parameter Mappings list.
Validation Snap Search
If your iScala installation contains several companies, you can use the Validation Snap Search functionality when
it is necessary to restrict data entry in selected companies. For all users that belong to a specific role, you can
assign a validation snap search to a field. If this role is assigned to the selected companies, the validation affects
only these companies.
A validation snap search is assigned to a field. It is assigned for the users belonging to a specific role. In order to
make the snap search validate data for selected companies for all users, the role is assigned to the Root node
of the organigram (so it affects all users), or to selected companies (so it affects them in selected companies).
Set Up Validation Snap Search
To set up validation snap search for the field:

1. Create a snap search that would be accepting statuses 1..4.
2. Run the Snap Search Builder tool. Snap Search Builder can be run from iScala (to do so, open the Windows
Start Menu and click All Programs - Epicor Software - Epicor iScala - Snap Search Builder); also, the
tool can be started from iScala Administration Console - browse to <Installation Name>\Snap
Searches\Snap Search Objects, right-click the Snap Search Objects node and select New Snap Search.
3. From the Snap Search menu, select Parameters.
4. In the Name column, enter @Value and press Enter.
232 3.2
5. Click OK.
6. From the Snap Search menu, select Use SQL. Confirm to activate the SQL pane.
7. Enter the following query that will check the entered value is between 1 and 4: select @Value as
[Acceptable] where @Value is NOT NULL AND @Value is between 1 and 4.
8. In the File menu, select Save.
9. In the Snap Search Name field, enter the name of the newly created snap search - Value 1..4.
10. Click OK.
11. Close the Snap Search Builder tool.
Validate Data Entry via Snap Search for Selected Companies
To validate date entry:
1. In iScala, start a routine containing the field to which you want to link a snap search.
2. Click the down arrow near the field, and then select the Manage Links command. The Manage Links
window displays a list of assigned field links.
3. Click Add. The Snap Search Link Type dialog displays.
4. In the Snap Search Link Type dialog window, select Public in the Visibility radio button to make the
snap search available for all users.
5. Select Local in the Scope radio button to apply the snap search to the current field only.
6. Click OK. The Snap Search Link Properties window displays .
7. From the Snap Search list, select the required snap search, and then enter a comment for the snap search
into the Link comment field.
8. Select the Use for validation check box to use a linked snap search for validation.
9. Click OK. The role-specific validation snap search is created.
Validate the entry
Now you are ready to validate the entry.

Main Menu Path: Administration Console > Security > Role Assignment
To validate the entry against the result set of the snap search only for members of one Role:
1. Create and assign the role (if it is not done already).
2. Select or create a role in the organigram tree. In its subtree, select the companies where data validation is
required.
3.2 233
3. In iScala, link the snap search- based validation to a role. In the Snap Search Link Properties window,
select Use for Validation.
4. Click Assign to Roles. The Assign Roles To Snap Search Link window with the lists of Available roles
and Assigned roles displays.
5. Use the Add and Remove buttons to assign the required role.
Now, the validation snap search is used to validate data entry in the specified field for all users if they are
working in the companies where the role is mapped (that is true if step 3 was applied).
Assign the Snap Search to Validate the Field
To assign the snap search to validate the field:
1. In the Status Code field, click the down arrow near the field and select the Manage Links command. The
Manage Links window displays a list of assigned field links.
2. Click Add. The Snap Search Link Type dialog box displays.
3. In the Snap Search Link Type dialog box, select the Public visibility option to make snap search available
to all users and Local scope option to apply the setting to the current field only.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Snap Search Link Properties dialog, in the Select Snap Search combo, select the Value 1..4 snap
search.
6. Select the Use for validation option to use a linked snap search for validation.
7. Click OK. The validation snap search is assigned.

To validate the entry against the result set of the snap search only for members of one Role, you can assign
roles to snap search links. In this case, the validation snap search will be used to validate data entry in the
specified field for all users when they are working in companies where the role is mapped.
Parameter-Driven Validation Snap Search
In complex cases, when the user entry cannot be validated using valid result set ("field must be nonempty", "all
values must begin with A"), you can use a snap search with a single parameter.
Use a Parameter-driven validation
To use a parameter-driven validation snap search, first, create a snap search with one user-defined parameter:
1. Start the Snap Search Builder tool.
2. From the Snap Search menu, select Parameters. The Parameters window displays.
3. In the Name column, enter @Value and press Enter.
4. Click OK.
234 3.2
5. From the Snap Search menu, select Use SQL. After the confirmation, the lower pane – SQL is activated.
6. Enter the following query that will check that input text is not empty: select @Value as [Acceptable]
where @Value is NOT NULL AND @Value <>N''
7. From the File menu, select Save. The Save as dialog displays.
8. In the Snap Search Name field, enter the name of the newly created snap search - Non-empty customer.
9. Click OK.
10. Close the Snap Search Builder tool.
Link the Newly Created Snap Search
Now, link the newly created snap search to a field as a validation snap search.
1. Since each snap search has an associated permission, and permissions are loaded during user logon, first
log off from iScala and re-logon.
3. In the Entry of Order tab, click the down arrow to the right of the Order Customer field and select
Manage links from the menu.
4. In the Manage Links window, click Add.
5. In the Snap Search Link Type window, click OK to use default settings.
6. In the Snap Search Link Properties window, select the required Non-empty customer snap search from
the list in the Snap Search field.
7. Select the Use for validation check box to use this snap search for field value validation.
8. Select the Use uppercase value for validation if you want to compare the data entered by users against
the result set of the snap search regardless of the case.
9. If you need to perform validation only for specific roles, click Assign to Roles and in the Assign Roles to
Snap Search Link window, select the roles for which the field value validation is required.
10. Click OK.
11. In the Manage Links window, click Close.

Now, when a user enters the value in the Order Customer field of the Enter/Adjust Order routine and presses
Enter to switch to the next field, the system starts the Non-empty customer snap search and compares the
entered value against the condition set for the snap search: the Non-empty customer snap search checks
that input text is not empty. If the input value is non-empty, the validation is passed successfully and the
user switches to the next field. If the input value is empty, the validation fails and the system displays the
warning.
3.2 235
Printing from Snap Searches
You can print the results of a snap search if a Microsoft ® Reporting Services Report with the corresponding
name exists.
Create an MSRS Report for Snap Search Results Printout
Saving the current snap search as a stand-alone Microsoft ® SQL Server ® Reporting Services (MSRS) report
definition file (RDL format) allows users to customize the layout of the report template (for example, if necessary,
to adjust the width of columns), to use it as an iScala menu item or for snap search results printout.
To export a snap search as an Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services report:
1. Create and save a new snap search or open an existing snap search in the Snap Search Builder.
2. From the File menu, select Save As Report to save the created snap search as a stand-alone Microsoft SQL
Server Reporting Services report definition file (in RDL format).
3. Ask your system administrator to upload the customized template to the Microsoft SQL Server Reporting
Services server.
Print Snap Search Results
To print snap search results:
1. Verify you have Print Snap Search Results permission.
2. Start the iScala routine. Click the down arrow to the right of the field to view the list of the snap searches
linked to the field.
3. Select the required snap search.
4. In the Snap Search result window that displays, click Print.
Administration Console
The iScala Administration Console is a set of tools that can be used to perform various configuration and
administration tasks on the iScala installation.
Output Channel Configuration
Before printing documents in iScala, you need to select an Output Channel which defines the default output
type (printer, file, email, and so on), page and font settings, associated document templates, and other related
options. Three general types of Output Channels exist in iScala:
• Standard output - Used for sending the output to a printer, file, email, and so on; channels of this type use
the SAP ® Crystal Reports ® reporting engine and can use report templates created in Crystal Reports or
textual ones
236 3.2
• Direct output - Used for saving the output in a plain text file; channels of this type use textual report templates
• Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services output - Reports use Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services
and support output targets (file, email, printer) and file formats that MSRS support. Report templates can be
textual or ones created for and uploaded to Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services
Create a New Output Channel
Main Menu Path: Administration Console > Output Channels

To create a new Output Channel:
1. Right-click the Output channels node and select Create New Output Channel. The Output Channel
Properties dialog displays.
2. Enter the Output channel name and use the Show Preview check box to specify whether a print preview
displays before sending the report to the output target.
3. Specify the Output type.
4. Click Next.
5. In the Targets tab, select a target and navigate to the corresponding tab.
6. Adjust the target properties and specify whether you need to use the local default printer for report printing.
Create an Output Channel Group
To create an output channel group:
1. Right-click Output channels > Groups and select Create New Group.
2. Specify the Group name and Description.
3. Click Add to add a specific output channel to the group.
4. Click OK.
Delete an Output Group
Main Menu Path: Administration Console > Output Channels > Output Channel Groups
To delete an output channel group:
1. In the list in the right pane, right-click the output channel group.
2. Select Delete from the context menu.
3.2 237
Security Value Pack
A secure environment that protects a company's assets is a basic requirement for doing business. Creating and
maintaining a secure environment requires careful planning of procedures and making well-informed purchasing
decisions for hardware and software - including enterprise software. iScala was designed with security in mind
and has strong built-in support for all elements of your organization's security policy.
Re-authentication
The application settings can force a user to perform an additional login (re-authentication) to ensure that a user
who has been granted permission to access a protected resource is the same person who was initially authenticated
in the system. The user is requested to re-submit his or her logon credentials.
To change reauthentication mode for an action:
1. In the iScala Administration Console, click the Menus node.
2. In the list in the right pane, right-click the menu the action belongs to, and select Properties. The Menu
Properties dialog displays.
3. In the tree menu in the right pane, find the action.
4. Right-click the action and select Properties.
5. In the Reauthentication list at the bottom of the dialog, select On or Off.
6. Click OK.
Auto-logoff on Timeout
You can configure the application to automatically log off an inactive user session when the specified timeout
expires.
Main Menu Path: Administration Console > iScala Installations > <Server Name>
To set auto-logoff on timeout:
1. Right-click the logon server icon in the iScala Administration Console tree.
2. Select Properties in the context menu.
3. Click the Other Properties tab.
4. Use the Autologoff interval in minutes to enter the time interval of user inactivity measured in minutes.
Roles and Rights
Enterprise Organigram in iScala represents the hierarchical structure of user accounts. User accounts are associated
with one or more organigram Groups. Each group is granted a set of security item permissions. Security items
control a functionality to which access rights can be granted. Sets of security item permissions that are assigned
to Groups are called Roles. The security model of iScala is managed through Roles.
238 3.2
Main Menu Path: Administration Console > Security > Granted Permissions
To edit permission settings for a role:
1. Select the role you want to change permissions for in the Roles pane. Now you can see all permissions for
security items associated with the role in the right pane. The permissions are grouped in tabs by different
categories of security items.
2. Click the respective check box in the Granted column.
Enterprise Organigram
The tree of organigram groups is displayed in the Organigram pane to the right. The Unassociated Users pane
lists iScala users who can be associated with the organigram group currently selected in the Organigram pane.
The Associated Users pane lists users who are currently associated with the group.
1. In the Organigram pane, select the first organigram group the user should be assigned to.
2. Click on the user name in the Unassociated Users pane and drag it to the Associated Users pane or just
double-click the user name.
3. In the Organigram pane, select the second organigram group the user should be assigned to.
4. Click on the same user name in the Unassociated Users pane and drag it to the Associated Users pane
or just double-click the user name.
Role Assignment
The organigram tree is displayed in the middle pane under Organigram title. A list of all defined roles in a three-level
tree structure is displayed in the rightmost pane under Roles tile. On the top-level are the roles themselves. The
subtree of each of these nodes is filled according to the companies and financial years defined in the installation.
Thus, when a check is placed on the top-level node, permissions assigned to the corresponding role are applied
to the organigram node (or, actually, users belonging to that organigram node) selected in the Organigram pane
regardless of company or financial year. When a check is placed on the company-level sub-node, permissions
assigned to the corresponding role are applied to users belonging to the orgnode selected in the Organigram
pane when they are logged on to a specified company, regardless of financial year. Finally, when a year-level
subnode is selected, permissions given to the role are applied when a user belonging to the corresponding
orgnode has logged on to a specified company for a specified financial year.
To assign a role to an organigram group for the whole installation:
1. Select an organigram group.
2. In the Roles pane, select the check box near the role that should be assigned to the group.
Assign a Role to an Organigram Group For Selected Companies
2. In the Roles pane, click the + (plus sign) near the role name to expand the role node.
3. Select the check box near the companies. For these companies, the role is assigned to the group.
3.2 239
Assign a role to an Organigram Group for a Particular Financial Year
2. In the Roles pane, click the + (plus sign) near the role name to expand the role node.
3. Click the + (plus sign) near the company name to expand the company subnode and display the financial
years available for this company.
4. Select the check box near the financial years.
Field Level Security
You can set any iScala field to be viewable, editable, or mandatory only for a particular group of users. With the
Field Security feature, you can define permission for visibility, edit ability or field bypassing.
In the example below, you will apply security settings to a specific field in Enter/Adjust Stock Items.
Configure Field Level Security Settings
To configure field level security settings:
1. In the Stock Code field, press F4. Select a stock item.
2. In the dialog window, select the Basic Info screen.
3. Navigate to Tools/Show Field Names and hover the mouse over Status code field.
4. If the Show Field Names option is turned on, iScala displays a tool tip with the field name when you hover
the mouse over a screen field. In the following steps, you will make the field invisible.
5. Navigate to Tools > Manage Field Security and click the line for the field name.
6. At the bottom of the screen, click the Edit button. The Edit Security Binding screen displays. In the Edit
Security Binding screen, select the field.
7. Next to the Visibility property, click the Select button to bind the visibility property of this field to a security
permission. The Select Security Item window displays.
8. Select the Custom Security folder in the tree on the left – this is the only folder where you can create new
permissions; any existing permissions can also be selected to control field settings.
9. Click the Create child item button. The new security permission is created under the Custom Security
node.
10. Enter StatusVisibility as a child item name.
11. Click OK.
12. Click OK to close the Edit Security Binding screen.
240 3.2
13. In the Manage Field Security screen, verify the field is linked to the StatusVisibility permission.
14. Click OK to close the Manage Field Security window.
15. Log off iScala.
Granted Permissions
1. Select the System Administrators role and click the Custom Security tab at the right. The Custom Security
tab displays the security item you created. If it is not visible, right-click the Granted Permissions node, and
select Refresh. Set the permissions to deny (red X) for the system administrator role.
2. In iScala, expand the Stock Control folder, expand the Stock Items/Enquiries folder, and start the Enter/Adjust
Stock Items program.
The status code field is invisible.
Make Data Entry Mandatory for a Field
To prevent a user from bypassing a field on a form (using PgDn, ENTER keys or NEXT button), thus making data
entry mandatory for a field, you can deny the Bypassing permission and assign a validation snap search which
would apply the necessary validation. To make data entry mandatory for fields you should do the following steps:
• Assign a permission to Bypass the field (create a custom security item or use an existing one)
• Set up validation snap search for the field
• Deny bypassing permission
You can set any iScala field to be mandatory only for a particular group of users or for all users.
Here are the following ways of providing control over form fields:
• Assigning a Custom Permission to field(s) Bypassing properties. You should first create a security item - Custom
Permission, and then assign it to the Bypassing of the field(s) you select. Custom Permission can then be
mapped to a user group in Administration Console Security node.
• Assigning existing standard security item to field(s) - Bypassing. In this case, only the users granted a certain
standard permission will be able to avoid entering a value into the field(s).
Assign a Permission to Bypass The Field
In the following example, you will assign a permission to bypass the Status Code field in Stock Control > Stock
Items/Enquiries > Enter/Adjust Stock Items, create a validation snap search, assign it to validate the Status Code
field, and deny bypassing permission.
To assign a permission to Bypass the field:
1. In the Status Code field, press F4. Select a stock item.
2. Navigate to Status Code field.
3. To find out the control name, select Tools > Show field names (so that it becomes checked) and hover the
mouse over the Status Code edit box - the tooltip will show control name.
3.2 241
4. Navigate to Tools/Manage Field Security and click the line for the field name.
5. Click Edit.
6. In the Fields list, select the field you wish to edit security assignments for.
7. To assign a new security item that will be bound to field bypassing, In the Edit Security Binding dialog
box, click Select next to the Bypassing field.
8. In the Select Security Item dialog, select and expand the Custom Security node (this is the only node
where new security items can be created).
9. Click Create child item and enter SC Status Code Bypassing as the security item name; press Enter.
10. Click OK to select the newly created security item - it will display in the Bypassing field.
11. Click OK.
New Field Security Permissions
New Field Security Permissions are applied to fields on the next form run after you change field assignments. But
if permissions were changed during session, they will be applied only after you re-login to iScala.
Deny Bypassing Permission
1. Select the System Administrators role and click the Custom Security tab at the right. The Custom
Security tab displays the security item SC Status Code Bypassing you created. If it is not visible, right-click
the Granted Permissions node, and select Refresh. Set the permissions to deny (red X) for the system
administrator role (this assumes that the user account used for testing has that role).
2. Log off iScala.

To verify you are unable to bypass the Status Code field or leave it empty, re-login to iScala, expand the
Stock Control folder, expand the Stock Items/Enquiries folder, and start Enter/Adjust Stock Items program.
Try to bypass the Status Code field with PgDn, ENTER keys or NEXT button or leave it empty. The system
gives a warning.
Microsoft Server Reporting Services
Microsoft Server Reporting Services (MSRS) is a server-based report generation software system from Microsoft.
It can be used to prepare and deliver a variety of interactive and printed reports and is administered via a web
interface. Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is included in Developer, Standard, and Enterprise editions of
Microsoft SQL Server as an install option.
iScala supports Microsoft Reporting Services, along with Crystal Reports. Support for Microsoft SQL Server
Reporting Services is added so that anywhere in iScala, where a Crystal report can be created, Microsoft SQL
Server Reporting Services can be used as an alternative.
In addition to using Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services for rendering reports for iScala business logic, it is
also possible to create an Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services report and link it to an iScala menu for direct
user access.
242 3.2
In addition to using Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services for rendering reports for iScala business logic, it is
also possible to create an Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services report and link it to an iScala menu for direct
user access.
To add a Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services Report to an iScala menu:
Add a Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services Report
Main Menu Path: Administration Console > Menus
1. In the iScala Administration Console, click the Menus node. In the list in the right pane, right-click the menu
you want to add a custom Action to, and select Properties. Menu Properties dialog is displayed.
2. In the right pane, right-click the menu tree node to which you want to add your Action.
3. Select New Action from the context menu.
4. Specify the action properties such as name, type, parameters. Specify the URL of the Microsoft SQL Server
Reporting Services report. You can use the report parameters to configure the look and feel of your reports.
Access iScala Company Database
In order for the Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services report to access iScala company databases on behalf of
a user, and for it to run on the data that belongs to the company/year the user is logged on to, create the report
in a way that allows such behavior.
Note In order for Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services reports to automatically pick up a user's current
company/year and the connection string, iScala Reporting Services Connector must be installed.
1. Create a report based on a text query or generic query designer.
2. Add several additional parameters to the report, for example:

• Mandatory company code
• Company year
• Mandatory iScala GUID parameter that identifies a user’s logon session
• Mandatory LogonServer name
3. Modify the query to insert parameters to the query text, for example:
SELECT * FROM SL010100 should be represented as EXECUTE (N’SELECT * FROM SL01’ + @CC + N’00’)
You can assign any name to a query parameter but ensure the company code parameter is always named
@CC because the SQL iScala Provider uses this parameter to obtain the connection string to the correct
database. If the report includes several queries with different data sources, the company code query parameter
must be named @CC for each query. At the same time, report parameters assigned to it can be different.
4. Add permissions to the account, which Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is working under, to connect
to the database or use the SQL authentication in the Administration Console.
5. Add DCOM rights to the account, which Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is working under, to
connect to ScaLogon if Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services and ScaLogon run on different machines.
3.2 243
iScala Reconciliation Tool
Using the Reconciliation Tool, you can reconcile accounts existing in the General Ledger module against those
in the Stock Control, Sales Ledger, Purchase Ledger, and Asset Management modules. This tool does not change
any iScala data. The tool is available in <iScala installation folder>\Tools\ScaReconcTool\.
After selecting the iScala company whose data you want to reconcile, and setting the financial year for this
company, you can select the modules for reconciliation. After that, you can set the period of accounts reconciliation
and the mode. Then you can click the Create Report button to obtain the selected report.
In this example, the tool displays the Sales Ledger invoice and payment amounts for the account, the General
Ledger transactions that have not derived from Sales Ledger, and the currency revaluation.
Epicor Service Connect
Service Connect enhances the traditional ERP features available in iScala. Solution users can automate tasks and
processes that allow employees to focus on value added activities, such as resolving queries and reviewing unusual
or high value orders, rather than mundane routine data (re)entry tasks.
Service Connect solutions are built to support specific business processes; connecting business entities, business
partners, applications, or users. All Service Connect solutions use open, industry-wide standards and technology,
enabling businesses to deploy solutions now, confident that their investment will remain main-stream for the
foreseeable future. Service Connect solutions harness the power of Web services, XML, and transaction based
processing environments to deliver reliability combined with ease of use.
All Service Connect solutions support the Microsoft .NET ™ Framework. Business logic is executed within the
COM+ environment, which ensures that if programs stop for any reason halfway through processing, incomplete
data changes are rolled-back, preventing the posting of unbalanced transactions and partial database updates.
This combination of Microsoft technologies means that all Service Connect solutions are highly scalable.
All Service Connect Solutions use XML-based documents to provide simple "out-of-the-box" connectivity to
other Service Connect Solutions and applications that support the same XML standards. Businesses that need to
integrate with additional standards (XML or other) can easily do so using the built in Data Mapping tool or
Middleware (for example, Microsoft's BizTalk ® Server). For more information, read the Epicor Service Connect
User Guide.
Workflow Designer
Main Menu Path:iScala > WinDS > Tools > WF Editor or Start Menu > Programs> Epicor Software> Epicor
iScala> Workflow Designer
Processes (or workflows) are the central part of Epicor Service Connect providing a flexible and powerful way of
managing business logic. This enables you to set up the workflow of a business process to execute a set of actions
automatically. A workflow is a sequence of automatic operations and user- performed tasks for processing XML
documents (messages) that contain business information. The main goal of this sequence is to perform certain
business activities. A workflow can contain both technical and business related information.
A workflow can be represented as a diagram consisting of the main actions to be performed within the workflow
and the links (dependencies) between them. Actions are components responsible for a particular business activity.
Links represent directed transfer of business documents (XML messages) between these components. Thus, the
workflow schema is a chain of business actions executed according to the flow specified by the user.
244 3.2
Workflow Designer is a graphical tool used to create and configure workflow processes. Workflows in Workflow
Designer are introduced as diagrams with nodes representing individual workflow components (such as web
methods, tasks, or posters). Each component in the Workflow schema is associated with a technical or
business-related action and has a set of properties. The graphical position of the element icon on the chart is not
important, but what is important is how the components are connected to each other, and the direction of each
of the connections, reflecting the direction of the information flow from one element to another. Connectors
between the nodes can contain XSLT transformations and business rules for documents as well.
Workflow Designer can be run in two modes:
• Editor mode allows you to view existing workflow diagrams, and make limited changes in them (modify
element properties).
• Developer mode allows the Epicor developer to create custom workflows and customize standard workflows.
XML Mapper
Main Menu Path: <iScala installation folder>\Developer\XmlMapper\

The Epicor XML Mapper is a tool for visual designing of conversion from one type of XML document to another.
The mapping is based on knowledge about structure of source and target documents. This information is provided
by XML schemas. XML schema provides detailed specification of how fields (nodes) are organized in the document
and what kind of data they may contain. The mapping between two types of XML documents is illustrated using
links that map source document fields to target ones. When you create and configure a link, you define from
which field in the source document data will be taken, how this data could be modified, and where and under
what conditions the result will be put in the target document.
The most typical case for mapping is simple copying of data. If you want to transform data without any
modifications - changing only the document structure, then just drag a line from the source to target field. Some
complicated scenarios may require additional capabilities that XML Mapper provides you with: setting up conditions,
using functoids (special functions for calculating the target fields' values) and particular cases of mapping.
Using XML Mapper, you can design conversions visually or manually using XSLT as the programming language.
XML Mapper allows you to view and edit visual representation of the mapping as well as the XSLT code
corresponding to visual representation. These two views are always synchronized. Whatever changes you do
using visual mapping, you will be able to see them immediately in the code and vice versa. XML Mapper displays
the structure of both source and target documents as a tree, where each node represents a document field
(node).
Task Monitor
Main Menu Path: System Utilities> Connectivity Solution >Task Monitor

The Task Monitor is an application intended to manage tasks that were generated during workflow execution.
Using Task Monitor, you can:
• View tasks, both completed and assigned to the current user
• Process the tasks assigned to the current user
• View and edit contents of the task XML message
• Approve, reject tasks, or perform other actions set in the corresponding workflow
• View and correct task errors
• Browse the list of completed tasks
3.2 245
Print Monitor
The Print Monitor provides printouts of specified documents by external request. This tool provides an efficient
and cost-saving way of printing documents and labels, e.g. in situations when warehouse personnel receives
packaging of goods, far from any work station with access to iScala but still having access to handhelds and a
local printer.
Note The number of printed copies for the necessary document (an invoice or a product label) is defined
in the Number of copies fields of the Sales Order and Purchase Order modules. To override this parameter
for printing only original document, the PrintRequest.xsd should include the <dta:OneFilePerInvoice> tag
(boolean) with value 1.
Main Menu Path:System Utilities > Connectivity Solution > Print Monitor
The Print Monitor continuously monitors the print request queue for new requests. Should a new request appear,
the tool automatically invokes the requested document printing program with input of output channel and
selection. Before printing make sure you define the output channel.
1. Define the selection criteria in the pop up window.

Scan Interval - Use this field to specify the number of seconds that should elapse between each checking
of the print job queue.
Use the check boxes Product Labels (Purchase Order), Product Labels (Sales Order), Bin Labels, Goods
Receive Notes, Delivery Notes, Delivery Notes (picking), Invoices, and Stock Labels, Box Labels,
Box Contents to specify the document types to be printed. After you made a selection press Continue.
This button is inactive unless you make a selection.
Note You should be granted a permission to specify the document types to be printed. Document
type are defined in the Print Monitor Setup routine.
2. Press Start to launch the program. The monitor status and information about print requests are displayed
on the screen. Documents of selected types from the queue are printed. If no documents can be printed
according to print request parameters, the system sets type status to "Nothing to print".
• You can view the current request statuses and sort the requests in the printing queue by Document,
Created, User, Out Channel, Comment and Status criteria.
• You can select a line in a queue for deleting if necessary. To delete a request, select it, then press Delete
and confirm.
• Use Clear Completed button for removing printed and deleted lines from the queue.
Note You should be granted a permission to delete lines.
3. Press Exit to end the program.
Print Monitor Setup
Use this routine to define the document types availability for selecting in Print Monitor interface.
Main Menu path: System Utilities > Connectivity Solution > Print Monitor Setup
Document types currently used or locked for printing are shown in the screen. The available types are:
• Product Labels (PC)
• Bin Labels
246 3.2
• Goods Received Notes

• Delivery Notes
• Delivery Notes (Picking)
• Invoices
• Product Labels (OR)
• Stock Labels
• Box Labels
• Box Contents
If YES, the document type is locked for printing.
If NO, the document type is allowed fro printing.
Note You should be granted a permission to specify the document types to be printed.
Input Channels
An input channel is intended for transferring information from external applications to iScala. During an input
channel creation, you need to specify the communicators and messages properties.
You can define the listener type for the channel (FILE, FTP, POP3 and so on). Listener is a communicator which
handles XML message receiving. An incoming XML message arrives via an input communication channel, which
has a listener at the receiving end. The listener handles the message and forwards it to the router. The router
then dispatches the message to the corresponding destination and launches a workflow process if necessary.
In the messages properties, you can select the codepage and specify whether the channel is sequential.
Codepage is used by the channel to decode incoming messages. Property values can be selected from the list of
specific codepages. Besides if you use the value From message, the application tries to detect incoming message
encoding automatically.
Input channels can be sequential or non-sequential. For sequential channels, reading and processing of the next
message is started only when processing of the previous one has finished. For non-sequential channels, the next
message is put to the asynchronous queue just after scan interval expires; the processing starts according to
available threads in asynchronous pool and the length of the queue. You can make the channel execute on a
separate thread (if one is available) to guarantee the maximum performance of the channel by marking it as High
Loaded.
Template Tool
The iScala Template Tool is a part of the iScala Administration Console, offering the new functionality for iScala
administrative users.
The main objective of the iScala Template Tool is to help customers manage and control iScala multi-company
and multi-site installations via user-defined templates (groups of major iScala installation configuration parameters).
A template is a list of parameters that describe the corporate business rules and preferences (business parameters).
The list of business parameters is represented as a template meta-base. The template meta-base depends on the
iScala version, and its internal elements (business parameters) are linked to the iScala SQL database elements
(fields and tables) and depend on the iScala business logic.
The iScala template tool allows you to compare, enforce, import, and export parameters. Comparison can involve
template parameters, templates, or companies as a whole. Template comparison shows the differences between
3.2 247
actual data in iScala and etalon values in the template. In this case, if a difference is detected, template data can
be enforced to update the iScala data with etalon values.
Master Data Synchronization
Master Data Synchronization (MDS) is the iScala Template Tool mode that supports synchronizing master data
between different iScala companies. The MDS license allows comparing, enforcing, importing, and exporting
parameters that include master data only, for example, Customers/Suppliers, Stock Items, and so on.
Template Management
To create a new template, you must add and populate a new template.
Main Menu Path: Administration Console > Templates > Templates
To add a new template:
1. Click New Template on the toolbar in the right pane.
2. In the Template name field, enter a name for the new template.
3. In the Centric Type field, select the template type.
4. Click the Add Parameters to template button in the toolbar.
5. To add parameters to the new template, select check boxes next to the required parameters and click OK.
6. The parameters you added display in a list. Select the check boxes next to the parameters you want to add
and click OK. The new template is created and displayed in the list of templates.
Populate a Template
Main Menu Path: Administration Console > Templates > Templates

To populate a template:
1. In the list of templates, select a required template and click Populate Template.
2. The Template population form displays a parameters tree in the right pane and information parameters
within the selected templates.
3. Click Start population.
4. In the dialog box, select from which Company and Financial Year to take data for the template.
5. Click OK.
6. The template parameters are populated with corresponding values.
7. Click OK.
248 3.2
Compare Templates
Main Menu Path: Scala Installations > <Server Name> > Templates > Templates processing
To compare templates:
1. In the list of Installation Templates in the right pane, select the templates you want to compare.
2. Click Process.
3. The Compare and Enforce Templates dialog box displays the information on the selected templates.
4. Click Compare. The Information dialog box displays the comparison information. Click OK to close the
dialog box.
5. To view the comparison details, click the Status field. The new dialog box displays a grid with the comparison
results.
6. You can save the comparison results by clicking Export to Excel on the toolbar.
Enforce Templates
To enforce templates:
1. In the list of Installation Templates in the right pane, select the required template and click Process.
2. In the list of template items in the right pane, select the items that you want to enforce. During the
enforcement, the parameter values from the template are sent to the company database.
3. Click Enforce. In the next dialog box, click Yes. The Information dialog box displays the enforcement
results.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
File Attachments
Generally, an attachment is a single file bound to a business entity instance (for example, customer, sales order,
or stock item). One business entity instance can have multiple attachments. For example, there can be multiple
images attached to one stock item; one image file can be attached to different stock items, but that will be
treated as different copies of that file (editing the file through one stock item will not affect the file copy attached
to the other one).
To attach files to a business entity, you must first create an Attachment Group for this entity. A single Attachment
Group can be attached to different fields on different forms (for example, stock item images can be attached
and viewed using the stock item field in the Stock Item Entry screen, but also using the Stock Code field in the
Sales Order Line Entry screen). Attachment groups can be both company and year dependent.
You can add, remove, or access individual attached files for viewing or editing, and can copy your attachment
to a disk. When editing an attached file, you can also discard any changes made and return to the previously
saved version.
3.2 249
Automation Tool
The iScala Automation Tool (iSAT) is designed to automate labor intensive processes requiring a lot of end user
attention such as entering daily exchange rates or performing Material Requirement Planning (MRP) calculations.
Such tasks can be scheduled to happen after business hours, without supervision when system load is low. It
allows saving manpower and eliminating mistakes associated with the human factor.
The basic use of iScala Automation Tool is to record a sequence of actions and play them on iScala. While you
record the actions, iScala Automation Tool creates command files. Having recorded a command file you can play
it on iScala. These command files can be put together in a script file. All these files are ordinary text files written
in an iScala Automation Tool scripting language. If you wish, you may edit them. The Scripting language allows
you to organize cycles, has integer and string variables, arithmetic operators, and commands to perform actions
on iScala.
iSAT features the following elements:
• iScala Automation Tool shell - It is used for running Player, Recorder and Utilities, creating and editing
command files and scripts, setting parameters, that influence execution of tests.
• Recorder - It records series of user actions that are saved in a command file. These files are used to create
script files that may be required to perform a particular test on iScala.
• Player - This component plays created scripts on iScala.
• Utilities - iSAT features a number of utilities for result comparison procedure. These help you in creation of
data files for the comparison subroutines and in the analysis of result comparison log files.
You can perform scheduled import/export routines to exchange information with the remote systems. For example,
when several sales/purchase orders are entered daily in the remote offices of the company, information
synchronization with iScala system installed in the company headquarters is required. For this purpose, you can
compose scripts, performing data import/export from/to the multiple iScala modules; and execute these scripts
according to the specified schedule (for example, after business hours). As a result, data synchronization between
iScala installed in the company headquarters and in the remote offices is done. Epicor Portal and iScala can be
integrated using a reduced-functionality, free-of-charge version of the iScala Automation Tool Player, the Lite
Player, or standard Player of iScala Automation Tool. This solution provides Epicor Portal users with the capability
to launch iScala screens and navigate to the record they clicked in the Portal view. The Lite Player with the default
list of scripts is installed together with iScala client.
System Utilities
The System Utilities module is not used regularly; however, when installing the system, this module is used
intensively. System Utilities contain various administration and setup routines. You can adjust user properties,
change personal passwords, enter business related company data, as well as check, clear, and compress file
contents, set up calendars and the currency file, and adjust standard forms and outputs.
Dynamic Email Setup
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Documents > Dynamic Email Address Setup
This functionality allows you to configure dynamic email addressing for sending report data to a mail recipient
as an attached file. For each supported document (purchase order, service order invoice/credit note, sales order
quotation, and so on), it is possible to define the source table from where the email addresses are taken (for
example, channel setup, invoice/order/delivery customer, sales order, delivery address, and salesman). You can
define the sources for the TO-, CC-, and BCC addresses. The behavior for any blank address source can also be
defined.
250 3.2
iScala Backup and Restore
The Backup routine in iScala is used before carrying out processing massive data volumes, but is not designed to
replace the normal SQL Server backup routines. Use this functionality to create backups of tables that will be
updated before you perform such operations. If an operation is interrupted during processing, you can restore
files before running the update again. This process is not performed as quickly as the special backup programs.
If any incident arises during data handling and your files are corrupted, the only guaranteed way to bring the
damaged data back to life is to restore them from your previous backup.
Report File Name Template
Use this routine to specify a template that will define report files naming.
Important Before running the routine, check the Output Channel is configured correctly.
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Documents > Report File Name Template
1. Report File Naming Template tab: Document ID.

Select from the list a supported document for which Report File Name Template should be configured:
Document ID Report File Name

1 Sales Order Invoice/Credit Note
2 Consolidated Sales Order Invoice/Credit Note
3 Service Order Invoice/Credit Note
4 Purchase Order
5 Sales Order Invoice/Credit Note (History)
6 Advance Invoice
7 Prepayment Invoice
8 Consolidated Service Order Invoice/Credit Note
9 Contract Invoice/Credit Note
10 Consolidated Contract Invoice/Credit Note
11 Project Invoice
12 Sales Order Quotation
13 Sales Order Confirmation
14 Sales Order Delivery Note
15 Proforma Invoice
16 Request for Quotation (PC)
17 Reminder Confirmation (PC)
18 Reminder Delivery (PC)
19 Sales Ledger Statement/Reminder
20 Purchase Ledger Statement
21 Purchase Ledger Cheque Register
3.2 251
Document ID Report File Name

22 Purchase Ledger Automatic Payment (E9, 9)
23 Payment Notification per Supplier
24 Interest Invoice
The document name and ID display in the Document ID field.

• File Name Template: Enter report file name template.
Important Do not use the following special symbols: \, /, >, <, :, *, ?, “, |.
Note The > and < symbols can be used only for specifying placeholders for context-based elements.
Important Name template is a string consisting of any symbol (excluding \, /, >, <, :, *, ?, “, |) and
placeholders – special character sequence starting with < symbol, followed by:
• Pre-defined for each document type integer value, optionally followed by one of the string modifiers: Lx
(left x symbols), Rx (right x symbols) or Sx,y (substring starting from x position and having y symbols) or
• Common for all documents user or company related code.
and ending with > symbol. Using of < and > symbols with any other purposes is prohibited and considered
as incorrect.
• Relative Path Template: Enter relative path template.

Important Do not use the following special symbols: \, /, >, <, :, *, ?, “, |.
Note The > and < symbols can be used only for specifying placeholders for context-based elements.
• Allowed context-based elements: This section contains all the context-based elements allowed for
particular Document ID.
All lines in Element ID and Element Name columns are read-only. You can enter some values only in
Sample Value column (white lines). This values will be used in Resulting file.
Note Do not use the following special symbols: \, /, >, <, :, *, ?, “, |.
• Save: Press this button to save changes.
2. Symbol Substitute Table: Press this button to save changes.

• Symbol To Replace: Predefined and filled by the system column.
• Replacement String: Enter substitute string.
Note Do not use the following special symbols: \, /, >, <, :, *, ?, “, |.
• Save: Press this button to save changes.

• Cancel: Exit the routine without saving.
252 3.2
Creating Templates
Complete the following steps to create a template (e.g. Project Invoice):
1. Run the Report File Name Template routine.
2. In the Report ID select supported document for which Report File Name Template should be configured
(e.g. Project Invoice).
3. In the File Name Template enter report file name template.

Note If you leave this field empty, report file will be named randomly.
Important Name template is a string consisting of any symbol (excluding \, /, >, <, :, *, ?, “, |) and
placeholders – special character sequence starting with < symbol, followed by:
• Pre-defined for each document type integer value, optionally followed by one of the string modifiers:
Lx (left x symbols), Rx (right x symbols) or Sx,y (substring starting from x position and having y
symbols) or
• Common for all documents user or company related code and ending with > symbol. Using of <
and > symbols with any other purposes is prohibited and considered as incorrect.
4. Enter Relative Path Template. This field is optional and defines in what folder the file should be stored.
Note Relative path consists of subfolders list separated by \ symbol. Folders names within this part
can also be content-dependent, i.e. placeholders are used in the similar way as they are used in file
name template.
5. Move to Allowed context-based elements section. In this section you can see a complete list of elements
(placeholders) that can be used within File Name Template and Relative Path Template for the selected
document type, in our case – Project Invoice.
Note Modifiers can be used only with elements: <1> - <5>, e.g. element <4> (Invoice Date) has
YYYYMMDD format - 20150409. But you can define your own date format by using modifiers, like:
<4R2> - <4S5,2> - <4L4>. The result:09 - 04 – 2015.
6. Resulting File section helps to see what filename (with relative path, if one is specified) will be generated
during the real report creation. In this section you can see the result of entered templates applying (File
Name Template and Relative Path Template) to the values that user can enter in the Sample Value cells.
[other] Example:
• You want files to be named using invoice number and invoice customer code: In the File Name
Template enter the file name, e.g.: INV# <2> - CUSTOMER <3>.
• You want files to be stored in the folder which has reference to the Project for which invoice is
being created. This folder should be within the folder having reference to the date when invoices
are printed: In the Relative Path Template, specify the path, e.g.: INVOICES FROM <4R2> - <4S5,2>
- <4L4>\PROJECT# <1>.
• Once you’ve filled in the following: at the bottom of the form, in the Resulting File section you
will see the path and file name generated using entered templates and sample values given by
user – Project Number, Invoice Number and etc.
3.2 253
7. Press Save to save changes.

Note Though it is considered that File Name Template and Relative Path Template are valid (i.e. they
don’t contain prohibited symbols), when placeholders are replaced with the real values during the
report creation, it may appear that resulting file name contains prohibited symbols. For example, when
Project Number (element <1>) is used as a part of report file name and this project is PRJ*123. File
with * symbol in its name can’t be saved on disk! To avoid such problems, you can specify a substitute
string for each of the prohibited symbols in Symbol Substitute Table, e.g.: replace * symbol with
(asterisk) string.
Using Templates
Complete the following steps to understand how you can use a template (e.g. Project Invoice):
1. Create simple project.
2. Select Invoicing Plan in the Menu.
3. In the Invoicing Plan set Price model = 2 (Fixed price).
4. Set some amount for Fixed Price, e.g. 1000
5. In the Invoicing Plan lines, set Event = 1, press F6 in Date field (current iScala date), pass other fields with
Enter: Move to the next line and press *.
6. Create Invoice Proposal:
7. Print Invoice:
Note Separate file per invoice must be set to Yes!
8. After printing the project invoice, click Settings...:
9. Close Settings... and press Process button.
10. Check the folder and open the file.
Report Format Editor
Main Menu path: System Utilities > Documents > Document Definition Adjustment > Report Format
Editor
1. To launch the Report Format Editor:

Select the Report Format Editor command from the iScala main menu. The Report Format Editor opens with
the DDF templates belonging to the iScala company you are logged on to.
2. Double-click the file you want to customize.
3. Select the template file you want to edit.

The file opens in the right pane.
254 3.2
Important Report Format Editor does not allow you to edit standard template files directly. Instead, when
you click or press Ctrl+S, a new custom template is created containing the same data as the original file.
The system creates a custom DDF file with the following name:
<Report name><Company code><Document code><Industry dimension><Language co
de>.DDF
For example, if you create a custom version of MP04 Picking List Work Order for company 01, industry
dimension GEN, document code 00 and language ENG, the file name is: MP040100GENENG.DDF
Pay attention that standard templates are located at
<iScala-installation-folder>\WinDS\Resources\Reports\Standard\DDF\<module>
while custom templates are created in

<iScala-installation-folder>\WinDS\Resources\Reports\Custom\DDF\<module>
folders. When running a report, the system searches the appropriate template by its name by using the
following algorithm:
1. System always searches the appropriate report template first in Custom, then, if not found, in Standard
report folder.
2. System searches the report template with the requested settings (exact name):
• If not found, system searches one with document code 00
• If not found, system searches one with company code 01
• If not found, system searches one with company code 01 and document code 00
• If not found, system searches one with company code 00
• If not found, system searches one with company code 00 and document code 00
3. For each of the above, system searches the report with the certain <industry vertical dimension>,
<current report language code>:
• If not found, system searches one with the following combination of vertical dimension and report
language: <GEN>, <current report language code>
language: <GEN>, <parent of report language per language hierarchy>
language: <GEN>, <parent of parent of report language per language hierarchy>
language: <empty vertical dimension>, <current report language code>
language: <empty vertical dimension>, <parent of report language per language hierarchy>
language: <empty vertical dimension>, <parent of parent of report language per language
hierarchy>
Note When you select to adjust the standard DDF templates of ST - ST02 Commission Report and
SC - SC21 Box Content, the standard Document Code for them (displayed in the right pane) can be
selected from the range of 00 to 99.
For other modules the Document Code field value falls within the range of 00 to 09.
The same algorithm is applied to searching RPT report templates.
3.2 255
4. Modify the file as required.

To insert a specific DDF code in the document body, click the tab corresponding to the target section, select
the required code and click or press Ctrl+I. To cut a DDF code select it and press Ctrl+X.
5. To find out a specific DDF code meaning, type the code in the Find box in the left section of the window
and click Modify search criteria by clicking. In the invoked dialog box set the required criteria.
Note If no DDF codes meet the search criteria, a system message is displayed.
6. Save your changes by clicking or pressing Ctrl+S
7. Print your customized DDF template by clicking or pressing Ctrl+P.
8. Exit the routine by clicking or pressing Alt+X.
UDDB
The application's User-Defined Database (UDDB) tables are used to store business data that cannot be entered
in the standard data tables. This custom data can be linked to objects such as Customers, Suppliers, and Stock
Items, but it can also be unlinked data. The structure of UDDB tables is defined in the Administration Console.
System Utility routines are used to link custom tables to the system's objects, and to specify validation ranges
and default values for table fields.
Main Menu Path: Administration Console > User-Defined Databases > User-Defined Tables
UDDB tables can be linked or unlinked. Linked tables are associated with specific iScala object types. Unlinked
tables can be used to store general information which is common for all objects. After linking an iScala table to
UDDB you created, you define the field properties in the table columns (name, data type, length, and so on.)
Main Menu Path: System Utilities > Extra Data > Business Data Delimitations
Once the UDDB is created, the following settings should be performed:
1. Defining a range of iScala objects (such as customers, stock items, sales orders, and so on).
2. Setting up default values and validation criteria for individual table fields. Validation rules are defined
irrespective of any specific UDDB table. The same rule can be used for as many UDDB fields as required.
3. Assigning validation rules and default values to specific UDDB fields using the objects range.
You can build UDDB chains that contain one or more UDDB tables associated with a particular built-in iScala
table. If a UDDB chain is activated for a particular range of iScala objects, when the user opens an object
falling into the range for editing, the system prompts for the data belonging to the UDDB chain.
256 3.2
Epicor iScala User Guide Index
Index
A chart of accounts and currencies 129
close an invoice 127
access iScala company database 243 close invoice 84
accounting 129 close picking lists 169
activate direct invoicing in the company file 121 commission management 225
activate export control 97 common picking 90
activate the delivery milestone 191 compare templates 249
add a microsoft SQL server reporting services report 243 configure automatic accounting schedule rules 75
add bins 161 configure commission parameters 221
add or change currency definition 38 configure field level security settings 240
additional purchase costs 187 consolidation 138
adjust a purchase proposal 176 consume assets 212
adjust an automatic payment proposal 199 controlled distribution 94
adjust asset values 212 convert a chart accounts 139
adjust recognized commission 226 convert a purchase proposal 177
adjust salesman information 219 convert a quotation to an order 79
administration console 236 convert a stock requirements planning replenishment proposal
advanced credit control 94 to a purchase order 171
advanced tax engine 41 create a balance report 116
allocations 81 create a bill of material template 160
apply a discount schema 158 create a compressed printout 203
approve an order line manually 93 create a counting proposal 172
asset and resource management 207 create a detailed printout 203
asset management 207 create a forecast 170
asset transactions 212 create a new output channel 237
assign a permission to bypass the field 241 create a purchase order and link it to a contract 188
assign a role to an organigram group for a particular financial create a purchase order proposal 176
year 240 create a sales ledger summary report 117
assign a role to an organigram group for selected companies 239 create a snap search and link it to a Field 229
assign accounting codes 210 create a summary printout 204
assign the snap search to validate the field 234 create a supplier statement 206
ATP interaction with lead time managment functionality 89 create a supplier summary 205
authorize an invoice 186 create a traditional stocktake list 165
authorize and convert requisitions 181 create an allocation manually 82
auto-logoff on timeout 238 create an automatic drop shipment 81
automation tool 250 create an export control rule 99
available to promise 72, 86, 88 create an MSRS Report 236
create an output channel group 237
create cashbook accounts 134
B create invoice issued statistics 222
balance reports 203 create mass allocations 81
balance transfers 145 create or adjust an 198
batch pricing 158 create serial number 159
bill of materials 159 creating templates 253
bin management and quality control 161 credit control 105
BOM configuration 159 customers and accounts receivable (sales ledger) 102
customers and customer information 102
customize an entry type 31
C customize purchase control parameters 66
customize toolbars 26
calculate commission 226 cycle counting 172
cancel picking results 169
cashbooks 134
change the book entry date, payable account, and dimensional D
187, 188
change the user interface 27 define accounting codes 61
charge periodic interest 107 define accounting options 104
3.2 257
Index Epicor iScala User Guide
define atp rescheduling priority 74 enter additional order information 105

define ATP rescheduling priority 87 enter an invoice and payment transactions 110
define basic customer information 102 enter an invoice header 125
define batch templates 154 enter an order 76
define calendars 40 enter an order confirmation 183
define costing and accounting information 151 enter bank transactions 136
define credit and payment terms 105 enter basic warehouse information 63
define delivery methods 52, 57 enter batch dates 155
define delivery terms 57 enter batch details 155
define delivery terms to print 52 enter batch information 154
define discounts 157 enter check payments 137
define payment terms 56 enter codes for the supplier 195
define payment terms to print 51 enter commodity codes 220
define reports in other modules 228 enter credit limit for a customer 95
define stock control parameters 58 enter credit notes 111
define the delivery address 103 enter currencies in the currency file 121
define the levels of credit limit excess approval 109 enter currency and tax information 103
define warehouse area information 64 enter currency rates 39, 122
delete a stock item 125 enter customer invoice payment receipts 84
delete an asset 214 enter data in form fields 29
delete an output group 237 enter exchange rates 132
delete dimensions entries 131 enter invoice lines 126
delete picking list 169 enter invoice parameters 126
deliver a sales order 80 enter item life-cycle information 152
delivery 80 enter lead time elements 189
delivery approvals 93 enter life cycle phases 147
deny bypassing permission 242 enter maintenance information 151
determine bin information 152 enter manual payments 197
direct invoicing 121 enter master assets 211
display quantities 155 enter master planning information 153
dispose of an asset 213 enter material codes 227
documentation kit 32 enter measurements and units 150
drop shipment 192 enter miscellaneous information 152
dynamic email setup 250 enter new resources 216
enter or adjust calendar collection 41
enter or adjust commission 225
E enter or adjust generic calendar 40
enable asset transaction codes 210 enter or change an accounting dimension entry 129
enable consolidation 138 enter order information 104
enable continuous consolidation 140 enter order lines 76
enable periodic consolidation 139 enter packaging codes 227
enable quality control 162 enter parameters 123
enforce templates 249 enter payments 143
enquire currency rates 132 enter picking results 92, 166
enquire individual invoices 205 enter purchasing information 150
enquire on the order file 99 enter quotation lines 79
enquire purchase orders 183 enter requisitions 180
enquire resources 218 enter sales and budgeting information 149
enquire the stock file 128 enter sales order parameters 74
enquire transaction lines 142 enter statistics and budget information 103
enter a box 91 enter stock items 148
enter a delivery note 184 enter stock taking results 172
enter a lead time rule 190 enter supplier invoices 184
enter a new payment method 199 enter supplier prices and discounts 174
enter a prepayment document 201 enter suppliers 194
enter a price list 124 enter tax rates 39
enter a sales order 76 enter transactions 135
enter a shipment 167 enter unauthorized invoices 185
enter a supplier invoice/credit note 196 enter user-defined information 151
enter a tax code 122 enter warehouse accounting information 63
enter accounting dimensions 37 enter warehouse details 65
enter accounting information 196 Enter/Adjust Order 77
258 3.2
enter/adjust order lines 177 microsoft server reporting services 242

enter/adjust purchase orders 182 miscellaneous features 229
enterprise organigram 239 modify an invoice 187
epicor service connect 244 modify chart of accounts headings 131
export control 97 modify or update general ledger transactions 137
F N
field level security 240 new field security permissions 242
file attachments 249
forcasting and purchase planning 170
O
G operations 78, 110, 124, 135, 161, 175, 196, 211, 216, 222
order process 76
general ledger enquiries 142 other balance reports 204
general ledger journal 165 other purchase ledger reports 204
general ledger reports 142 other purchase ledger routines 202
general ledger transactions 135 output channel configuration 236
generate a payment forcast 206
generate automatic payment forecast 112
generic bank interface setup 199
P
getting started 18 packaging statistics 227
granted permissions 241 parameter mappings 231
parameter-driven snap searches 231
H parameter-driven validation snap search 234
picking, packing and shipment 166
how to use a factoring company 195 populate a template 248
prepayments 96
prerequisites 219
I pricing 156
input channels 247 print a compressed balance list report 116
introduction 17 print a credit control report 107
invoice periodically 186 print a cycle counting list 172
invoices 125 print a picking list 91, 168
invoicing 82 print a quotation 79
invoicing and payments 110, 196 print a replenishment proposal 171
iScala backup and restore 251 print an EC sales list 119
iScala reconciliation tool 244 print an order confirmation 78
issue stock 164 print and close invoices and credit notes 127
print and invoice journal 112
print checks 137
J print invoices 83
print monitor 246
journal codes 45 print monitor setup 246
print packaging statistics 228
L print payment journals 85
print payment receipts 85
link a prepayment to a sales order 96 print picking list status report 173
link a snap search to a field 230 print prepayment invoices 96
link the newly created snap search 235 print quotation reports 100
print reminders or statements for customers 106
print requisition details 182
M print salesman statistics 225
make a stock transfer 163 print service statistics 224
make date entry mandatory for a field 241 print shipment documents 168
manage advanced discounts 156 print snap search results 236
managing inventory 147 print statistics reports 118
map a parameter to a control 232 print supplier statements 205
mass update weights and materials for stock items 227 print tax reports 119
master data synchronization 248 printing from snap searches 236
merge invoicing 113 procurement, purchasing, and making payments 174
3.2 259
produce and assemble orders for stock control 77 set company parameters 35
program navigation and data entry 29 set parameters 53
promissory notes 143 set the export status on a stock item 98
purchase control parameters 66 set up a bin 65
purchase ledger 53 set up approval levels 95
purchase order types 66 set up asset codes 209
purchase ordering, delivery and invoicing 182 set up asset parameters 207
purchase proposals 176 Set up ATP options for a customer. 87
set up business transaction types for LTM 189
set up cities 41
Q set up common picking in a warehouse 90
quotation process 78 set up correspondence 231
set up credit check execution parameters 95
set up customers 73
R set up departments 180
set up discount and commission information 149
re-authentication 238 set up discounts 157
recalculate a price list 124 set up discounts and requisitions 174
receive stock 164 set up filtering and sorting rules 200
reconcile cashbooks 135 set up general parameters 42
recreate statistics 115, 202 set up geographical units 41
release a picking list for shipment 92 set up licensing for a customer 98
release for shipment 166 set up picking 155
report details 224 set up picking parameters 90
report file name template 251 set up price lists 156
report format editor 254 set up requisition access rights 180
reports 228 set up resource code 215
reports and enquires 99, 142 set up stock items 73, 87
reports and enquiries 115, 128, 173, 203, 214, 218 set up the sales order drop shipment template 192
requisition management setup 179 set up utilized credit limit elements 94
requisitions 178 set up validation snap search 232
resource management 215 set up warehouses 72, 86
resource management reports 218 setup 72, 102, 121, 129, 147, 174, 193, 207, 215, 219
revaluate currency accounts 141 setup suppliers payment method 194
revaluation 141 snap search 229
revalue the purchase ledger 202 snap search builder 229
revalue the sales ledger 114 sort order 224
role assignment 239 statistic definition 223
roles and rights 239 statistics 219
run the snap search 230 stock 124
stock control 58
S stock items 147
stock management 153
sales and purchase statistics 222 stock reports 173
sales ledger 46 stock transactions and counting 163
sales ledger routines 114 supplier enquiries 205
sales management configuration 74 suppliers and accounts payable 193
sales order consolidation 82 suppliers and trading terms 193
sales order delivery 80 system utilities 250
sales order parameters 67
sales order types 67
salesman statistics 225
T
save and load 224 task management 248
screen navigation 30 task monitor 245
security value pack 238 template tool 247
select a BTT for sales management 191 the currency file 132
selection criteria 223 the home screen 19
selling and receiving payments 72 transfer balances to the next year 145
serial numbers 159
service statistics 224
set accounting codes 50, 55 U
set automatic credit hold 106
UDDB 256
260 3.2
update a prepayment 201 use the physical stock list report 173
update payment information 97 use the resource planning board to manage resources 217
update yearly values 214 user stock transactions lists 164
use a parameter-driven validation 234 using templates 254
use a partner balance enquiry 144, 145
use a transaction enquiry 144
use advanced credit check 108
V
use atp rescheduling 88 validate date entry 233
use multiple due dates 113 validate ledger transactions 114
use operational proposals 144 validate the entry 233
use output channels 228 validation snap search 232
use purchase order statistics 222 view customer statements 115
use sales history reports 100 view sales ledger summaries 120
use special function 133
use statistical reports 204
use stock requirement planning 170 W
use switches 64
use tax reports 204 warehouse management 63
use the approval screen 109 workflow designer 244
use the automatic accounting schedule 50, 56, 62 write off an asset to stock 213
use the collection proposal 108
use the currency file 38 X
use the module dependent credit check 109
use the order approval screen 93 xml mapper 245
use the parameters routine 68
3.2 261
262 3.2
Additional information is available at the Education and
Documentation areas of the EPICweb Customer Portal. To access
this site, you need a Site ID and an EPICweb account. To create an
account, go to http://support.epicor.com.

Epicor Iscala 3.2 UserGuide PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Epicor Iscala 3.2 UserGuide PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Epicor iScala User Guide

Chapter 1: Getting Started..............................................................................18

Chapter 2: Application Setup..........................................................................34

Set Up General Parameters.....................................................................................................................42

Chapter 3: Selling and Receiving Payments..................................................72

Configure Automatic Accounting Schedule Rules....................................................................................75

Use the Order Approval Screen...............................................................................................................93

Chapter 4: Customers And Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger)................102

Chapter 5: Direct Invoicing...........................................................................121

Chapter 7: Managing Inventory...................................................................147

Enter Stock Items..................................................................................................................................148

Enter Picking Results.............................................................................................................................166

Chapter 8: Procurement, Purchasing, and Making Payments....................174

Enter Supplier Invoices..........................................................................................................................184

Chapter 9: Lead Time Management.............................................................189

Chapter 10: Drop Shipment..........................................................................192

Chapter 11: Suppliers and Accounts Payable..............................................193

Reports and Enquiries..................................................................................................................................203

Chapter 12: Asset and Resource Management...........................................207

Chapter 13: Statistics.....................................................................................219

Chapter 14: Miscellaneous Features.............................................................229

Validation Snap Search................................................................................................................................232

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1. Open the Windows Start Menu.

3. Enter User Name and Password.

Once logged on, a company selection window appears.

5. Select the Financial Year.

6. Click OK to log on.

Advanced Logon Options

2. To log on exclusively, select the Logon Exclusively check box.

The Home Screen

Home Screen Areas

iScala Tree Menu

Tree Menu filtering is based on the following rules:

1. In iScala tree menu select necessary item.

3. Release the button to drop the item into place.

To Create a New Custom Tile

2. Select New Custom Tile... from the menu.

3. Set up necessary parameters in the New Custom Tile window:

1. In tile group right-click selected tile.

2. Select Change Tile... from the menu.

3. Set up necessary parameters in the Edit Standard Tile window:

New (Second) Session

1. In the status bar click Company/ Financial Year.

2. In the Logon dialog select a Company and Financial Year.

3. Select Run new session check box.

2. Select the Customize Entry Type command.

3. Click Customize in the upper right corner of the customization form.

Change The Color Schemes

To select an iScala color scheme:

Program Navigation And Data Entry

Enter Data In Form Fields

Use the following keyboard actions to navigate within a screen:

Customize An Entry Type

2. Select the Customize Entry Type command.

1. Tabs Area - This includes four tabs:

Chapter 2: Application Setup

6. Specify the name of the company’s bank in the Bank field.

11. Select the Currency to be used in the company.

Set Company Parameters

7. Click ? or press F4 to select a Minimum Coin value from the list.

Enter Accounting Dimensions

Use the Currency File